Ricoh B064 SERIES, B246 SERIES, D052 SERIES Service Manual
Advertisement
Advertisement
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES
/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES
SERVICE MANUAL
(Book 1 of 2) 002711MIU
MAINFRAME
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES
/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES
SERVICE MANUAL
Book 1 of 2
MAINFRAME
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
002711MIU
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.
©
2008 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information regarding service techniques, procedures, processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PRODUCT CODE
LEGEND
COMPANY
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH
Rev. 04/2008
SAVIN
B142
B143
B228
B246
B248
DSm660 SP
DSm675 SP
DSm651 SP
Dsm755
Dsm765
LD160 SP
LD175 SP
LD151 SP
LD255
LD265
Aficio 2060 SP
Aficio 2075 SP
Aficio 2051 SP
Aficio MP 5500
Aficio MP 6500
4060 SP
4075 SP
4051 SP
8055
8065
B250
B252
B253
D052
D053
D054
Dsm755 SP
Dsm765 SP
Dsm775 SP
MP 6000/SP
MP 7000/SP
MP 8000/SP
LD255 SP Aficio MP 5500SP 8055 SP
LD265 SP Aficio MP 6500SP 8065 SP
LD275 SP Aficio MP 7500SP 8075 SP
LD260/SP Aficio MP 6000/SP 8060/SP
LD270/SP Aficio MP 7000/SP 8070/SP
LD280/SP Aficio MP 8000/SP 8080/SP
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
1
DATE
07/2006
04/2008
COMMENTS
Original Printing
Added D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES
/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................1-1
1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT .........................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-2
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3
1.1.4 DIMENSIONS...................................................................................1-4
B064 Series .........................................................................................1-4
B140 Series .........................................................................................1-5
B246/D052 Series ................................................................................1-6
1.1.5 PERIPHERAL/OPTION SUMMARY TABLE.....................................1-7
1.1.6 POWER REQUIREMENTS ............................................................1-10
1.2 MAIN MACHINE (B064/B140 /B246/D052 EACH SERIES) ...................1-11
1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-11
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-12
Removing Tapes and Retainers .........................................................1-12
Connecting the ADF............................................................................1-14
Removing and Filling the Development Unit .......................................1-15
Re-installing the Development Unit.....................................................1-17
Initializing the Drum Settings (B064 Series) .......................................1-18
Initializing the Drum Settings (B140/B246/D052 Series) ....................1-19
Tandem Tray ......................................................................................1-20
Machine Level.....................................................................................1-22
Date/Time Setting ...............................................................................1-22
SP Codes............................................................................................1-22
1.3 A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (B475)..................................................................1-23
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-23
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........................................................1-24
1.4 LCT (B473)..............................................................................................1-26
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-26
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-27
Removing Tape ..................................................................................1-27
Preparing the Main Machine ...............................................................1-28
Installing the LCT................................................................................1-28
1.5 LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474)....................................................................1-30
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-30
1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-31
1.6 3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674) ........................................1-34
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-34
1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-35
Removing Tapes and Retainers .........................................................1-35
Installation...........................................................................................1-37
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
Selecting the Staple Supply Name .....................................................1-40
Enabling Booklet Binding ....................................................................1-40
1.7 PUNCH UNIT (B377) ..............................................................................1-41
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-41
1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-42
1.8 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470).....................................................1-44
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-44
1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-45
Removing Tapes and Retainers .........................................................1-45
Attaching the Extensions ....................................................................1-46
Attaching the Interposer Tray..............................................................1-47
Attaching the Corner Plates for the B478/B706 ..................................1-48
Right Rear Corner Plate (B478/B706 only) ........................................1-48
Right Front Corner Plate (B478/B706 only) .......................................1-49
Attaching the Finisher to the Machine.................................................1-50
1.9 9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)..........................................................................1-52
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-52
1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-53
Removing Tapes and Retainers .........................................................1-53
Installation...........................................................................................1-53
1.10 3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706) ..................................................1-55
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-55
1.10.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-56
1.10.3 MOVING THE FINISHER TO A NEW LOCATION .......................1-58
1.11 PUNCH UNIT (B531/B812) ...................................................................1-59
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-59
1.11.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-60
1.12 JOGGER UNIT (B513)..........................................................................1-64
1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-64
1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-65
1.13 Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)......................................................................1-66
1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-66
1.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-67
Before You Begin................................................................................1-67
Unpacking...........................................................................................1-68
Docking to the Finisher .......................................................................1-69
Docking to the Main Frame.................................................................1-72
1.14 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) .......................................1-74
1.14.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-74
1.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-75
Removing Tapes and Retainers .........................................................1-75
Docking the Finisher ...........................................................................1-78
Attaching the Trays .............................................................................1-81
Leveling the Finisher...........................................................................1-82
Selecting the Staple Supply Name .....................................................1-83
Enabling Booklet Binding (B700 Only) ...............................................1-83
Auxiliary Trays ....................................................................................1-84
1.15 PUNCH UNIT (B702) ............................................................................1-86
1.15.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-86
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
1.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-87
1.16 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)...................................................1-90
1.16.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-90
1.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-91
Removing Tapes and Retainers .........................................................1-91
Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706) ..........................................1-92
Attaching the Extensions for the B706 ................................................1-93
Prepare the Cover Interposer for the B706 .........................................1-94
Attach the Extensions to the B706 ......................................................1-95
Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701 ......................................1-96
Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/ B706) ..............................1-97
Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706 ...........................................1-98
Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine (B700/B701/B706) ....1-100
1.17 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703) ........................................................1-103
1.17.1 ACCESSORIES..........................................................................1-103
1.17.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..................................................1-104
1.18 MAIL BOX (B762) ...............................................................................1-106
1.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................1-106
1.18.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..................................................1-107
1.19 COPY TRAY (B756)............................................................................1-110
1.19.1 ACCESSORIES..........................................................................1-110
1.19.2 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................1-111
1.20 KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452) .1-114
1.20.1 KEY CARD BRACKET B498 ACCESSORIES ...........................1-114
1.20.2 KEY COUNTER BRACKET B452 ACCESSORIES....................1-115
1.20.3 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................1-116
Assemble the Key Counter Bracket ..................................................1-116
Install the Key Card Bracket and Assembled Key Counter ...............1-117
1.21 COPY CONNECTOR KITS .................................................................1-119
1.21.1 COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B525-10, -12) FOR B064 SERIES ..1-119
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-120
Installation.........................................................................................1-121
Installing the Hardware .....................................................................1-122
1.21.2 COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B328-03) FOR B140 SERIES ..........1-126
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-126
Preparation .......................................................................................1-127
Installation.........................................................................................1-128
1.21.3 COPY CONNECTOR (B842) FOR B246/D052 SERIES ............1-131
Accessories ......................................................................................1-131
Preparation .......................................................................................1-132
Installation.........................................................................................1-133
1.22 MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES ...........................................................1-136
1.22.1 PRINTER/SCANNER KIT (G338) , PRINTER KIT (G339) ..........1-136
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-136
1.22.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..................................................1-137
Inserting DIMMs................................................................................1-137
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-138
1.22.3 PS3 (B525-08) ............................................................................1-140
1.22.4 USB 2.0 (B525-01) .....................................................................1-141
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-141
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-141
USB SP Settings...............................................................................1-142
1.22.5 IEEE1394 (G561) FIREWIRE INTERFACE................................1-143
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-143
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-144
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394......................................................1-145
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394......................................................1-146
1.22.6 IEEE802.11B WIRELESS LAN (G628) .......................................1-147
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-147
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-148
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN .................................................1-149
SP Mode Settings for 802.11b Wireless LAN ...................................1-151
1.22.7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB) (B519) ..............................1-152
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-153
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-153
Installing the Firmware......................................................................1-153
Installing the Hardware .....................................................................1-154
1.23 MFP OPTIONS: B140 SERIES ...........................................................1-155
1.23.1 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD .......................1-155
Overview...........................................................................................1-155
Merging Applications.........................................................................1-156
Undo Exec ........................................................................................1-157
Storing Copied SD Cards On Site.....................................................1-158
1.23.2 OVERVIEW ................................................................................1-159
1.23.3 PRINTER/SCANNER KIT (B659) ...............................................1-160
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-160
Installation.........................................................................................1-161
1.23.4 PS3 (B525-15) ............................................................................1-164
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-164
Installation.........................................................................................1-164
1.23.5 USB 2.0 INTERFACE BOARD (B596-01) ..................................1-165
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-165
Installation.........................................................................................1-165
1.23.6 IEEE 1394 INTERFACE BOARD (B581-01) ..............................1-166
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-166
Installation.........................................................................................1-166
1.23.7 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE BOARD (B582-01, -02) ..................1-167
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-167
Installation.........................................................................................1-167
1.23.8 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT (G377) ...................................1-169
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-169
Installation.........................................................................................1-169
1.23.9 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609) .........................................1-170
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-170
Installation.........................................................................................1-170
1.23.10 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) .........................1-171
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-171
Before You Begin… ..........................................................................1-171
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
Seal Check And Removal .................................................................1-172
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-173
1.24 MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES .................................................1-176
1.24.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................1-176
1.24.2 COMMON PROCEDURES.........................................................1-177
Inserting SD Cards............................................................................1-177
Storing Copied SD Cards..................................................................1-177
1.24.3 PRINTER SCANNER KIT (B841/D406)......................................1-178
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-178
Installation.........................................................................................1-179
1.24.4 POSTSCRIPT3 (B525) ...............................................................1-182
Accessories ......................................................................................1-182
Installation.........................................................................................1-182
1.24.5 IEEE1394 INTERFACE BOARD (B581).....................................1-183
Accessories ......................................................................................1-183
Installation.........................................................................................1-183
1.24.6 WIRELESS LAN G813 (802.11B)...............................................1-184
Accessories ......................................................................................1-184
Installation.........................................................................................1-184
1.24.7 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE C B826........................1-185
Accessories ......................................................................................1-185
Installation.........................................................................................1-185
1.24.8 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE C B609 .............................1-186
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-186
Installation.........................................................................................1-186
1.24.9 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE C B735................1-187
ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-187
Before You Begin… ..........................................................................1-187
Seal Check And Removal .................................................................1-188
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-189
1.24.10 REMOTE COMMUNICATION GATE TYPE CM1 (B818) .........1-192
Accessories ......................................................................................1-192
Installation.........................................................................................1-192
1.24.11 USB HOST INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B825) .......................1-195
Accessory Check ..............................................................................1-195
Installation.........................................................................................1-194
1.24.12 BROWSER UNIT TYPE B (B828) ............................................1-196
Accessories ......................................................................................1-196
Installation.........................................................................................1-196
1.24.13 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE C (B829) .......................1-197
Accessories ......................................................................................1-197
Installation.........................................................................................1-197
B246 Series: IPU ..............................................................................1-197
1.24.14 VM CARD (B861) .....................................................................1-199
Accessories ......................................................................................1-199
Installation.........................................................................................1-199
1.24.15 IEEE1284 B679 ........................................................................1-200
Accessories ......................................................................................1-200
Installation.........................................................................................1-200
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
1.24.16 GIGABIT ETHERNET G381 .....................................................1-201
Accessories ......................................................................................1-201
Installation.........................................................................................1-201
1.24.17 FAX OPTION TYPE 7500 (B819) .............................................1-202
Component Check ............................................................................1-202
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-203
1.24.18 G3 INTERFACE TYPE 7500 (B820).........................................1-216
Component Check ............................................................................1-216
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-217
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 PM TABLES..............................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 MAIN MACHINE ...............................................................................2-1
2.1.2 ADF ..................................................................................................2-5
2.1.3 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES ...............................................2-5
LCT (Large Capacity Tray) B473 ..........................................................2-5
Cover Interposer Tray B470 .................................................................2-5
3000-Sheet Finisher with 50-sheet stapler and Saddle-Stitching
B468/B469/B674 ..................................................................................2-6
3000-Sheet Finisher B478/B706 ..........................................................2-6
Z-Folding Unit Type 2105 (B660) .........................................................2-6
2000/3000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700/B701 .....................................2-7
Punch B702 ..........................................................................................2-7
2.2 RELATED SP CODES ..............................................................................2-7
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS .............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 DRUM...............................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 DRUM UNIT .....................................................................................3-1
3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ...................................................................3-2
3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT...............................................................................3-2
3.1.5 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................3-2
3.1.6 CHARGE CORONA..........................................................................3-3
3.1.7 DEVELOPMENT...............................................................................3-3
3.1.8 CLEANING .......................................................................................3-4
3.1.9 FUSING UNIT...................................................................................3-4
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
3.1.10 PAPER FEED.................................................................................3-4
3.1.11 USED TONER ................................................................................3-4
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS.....................................................3-5
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS .............................................................................3-5
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS...................................................................................3-5
3.3 OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS ...................................3-6
3.3.1 OPERATION PANEL........................................................................3-6
3.3.2 FRONT DOOR .................................................................................3-6
3.3.3 RIGHT COVERS ..............................................................................3-7
3.3.4 LEFT COVERS.................................................................................3-8
3.3.5 REAR COVERS................................................................................3-9
3.4 SCANNER...............................................................................................3-10
3.4.1 ADF AND TOP COVERS ...............................................................3-10
ADF.....................................................................................................3-10
Top Covers .........................................................................................3-11
3.4.2 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-12
3.4.3 SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS.........................................3-13
3.4.4 LENS BLOCK .................................................................................3-14
3.4.5 EXPOSURE LAMP .........................................................................3-15
3.4.6 LAMP REGULATOR.......................................................................3-16
3.4.7 SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD (SDRB).................................3-17
3.4.8 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-18
3.4.9 SCANNER HP SENSOR ................................................................3-19
3.4.10 SCANNER WIRE REPLACEMENT ..............................................3-20
Preparation for Removal .....................................................................3-20
Wire Removal: Back ...........................................................................3-21
Wire Removal: Front ...........................................................................3-22
Attaching the New Wire ......................................................................3-23
3.4.11 SCANNER HEATER.....................................................................3-25
3.5 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................3-26
3.5.1 CAUTION DECALS ........................................................................3-26
3.5.2 LD UNIT AND POLYGON MOTOR ................................................3-27
3.5.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR REPLACEMENT........3-29
3.5.4 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT.............................................................3-30
3.6 DRUM UNIT ............................................................................................3-32
3.6.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL.................................................3-32
Removal..............................................................................................3-32
Re-installation .....................................................................................3-33
Replacement with a used Development Unit ......................................3-33
3.6.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................3-34
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND GRID...........................................3-35
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANING PADS ...............................3-36
3.6.5 OPC DRUM REMOVAL..................................................................3-37
Dusting the Drum Surface...................................................................3-38
3.6.6 PTL (B140/B246/D052 SERIES ONLY)..........................................3-39
3.6.7 QUENCHING LAMP .......................................................................3-40
3.6.8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR........................................................3-40
3.6.9 CLEANING FILTER ........................................................................3-41
3.6.10 CLEANING BLADE.......................................................................3-41
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
3.6.11 CLEANING BRUSH......................................................................3-42
3.6.12 PICK-OFF PAWLS .......................................................................3-43
3.6.13 ID SENSOR..................................................................................3-43
3.6.14 DRUM MOTOR.............................................................................3-44
3.6.15 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE ..................................................3-45
3.6.16 TONER SEPARATION UNIT........................................................3-45
3.6.17 OZONE FILTERS .........................................................................3-46
3.6.18 OPTICS DUST FILTER ................................................................3-46
3.6.19 INTERNAL DUST FILTER............................................................3-46
3.7 DEVELOPMENT UNIT............................................................................3-47
3.7.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT......................................................3-47
3.7.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER ...............................................................3-49
3.7.3 ENTRANCE SEAL AND SIDE SEALS ...........................................3-50
3.7.4 TD SENSOR...................................................................................3-51
3.7.5 TONER END SENSOR ..................................................................3-51
3.7.6 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR..............................................................3-52
3.7.7 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ..............................................................3-53
3.8 TRANSFER BELT UNIT .........................................................................3-54
3.8.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT .................................................................3-54
3.8.2 TRANSFER BELT ..........................................................................3-55
3.8.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING BLADE .....................................3-57
3.8.4 DISCHARGE PLATE ......................................................................3-58
3.8.5 TRANSFER POWER PACK ...........................................................3-59
3.9 FUSING UNIT..........................................................................................3-60
3.9.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-60
3.9.2 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR (B140/B246 SERIES) ..3-62
3.9.3 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE HP SENSOR (B140/B246/D052
SERIES) ...................................................................................................3-63
3.9.4 FUSING UNIT THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS .................3-64
B064 Series .......................................................................................3-65
B140 Series .......................................................................................3-65
B246/D052 Series ..............................................................................3-66
3.9.5 WEB CLEANING ROLLER.............................................................3-67
Web Unit Disassembly........................................................................3-67
Web Unit Assembly.............................................................................3-68
3.9.6 WEB MOTOR AND WEB END SENSOR.......................................3-69
3.9.7 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING UNIT ........................................3-70
B064 Series .......................................................................................3-70
B140/B246/D052 Series ....................................................................3-71
3.9.8 FUSING LAMPS, HOT ROLLER, AND PRESSURE ROLLER.......3-72
B064 Series : Fusing Lamps ...............................................................3-72
B140/B246/D052 Series : Fusing Lamps ............................................3-73
Important Notes about Fusing Unit Assembly (B064 Series) .............3-78
3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER.....................................................................3-79
3.9.10 STRIPPER PAWLS ......................................................................3-80
B064 Series .......................................................................................3-80
B140/B246/D052 Series ....................................................................3-81
3.9.11 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT ...............................................3-82
3.9.12 FUSING UNIT EXIT SENSOR......................................................3-83
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
3.9.13 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR.................................................................3-84
3.9.14 FUSING EXIT AND EXIT UNIT ENTRANCE SENSORS .............3-85
3.10 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................3-86
3.10.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL ...........................................................3-86
3.10.2 DUPLEX UNIT SIDE-TO-SIDE ADJUSTMENT............................3-87
3.10.3 JOGGER FENCE ADJUSTMENT ................................................3-87
3.10.4 DUPLEX MOTORS.......................................................................3-88
Duplex Inverter Motor .........................................................................3-88
Duplex Jogger and Transport Motors..................................................3-89
3.10.5 DUPLEX TRANSPORT CLUTCH/JOGGER HP SENSOR...........3-90
3.10.6 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR...................................................3-91
3.10.7 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSOR 3 .............................................3-92
3.10.8 INVERTER EXIT SENSOR, TRANSPORT SENSORS 1 & 2.......3-93
3.10.9 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT ....................................3-94
3.11 PAPER FEED........................................................................................3-95
3.11.1 PAPER TRAY REMOVAL ............................................................3-95
3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT...................3-97
3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT.............................3-98
3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......3-99
3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT..........................3-100
3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE....................................3-102
3.11.7 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT .....3-105
3.11.8 FEED UNIT.................................................................................3-106
3.11.9 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT................3-108
3.11.10 RELAY SENSOR......................................................................3-109
3.11.11 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD.........................3-110
3.11.12 BY-PASS TRAY ROLLERS......................................................3-111
3.11.13 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT .3-112
3.11.14 REGISTRATION SENSOR.......................................................3-113
3.11.15 REGISTRATION AND BY-PASS UNIT REMOVAL ..................3-114
3.12 PCBS AND HDD .................................................................................3-116
3.12.1 BCU BOARD (BASE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT) .......................3-116
BCU: B064, B140 Series .................................................................3-116
BCU, IOB: B246/D052 Series ..........................................................3-117
3.12.2 CONTROLLER BOARD .............................................................3-118
B064 Series: Controller Board .......................................................3-118
B140 Series: Controller Board .......................................................3-119
B246/D052 Series: Controller Board .............................................3-120
3.12.3 IPU BOARD................................................................................3-121
B064 Series: IPU Board ..................................................................3-121
B140 Series: IPU, Mother Board ....................................................3-122
B246 Series: IPU .............................................................................3-125
B246/D052 Series Motherboard .....................................................3-126
3.12.4 DEVELOPMENT POWER PACK ...............................................3-128
3.12.5 PSU, PFC BOARDS ...................................................................3-129
B064 Series .....................................................................................3-129
B140 Series PSU .............................................................................3-129
B246/D052 Series PSU ....................................................................3-130
3.12.6 HDD............................................................................................3-131
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
B064 Series HDD .............................................................................3-131
B140 Series HDD .............................................................................3-132
B246/D052 Series HDD ...................................................................3-133
3.12.7 NVRAM.......................................................................................3-134
NVRAM: B064 Series, B140 Series ................................................3-134
NVRAM: B246/D052 Series .............................................................3-136
3.12.8 DIMMS........................................................................................3-138
3.13 ADF .....................................................................................................3-139
3.13.1 ADF COVERS ............................................................................3-139
3.13.2 FEED UNIT.................................................................................3-140
3.13.3 FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER.........................................3-141
3.13.4 SEPARATION ROLLER .............................................................3-142
3.13.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR.........................................................3-143
3.13.6 ADF CONTROL BOARD ............................................................3-144
3.13.7 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, AND SKEW
CORRECTION SENSORS ......................................................3-145
3.13.8 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS.................................................3-146
3.13.9 DF POSITION AND APS SENSOR ............................................3-147
3.13.10 OTHER ADF SENSORS ..........................................................3-148
3.13.11 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR ...............................................3-149
3.13.12 FEED MOTOR..........................................................................3-149
3.13.13 EXIT MOTOR AND TRANSPORT MOTOR .............................3-150
3.13.14 PICK-UP ROLLER MOTOR AND HP SENSOR .......................3-151
3.13.15 CIS POWER SUPPLY BOARD AND CIS UNIT........................3-152
3.13.16 ADF EXIT SENSOR .................................................................3-153
3.14 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ..................3-154
3.14.1 PRINTING ..................................................................................3-154
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side.........................................3-154
Blank Margin.....................................................................................3-155
Registration Buckle Adjustment ........................................................3-155
3.14.2 SCANNING.................................................................................3-156
Registration: Platen Mode.................................................................3-156
Magnification.....................................................................................3-156
3.14.3 ADF SCANNING ADJUSTMENTS .............................................3-157
Vertical Black Lines...........................................................................3-157
DIP Switch Settings (ADF Main Board).............................................3-157
ADF Skew Correction .......................................................................3-157
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ......................................................3-159
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 RECOVERY METHODS...................................................................4-2
4.1.2 IMPORTANT SP CODES .................................................................4-2
4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES.........................................................4-3
4.1.4 JAM DETECTION.............................................................................4-6
SENSOR LOCATIONS .........................................................................4-6
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
4.1.5 TIMING CHARTS .............................................................................4-7
Feed, Transport, Feed Out: Face-up ....................................................4-7
Transport, Inverter, Feed Out: Face-down............................................4-8
Duplex Transport ..................................................................................4-9
4.1.6 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ...............................................................4-10
4.2 B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE .............................................................4-11
4.2.1 B064 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS...............................4-11
4.2.2 B064 SERIES SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS....................................4-12
SC100: Scanning System ...................................................................4-12
SC300: Image Development System (1).............................................4-15
SC400: Image Development System (2).............................................4-20
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems .................4-21
SC600: Data Communication .............................................................4-24
SC700: Peripherals.............................................................................4-26
SC800: Overall System.......................................................................4-29
SC900: Miscellaneous ........................................................................4-32
4.2.3 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT ................4-34
4.3 B140/B246 SERIES SERVICE MODE....................................................4-37
4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK..................................................4-37
4.3.2 B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS............4-38
4.3.3 B140/B246/D052 SERIES SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS.................4-39
SC100: Scanning System ...................................................................4-40
SC200: Exposure................................................................................4-43
SC300: Image Development System (1).............................................4-44
SC400: Image Development System (2).............................................4-49
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems .................4-50
SC600: Data Communication .............................................................4-55
SC700: Peripherals.............................................................................4-57
SC800: Overall System.......................................................................4-66
SC900: Miscellaneous ........................................................................4-72
4.3.4 JAM CODES...................................................................................4-76
Main Unit: Paper Jam Errors...............................................................4-76
Finisher B469 Jam Codes ..................................................................4-77
Finisher B468/B674 Jam Codes.........................................................4-77
Finisher B478/B706 Jam Codes.........................................................4-78
Mailbox B471 Jam Codes...................................................................4-78
Cover Interposer Tray B470 Jam Codes ............................................4-78
Z-Folding Unit B660 Jam Codes.........................................................4-79
4.3.5 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT ................4-80
4.4 OTHER PROBLEMS (B064/B140/B246/D052 SERIES) ........................4-83
4.4.1 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS ........................................................4-83
4.4.2 COMMON PROBLEMS ..................................................................4-83
4.4.3 FREQUENT PAPER JAMS ............................................................4-84
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ...................................................................5-1
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-1
To Enter and Exit the Service Mode .....................................................5-2
To Enter and Exit the Super SP Mode ..................................................5-2
To Switch to the Copy Window for Test Printing...................................5-2
Using the SP Mode ...............................................................................5-3
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-4
SP Mode Print (SMC Print) ...................................................................5-5
5.2 RESETS ....................................................................................................5-6
5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801 ......................................................5-6
5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET .............................................5-10
Software Reset ...................................................................................5-10
Resetting the System..........................................................................5-10
Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only ...............................5-10
Resetting Scanner Features Only.......................................................5-10
5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ...................................................................5-11
5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-003.....................................5-11
Test Pattern Table ..............................................................................5-12
5.3.2 IPU FRONT/BACK TEST PATTERNS: SP2902-001,002...............5-13
Test Pattern Table ..............................................................................5-14
5.3.3 IPU PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-004..............................5-15
5.4 SOFTWARE UPDATE ............................................................................5-16
5.4.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE: B140/B246/D052 SERIES 5-16
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel.......................................5-21
Downloading Stamp Data ...................................................................5-21
SD Card Boot (Forced Boot)...............................................................5-21
NVRAM Data Upload/Download .........................................................5-23
5.4.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE: B064 SERIES ...................5-24
GW Controller/BCU Update ................................................................5-25
Forced Update ....................................................................................5-26
Stamp Data Update ............................................................................5-26
Operation Panel Software Update ......................................................5-27
Scanner Update..................................................................................5-28
NIB Update .........................................................................................5-28
NetFile Firmware Update ....................................................................5-28
NVRAM Update ..................................................................................5-29
Firmware Update Notes ......................................................................5-29
5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ..................................................5-30
5.5.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY ...................................................................5-30
5.5.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLE.............................................................5-31
SP1xxx Feed ......................................................................................5-31
SP2xxx Drum......................................................................................5-37
SP3xxx Processing .............................................................................5-55
SP4xxx Scanner .................................................................................5-58
SP5xxx Mode......................................................................................5-69
SP6xxx Peripherals...........................................................................5-121
SP7xxx Data Logs ............................................................................5-132
SP8xxx: Data Log2 ...........................................................................5-149
5.5.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE.........................................................5-178
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
5.5.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE .......................................................5-179
5.6 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK ......................................................................5-191
5.6.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803 ................................................5-191
5.6.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804 ............................................5-197
5.6.3 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 ......................................................5-199
5.6.4 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008 ..................................................5-200
5.6.5 FINISHER INPUT CHECK: SP6117 (B478/B704) ......................5-201
5.6.6 FINISHER OUTPUT CHECK: SP6118 .........................................5-203
5.6.7 FINISHER 1 INPUT CHECK: 6121...............................................5-204
5.6.8 FINISHER 1 OUTPUT CHECK: 6124...........................................5-205
5.6.9 FINISHER 2 INPUT CHECK: 6122...............................................5-206
5.6.10 FINISHER 2 OUTPUT CHECK: 6125.........................................5-207
5.7 USING THE DEBUG LOG (B140/B246)...............................................5-208
5.7.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ...........5-208
5.7.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD .....................5-211
5.7.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-212
5.7.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-213
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-213
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-213
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-213
5.8 USER TOOLS .......................................................................................5-214
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-214
5.8.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS ....................................................................5-215
B064 Series System Settings...........................................................5-215
B140/B246/D052 Series System Settings........................................5-217
5.8.3 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES ..............................5-220
5.8.4 INQUIRY.......................................................................................5-224
5.8.5 COUNTER....................................................................................5-224
5.9 DIP SWITCH TABLES ..........................................................................5-225
5.9.1 BCU (BASE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT).......................................5-225
5.9.2 CONTROLLER BOARD ...............................................................5-225
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................ 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 PAPER PATH (WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY) ......................6-3
6.1.2 PAPER PATH (WITH 9-BIN MAILBOX) ...........................................6-4
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-5
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE ..............................................................................6-6
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................6-6
6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................6-7
BCU (Base Engine Control Unit)...........................................................6-7
Controller Board....................................................................................6-7
MB (Mother Board) ...............................................................................6-7
IPU (Image Processing Unit) ................................................................6-8
SBU (Sensor Board Unit)......................................................................6-9
PFC (Paper Feed Control) ....................................................................6-9
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) ..............................................................6-9
VIB (Video Interface Board) ..................................................................6-9
DRB (Drive Board) ................................................................................6-9
CNB (Connection Board) ......................................................................6-9
HDD (Hard Disk Drive)........................................................................6-10
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW................................................................6-11
6.4 ADF .........................................................................................................6-14
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-14
6.4.2 ADF DRIVE LAYOUT .....................................................................6-15
6.4.3 PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT .................................................................6-16
6.4.4 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT....................................................................6-17
6.4.5 ORIGINAL SEPARATION ..............................................................6-18
6.4.6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT ...............................................................6-19
6.4.7 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION..................................................6-20
6.4.8 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-22
6.4.9 ADF SCANNING ............................................................................6-25
6.4.10 JAM DETECTION.........................................................................6-26
6.5 SCANNING .............................................................................................6-27
6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-27
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-28
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-29
Sensors...............................................................................................6-29
Detection Timing.................................................................................6-30
6.5.4 SCANNING MAGNIFICATION .......................................................6-31
Book Mode..........................................................................................6-31
6.5.5 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS) ......................................................6-32
Xenon Lamp → CCD ADS..................................................................6-32
CIS ADS .............................................................................................6-32
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING............................................................................6-33
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-33
6.6.2 IMAGE PROCESSING FLOW........................................................6-34
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES .....................................................6-35
6.6.4 IMAGE QUALITY SP ADJUSTMENTS...........................................6-36
Custom Settings for Each Mode: Image Quality .................................6-37
Custom Settings for Each Mode: Line Width Correction .....................6-38
Custom Setting: Duplex Scanning Mode Original Image Quality Settings.. 6-40
Settings Adjustable for Each Original Mode........................................6-41
6.6.5 RELATION BETWEEN THE SP AND UP SETTINGS....................6-42
6.6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING TROUBLESHOOTING ..............................6-44
Removing Background from Coarse Paper ........................................6-44
Improving the Appearance of a Copy of a Color Document................6-44
Removing Vertical White Lines During Duplex Scanning....................6-45
Equalizing Duplex Scanned Image Quality of Front/Back Sides.........6-46
Equalizing Image Quality of Front Sides for Duplex and Simplex Modes ...6-46
6.7 LASER EXPOSURE ...............................................................................6-47
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-47
6.7.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-48
6.7.3 FOUR-BEAM EXPOSURE .............................................................6-49
6.7.4 COOLING FAN...............................................................................6-50
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
6.7.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES ................................................................6-51
B064 Series, B140 Series Safety Switches.......................................6-51
B246/D052 Series Safety Switches ...................................................6-52
6.8 DRUM UNIT ............................................................................................6-53
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-53
6.8.2 OPC DRUM ....................................................................................6-54
6.8.3 DRUM DRIVE.................................................................................6-54
6.8.4 DRUM CHARGE.............................................................................6-55
6.8.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANING ..........................................6-56
6.8.6 DRUM PICK-OFF MECHANISM ....................................................6-57
6.8.7 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-58
6.8.8 DRUM VENTILATION AND OZONE FILTER.................................6-59
6.8.9 TONER RECYCLING .....................................................................6-60
6.8.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION....................................................6-61
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-61
Error Detection....................................................................................6-61
6.8.11 PROCESS CONTROL..................................................................6-62
What Happens at Power On ...............................................................6-62
Drum Potential Sensor Calibration......................................................6-63
Development Bias, Bias Grid, and LD Adjustment..............................6-64
ID Sensor Calibration (Vsg) ................................................................6-66
TD Sensor Calibration (Vref)...............................................................6-66
6.9 DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY................................................6-67
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-67
Development Unit ...............................................................................6-67
Toner Supply ......................................................................................6-68
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................6-69
6.9.3 DEVELOPER/TONER MIXING (AGITATION)................................6-70
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-71
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................6-72
6.9.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT DRIVE AND VENTILATION ......................6-73
6.9.7 TONER END SENSOR ..................................................................6-74
6.9.8 SHUTTER MECHANISM................................................................6-74
6.9.9 TONER BOTTLE SUPPLY AND VENTILATION ............................6-75
6.9.10 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .......................................................6-76
Sensor Control Mode ..........................................................................6-76
Pixel Count Toner Supply Mode .........................................................6-77
TD Sensor Initialization .......................................................................6-78
Determining Vref.................................................................................6-78
Toner Supply without ID Sensor and TD Sensors ..............................6-79
Abnormal TD Sensor Output...............................................................6-79
Abnormal ID Sensor Output................................................................6-79
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-80
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-80
6.10 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION................................6-81
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-81
6.10.2 TRANSFER BELT LIFT ................................................................6-82
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-82
Timing .................................................................................................6-83
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
6.10.3 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE ........................................................6-84
6.10.4 TRANSFER CURRENT SETTINGS .............................................6-85
6.10.5 TRANSFER CURRENT CIRCUIT ................................................6-86
6.10.6 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE AND PAPER TRANSPORT................6-87
6.10.7 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .....................................................6-88
6.10.8 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................6-89
6.11 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-90
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-90
Tray Capacities...................................................................................6-91
Built-in Feed Stations..........................................................................6-91
By-pass Feed......................................................................................6-91
Paper Registration ..............................................................................6-91
Jam Removal......................................................................................6-91
6.11.2 DRIVE...........................................................................................6-92
6.11.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM – TRAY 2,3....................6-93
Bottom Plate Lift .................................................................................6-93
Lift Sensor...........................................................................................6-94
6.11.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM........................6-95
Paper Feed and Separation: No Paper Present .................................6-95
Paper Feed and Separation................................................................6-96
Separation Roller Release Mechanism...............................................6-97
6.11.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END – TRAYS 2 AND 3 .........6-98
6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................6-99
Tandem Tray (Tray 1) .........................................................................6-99
Universal Cassettes (Tray 2, 3) ..........................................................6-99
6.11.7 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS............................................6-100
6.11.8 TANDEM TRAY – TRAY 1 .........................................................6-101
Overview...........................................................................................6-101
Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray ..............................6-102
Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection..............................................6-103
Fence Drive ......................................................................................6-105
Rear Fence Drive..............................................................................6-106
Tray Side-to-side Positioning ............................................................6-107
6.11.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM – TRAYS 1 TO 3 ...............6-108
6.11.10 BY-PASS TRAY........................................................................6-109
By-pass Feed and Separation ..........................................................6-109
By-pass Tray Paper End Detection...................................................6-110
By-pass Paper Size Detection ..........................................................6-111
6.11.11 PAPER REGISTRATION..........................................................6-112
Overview...........................................................................................6-112
Paper Registration Drive...................................................................6-113
Jam Removal at Paper Registration .................................................6-114
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ...................................................6-115
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-115
B064 Series .....................................................................................6-115
B140/B246/D052 Series ..................................................................6-116
All Series .........................................................................................6-116
6.12.2 FUSING MECHANISM ...............................................................6-117
B064 Series .....................................................................................6-117
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
B140/B246/D052 Series ..................................................................6-118
6.12.3 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................6-119
B064 Series .....................................................................................6-119
B140/B246/D052 Series ...................................................................6-120
6.12.4 HOT ROLLER CLEANING .........................................................6-121
Overview...........................................................................................6-121
Web Drive .........................................................................................6-122
Web Near End ..................................................................................6-122
Web End ...........................................................................................6-122
6.12.5 FUSING UNIT ENTRANCE GUIDE…………………………………6-123
6.12.6 FUSING UNIT DRIVE...................................................................6-124
6.12.7 CPM DOWN MODE .....................................................................6-125
B140 Series .....................................................................................6-125
6.12.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL .........................................6-126
6.12.9 EXIT .............................................................................................6-128
6.12.7 EXIT JUNCTION GATE................................................................6-129
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT......................................................................................6-130
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-130
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE ...........................................................................6-131
6.13.3 INVERTER OPERATION .............................................................6-132
Inverter Feed In and Jogging ...........................................................6-132
Inverter Feed Out..............................................................................6-133
6.13.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED ..................................................................6-134
6.13.4 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED .....................................................6-135
6.14 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...................................................................6-137
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-137
6.14.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE..............................................................6-138
Entering Energy Saver Mode ...........................................................6-138
What Happens In Energy Saver Mode .............................................6-138
Return to Standby Mode ..................................................................6-138
6.14.3 LOW POWER MODE ...................................................................6-139
Entering Low Power Mode ...............................................................6-139
What Happens In Low Power Mode .................................................6-139
Return to Standby Mode ..................................................................6-139
6.14.4 AUTO OFF MODE........................................................................6-140
Entering Auto Off Mode ...................................................................6-140
What Happens In Auto Off Mode .....................................................6-140
Return to Auto Off Mode ..................................................................6-140
Disabling Auto Off Mode ..................................................................6-140
6.14.5 NIGHT MODE...............................................................................6-141
Entering Stand By Night Mode ........................................................6-141
What Happens In Stand By or Night Mode ......................................6-141
Return to Stand By Mode ................................................................6-141
Energy Saver Changes For B140 And B246 ....................................6-142
6.15 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE D052 AND B246 .............................6-143
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 7-1
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................7-1
7.1.1 COPIER............................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 ADF ..................................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 POWER CONSUMPTION ................................................................7-4
7.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................7-7
7.3 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................7-8
7.3.1 A3/DLT KIT (B475) ...........................................................................7-8
7.3.2 LCT (LARGE CAPACITY TRAY) (B473) ..........................................7-8
7.3.3 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH SADDLE-STITCH AND
50-SHEET STAPLER (B468) .............................................................7-9
General .................................................................................................7-9
Upper Tray............................................................................................7-9
Lower Tray............................................................................................7-9
Proof Tray .............................................................................................7-9
Staple Specifications...........................................................................7-10
Saddle-Stitch Staple Specifications ....................................................7-10
7.3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH 50-SHEET STAPLER (B469)........7-11
General ...............................................................................................7-11
Lower Tray..........................................................................................7-11
Proof Tray ...........................................................................................7-11
Staple Specifications...........................................................................7-11
7.3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER WITH SADDLE-STITCH
AND 50-SHEET STAPLER (B674) ...................................................7-12
General ...............................................................................................7-12
Upper Tray..........................................................................................7-12
Lower Tray..........................................................................................7-13
Proof Tray ...........................................................................................7-13
Staple Specifications...........................................................................7-14
Saddle-Stitch Staple Specifications ....................................................7-14
7.3.6 PUNCH UNIT (B377) ......................................................................7-15
7.3.7 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470) ............................................7-16
7.3.8 3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706) ............................................7-17
7.3.9 PUNCH UNIT (B531) ......................................................................7-18
7.3.10 PUNCH UNIT (A812) ....................................................................7-19
7.3.11 JOGGER UNIT (B513) .................................................................7-20
7.3.12 9-BIN MAILBOX (B471) ................................................................7-20
7.3.13 LG/B4 KIT (B474) .........................................................................7-20
7.3.14 Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660) .............................................................7-20
7.3.15 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B701) ...................................................7-21
7.3.16 2000-SHEET FINISHER (B700) ...................................................7-23
7.3.17 PUNCH UNIT (B702) ....................................................................7-25
7.3.18 9-BIN MAILBOX (B762) ................................................................7-25
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2007
SEE B064/B140/B246 SERIES SERVICE MANUAL BOOK 2 OF 2
FOR ACCESSORIES:
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (B473)
SEE SECTION B473 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
A3/DLT TRAY KIT (B475)
SEE SECTION B475 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B468/B469/B674)
SEE SECTION B468/B469/B674 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
PUNCH UNIT (B377)
SEE SECTION B377 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
SEE SECTION B470 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)
SEE SECTION B471 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B478)/JOGGER UNIT (B513)/
PUNCH UNIT (B531)
SEE SECTION B478/B513/B531 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706)
SEE SECTION B706 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
SEE SECTION B660 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCANNER UNIT/PRINTER UNIT (G338/G339)
SEE SECTION G338/G339 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
MFP OPTIONS (B659/B581/B596/B582/G377/B609/B735)
SEE SECTION B659/B581/B596/B582/G377/B609/B735 FOR DETAILED TABLE
OF CONTENTS
2000/3000-SHEET FINISHER (B700/B701)
SEE SECTION B700/B701 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
FAX OPTION/G3 INTERFACE OPTION 7500 (B819/B820)
SEE SECTION B819/B820 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 03/2008
What This Manual Contains
⇒
This preliminary manual describes the installation procedures for the
B064/B065/B246/D052 Series Copiers and their peripheral devices:
Conventions in this Manual
This manual describes more than one machine.
Unless otherwise specifically noted, the following short notations are used in text to refer to the following machines.
B064 Series
B140 Series
⇒
B246 Series
D052 Series
B064/B065
B140/B141/B142/B143/B163/B228
B246/B248/B249/B250/B252/B253
D052/D053/D054
This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Clamp
Short Edge Feed (SEF) Long Edge Feed (LEF)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
B473 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
TROUBLESHOOTING
B468/B469/B674 3000-SHEET FINISHER
B377 PUNCH UNIT
B471 9-BIN MAILBOX
B478 3000-SHEET FINISHER/B513 JOGGER
UNIT/B531 PUNCH UNIT
B706 3000-SHEET FINISHER
B660 Z-FOLDING UNIT
B700/B701 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER
G338/G339 SCANNER /PRINTER
UNIT
Tab index continued on next page…
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Tab index continued…
SERVICE TABLES
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
B475 A3/DLT TRAY KIT
B470 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY
B659/B581/B596/B582/G377/B609/B735 MFP OPTIONS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: Recommended: 15 ° C to 25 ° C (59 ° F to 77 ° F)
Possible: 10 ° C to 32 ° C (50 ° F to 90 ° F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH (27 ° C 80%, 32 ° C 54%)
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or strong light.)
4. Ventilation:
5. Ambient Dust:
Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour
Less than 0.10 mg/m 3
Humidity
80%
54%
Operation range
15%
10°C
(50°F)
27°C
(80.6°F)
32°C
(89.6°F)
Temperature
B064I502.WMF
6. If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the machine where it will be:
1) Subjected to sudden temperature changes
2) Directly exposed to cool air from an air-conditioner
3) Directly exposed to heat from a heater
SM 1-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet) above sea level.
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base with the front and back of the machine within ± 5 mm (0.2") of level.
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
11. Do not connect the machine to a power source shared with another electrical appliance.
12. The machine can generate an electromagnetic field which could interfere with radio or television reception.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
1. Front to back: Within ± 5 mm (0.2") of level
2. Right to left: Within ± 5 mm (0.2") of level
The machine legs may be screwed up or down in order to level the machine. Set a carpenter’s level on the exposure glass.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Place the copier near the power source, providing minimum clearance as shown below. The same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral devices are installed.
50 mm (2") Back
100 mm (4") Left 40 mm (1.6") Right
700 mm (27.6") Front
B064I001.WMF
SM 1-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.4 DIMENSIONS
B064 Series
480 mm (18.9")
425 mm (16.7")
1,098 mm (43.2")
1,014 mm (39.9")
1,165 mm (45.9")
90 mm (3.5")
734 mm (28.9") 690 mm (27.2")
314 mm (12.4")
B064I003.WMF
620 mm (24.4")
750 mm (29.5")
458 mm (18")
B064I002.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140 Series
480 mm (18.9")
425 mm (16.7")
1,098 mm (43.2")
1,014 mm (39.9")
1,165 mm (45.9")
620 mm (24.4")
90 mm (3.5")
734 mm (28.9") 690 mm (27.2")
177 mm (6.9")
314 mm (12.4")
B064I140.WMF
750 mm (29.5")
458 mm (18")
B064I002.WMF
SM 1-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
B246 Series
480 mm (18.9")
425 mm (16.7")
1103 mm (43.4")
978 mm (38.5")
1165 mm (45.9")
90 mm (3.5")
657mm (25.9") 690 mm (27.2") 314 mm (12.4")
177 mm (6.9")
613 mm (24.1")
790 mm (31.1")
458 mm (18")
B064I002.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.1.5 PERIPHERAL/OPTION SUMMARY TABLE
The table below summarizes all the peripheral devices and controller options that can be installed with the B064, B140, and B246 Series machines. O: YES, X: NO
Series
Class* 1 Comment
B328
B377
Copy Connector Kit
Type 2105
Punch Unit Type
1045
X O X
O O X
1
2
Links two mainframes.
Installed in B468, B469, B674
Bracket Type 1027
SR850
B470 Cover
Tray
X
O O X
O O X
Mailbox O O X
1
1
2
2
Punching, sorting, shifting, corner/booklet stapling.
Punching, sorting, shifting, corner stapling only.
Installed on B468, B469,
B674, or B478, B706
Installed on the B468, B469, or B674.
B473
B474
LCIT RT43
81/2"x 14" Paper
Size Tray Type
1075
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
Paper bank for LT/A4 paper
Paper bank for LG paper
B476
Unit Type 1075
Copy Tray Type
1075
3000 Sheet Finisher
O O O
O X X
2
2
Installed in Tray 1 (Tandem
Tray)
Small output tray for mainframe
B478 O
O
X
O
X
O
1
1
Punching, sorting, shifting, corner stapling only.
Connected directly to mainframe.
B499
B513
Bracket
Tab Sheet Holder
Type 3260
Output Jogger Unit
O
X
O
O
O
O
2
2
Installed in Tray 1 (Tandem
Tray)
Installed in B478 or B706
Type 1075
B515 IEEE Board
O X
B525-08
B525-15
B525-44
Converter
Postscript 3 Type
1075
Postscript 3 Type
2075
Postscript 3 Type
7500
O
X
X
X
O
B531-27
O O O 3 Board
O O O 2 Installed in B478 or B706.
B531-17
B581
Punch Unit Type
1075 EU 2/4
Punch Unit Type
1075 NA 3/2
IEEE 1394 Interface
Board Type B
O O O 2 Installed in B478 or B706.
D 2075 256MB
Interface
Board Type 2105
B596-01 USB 2.0 Interface
Board Type B
Format
Converter Type C
X
SM 1-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Series
Rev. 04/2008
Class*
1
Comment
Format
Converter Type B
B659 Printer/Scanner
Type 2075
B660 Z-folding
4000
X O O 1
1
Installed with B674, B700, or
B701.
Punching, sorting, shifting, corner/booklet stapling.
Board Type A
B701 SR970
B702-27
B702-17
B702-28
B703
Punch Unit Type
3260 EU 2/4
Punch Unit Type
3260 NA 2/3
Punch Unit Type
3260 SC
Output Jogger Unit
Type 3260
Interposer
Type 3260
B706 SR841
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
B735 Data Overwrite
Security Unit C
X
Interface
Unit Type 3245
B756 Copy Tray Type
2075
X
B762 Mail Box CS391 X
B782
B812
VM Card Type B
Punch Unit Type
850 SC
B818 Remote
Communication
B825
Gate Type CM1
USB Host Interface
Unit Type A
O
X
X
B828
B829
3245
Browser Unit Type
B
Copy Data Security
Unit Type C
X
X
Type 7500 ⇒
Type 8000
Connector
Type MP 7500
B861 VM Card Type C
X
X
O
G377 Bluetooth
Unit
Ethernet
Type 7300
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
Punching, sorting, shifting, corner/booklet stapling.
Punching, sorting, shifting, corner stapling only.
Installed in B700 or B701
Installed in B700 or B701
Installed in B700 or B701
Installed on B700 or B701
Installed on the B700, B702,
B706.
Punching, sorting, shifting, corner stapling only.
Small output tray for mainframe
Installed on B700 or B701
Installed in B478/B706.
SD Card (D052/D053/D054)
Links two mainframes
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Series
Class*
1
Comment
⇒
⇒
B819
B820
Fax Option Type
7500
G3 Interface Unit
Type 7500
Interface Board
* 1 Class 1: Peripheral units connected directly to the mainframe
Class 2: Components installed on or in peripheral units (punches, etc.)
Class 3: MFP controller options (SD cards, boards)
SM 1-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.6 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
4. Never set anything on the power cord.
Input voltage level North America 120 V, 60 Hz: 20 A or more
Europe/Asia 220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: 10 A or more
Taiwan 110V, 60 Hz, 20A or more
Permissible voltage fluctuation ± 10%
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
The Main Power LED ( ) lights or flashes at the following times:
• While the platen cover or ADF is open
• While the main machine is communicating with the network server
• While the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory when reading or writing data.
There are two power switches on the machine:
• Main Power Switch .
Located on the front left corner of the machine and covered by a plastic cover.
This switch should always remain on unless the machine is being serviced.
• Operation Power Switch .
Located on the right side of the operation panel. This is the switch normally used by the customer to power the machine on and off.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
1.2 MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246
SERIES/D052 SERIES)
1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Model Name Decal (-29 Only) ............................................... 1
2. Operation Instructions (-17, -19, -29, -69 Only) ..................... 2
3. NECR with Envelope (-17 Only) ............................................ 1
4. Decal – Paper Size ................................................................ 1
5. Decal: Caution Chart: Paper Set: Direction............................ 1
6. Stand Holder.......................................................................... 1
7. Operating Instructions Holder ................................................ 2
8. Decal – Original Table (Face Up) .......................................... 1
9. Decal – Cleaning - Multiple .................................................... 1
10. Cloth – DF Exposure Glass ................................................... 1
11. Cloth Holder........................................................................... 1
12. Decal – Toner Supply - Multiple ............................................ 1
13. Decal: Power Source: Off ...................................................... 1
14. Decal Exposure Glass: Multiple ............................................. 1
15. Decal – D1/E1 Multiple .......................................................... 1
SM 1-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Removing Tapes and Retainers
CAUTION
To avoid serious injury, do not connect the power plug to the machine until you are instructed to do so.
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
B064I404.WMF
B140I403.WMF
1. Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping.
2. Remove all filament tape from the front [A] of the machine.
3. Open the lower tray [B] and remove the operating instructions holder and foot risers.
4. Open the ADF feed cover and remove the tape and retainer [C].
5. Remove the tape from the back [D] of the machine.
NOTE: Save the filament tape and shipping retainers to prepare the machine for shipping in the future.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
6. Raise the ADF and remove all the tape and shipping retainers around the exposure glass [A] and operation panel.
7. Remove the shipping retaining sheet
[B] under the white pad.
8. Open the front door, open the toner bottle holder [C], then remove all tape and shipping retainers.
9. Remove the PCU inner cover [D] ( x
2) and disconnect the fan motor [E]
( x 1).
[B]
B064I005.WMF
[A]
[C]
B064I007.WMF
[E]
SM
[D]
B064I008.WMF
1-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
10. Lower the transfer unit by turning its knob [A].
11. Remove the bracket [B], and the red tag from the transfer belt ( x 1).
12. Remove the pin [C], and the red tag from the cleaning plate.
13. Open the tandem tray (top paper tray) and remove the metal retainer bracket [D] ( x 1), wire, and red tag.
Connecting the ADF
Connect the ADF plug [A] to the connector on the back of the machine.
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B140I009.WMF
B064I401.WMF
[A]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064I405.WMF
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
Removing and Filling the Development Unit
Important!
• Before you begin, remove the toner bottle if it is installed.
• The toner bottle holder can be damaged if it is in the machine when you do the procedure below.
1. Remove the shutter cover [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the lock screw [B].
3. Remove any remaining shipping tape
[C].
4. Pull the toner bottle holder [D] and swing it to the right.
[C]
[A]
5. Remove the face plate [E] of the development unit (knob x 1, x 2).
6. Disconnect the development unit [F]
( x 2).
NOTE : If the LCT is installed, disconnect it. This lets the front door open far enough for development unit removal.
7. Close the supply pipe shutter [G].
8. While allowing the development unit [H] to slip to the right, slowly pull it out of the machine.
[H]
[B]
[G]
[D]
B064I300.WMF
[E]
B064I302.WMF
[F]
B064I303.WMF
SM 1-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
9. Remove the toner hopper [A] ( x
2).
10. Rotate the toner hopper [B] slightly
10 ° to 20 ° as you slide it up to remove it.
11. While turning the knob [C] slowly, pour in one pack of developer [D] from one end of the development unit to the other.
12. Make sure that the developer is evenly distributed. Note the developer lot number printed on the top edge of the bag. You will need the lot number when you execute
SP2963 (Installation Mode).
13. Assembly the developer unit then re-install it in the machine.
14. Follow the instructions printed on the inside of the front door to install the toner bottle.
NOTE : If the door does not close, make sure that the pipe line shutter is rotated down. (See Step 7 above.)
[C]
[A]
[B]
B064I304.WMF
[D]
B064I305.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008 MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
⇒
Re-installing the Development Unit
[A]
2
3
[B]
1
B246I999.WMF
1. Push the development unit to the right .
2. While continuing to hold the unit to the right, push it into the machine.
3. Confirm that the pin [A] goes into the left side of the oval hole [B] in the development unit plate.
4. Push the development unit in completely until it stops, then push it to the left
.
5. Make sure you can see the horizontal pin in front of the plate as shown below.
Correct! Incorrect!
B246I999A.WMF
NOTE: If you cannot move the development unit plate behind the horizontal pin, turn the front gear of the unit to the left and try again.
6. Make sure the pipeline shutter is rotated down to the open position.
7. Reattach all removed parts.
SM 1-17
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
Initializing the Drum Settings (B064 Series)
After switching on the machine, you must execute SP2963 (Installation Mode) within 60 seconds to 1) Initialize the developer and force toner supply to the development unit, and 2) Initialize the auto process control settings.
• SP2963 must be executed before sample copying or test printing.
• If you do not press “Execute” in Step 2 in the following procedure within 60 seconds after the machine is switched on, the auto process control features
(potential sensor calibration, Vsg, Vref, etc.) will not initialize correctly.
• If the machine starts the auto process control routine before you have a chance to press Execute, switch the machine off and try again.
1. Connect the power cord.
2. Within one minute, before the auto process control settings initialize, execute
SP2963.
• Press Clear Modes .
• On the operation panel keypad, press .
• Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
• Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel.
• Press .
• Press Enter .
• Enter the Developer Lot No. with the key display, then press “Execute”.
About four minutes is required to initialize toner supply and the auto process control settings.
3. Press “Exit” to leave the SP mode.
4. Attach the appropriate decals (provided) to the paper trays.
5. Check copy quality and machine operation.
NOTE: At installation, use SP2963 to enter the lot number, initialize the developer, and to force toner supply to the toner hopper. After replacing developer in a machine that has already been installed, do not use
SP2963; execute SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting) instead to enter the lot number and initialize the TD sensor. ( 3.7.1)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
Initializing the Drum Settings (B140/B246/D052 Series)
You must do SP2963 (Installation Mode) to 1) Initialize the developer and do a forced toner supply to the development unit, and 2) Initialize the auto process control settings.
• You must open the front door before you switch the machine on. If you do this, the machine does not do the short automatic process control procedure, which is usually done after the machine power is turned on.
• SP2963 must be done before you do sample copying or test printing.
• If you do not press “Execute” in Step 6, the auto process control items (potential sensor calibration, Vsg, Vref, etc.) will not initialize correctly.
1. Open the front door.
2. Connect the power cord.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Go into the SP mode.
• Push Clear Modes.
• On the operation panel keypad, push 107.
• Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
5. Close the front door.
6. Do SP2963.
• On the operation panel keypad, push 107.
• “Execute”.
• Input the Developer Lot No. with the key display, then press “Execute”.
Approximately four minutes is necessary to initialize toner supply and the auto process control settings.
7. Press “Exit” to go out of the SP mode.
8. Attach the applicable decals (supplied with the machine) to the paper trays.
9. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
Important
• At installation, use SP2963 to enter the lot number, initialize the developer, and to force toner supply to the toner hopper.
• After you replace developer in a machine that has been already installed, do not use SP2963; use SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting) instead to enter the lot number and initialize the TD sensor. ( 3.7.1)
SM 1-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
Tandem Tray
Before shipping the machine, the tandem tray is set for A4 or LT LEF and must be adjusted if the customer wants to use the tandem tray for another paper size.
Feed Station
Tandem Tray (Tray 1) A4 LEF, LT LEF
Allowed Size
1. Open the front cover.
2. Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] so that the right tandem tray
[B] separates from the left tandem tray.
3. Remove the right tandem inner cover
[C].
4. Re-position the side fences [D] ( x
2). The outer slot position is used when loading A4 size paper.
5. Re-install the right tandem inner cover [C].
[D]
[B]
[A]
B064I564.WMF
[C]
B064I565.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-20
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES)
6. Remove the tray cover [A] ( x 2).
7. Remove the motor cover [B] ( x 4).
8. Re-position the side fences [C] ( x 8).
The outer slot position is used when loading A4 size paper.
9. Re-install the motor cover and the tray cover.
10. Remove the rear bottom plate [D]
( x 1).
11. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [E] ( x 1). To use the paper tray for A4 size, put the screw in the left hole as shown. (For LT size, the screw should be placed on the right.)
12. Re-install the rear bottom plate.
13. Change the paper size using SP5959-
001 (Paper Size – Tray 1). For details, see SP5959 in section “5. Service
Tables”.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B064I566.WMF
B064I523.WMF
B064I024.WMF
[E]
SM 1-21
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIN MACHINE (B064 SERIES/B140 SERIES/B246 SERIES/D052 SERIES) Rev. 04/2008
Machine Level
⇒
1. Set a stand [A] at each corner of the machine.
2. Place a level on the exposure glass and use a wrench to turn each nut [B] and level the machine to ± 5 mm of the horizontal.
3. Check the machine operation. With the customer, determine the best place to attach the cleaning reminder decal.
[A]
Date/Time Setting
Use the User Tools menu to set the current date and time.
• On the operation panel, press the User Tools key.
• On the touch-panel, press “System Settings”.
• Press the “Timer Setting” tab.
• Press “Set Date” the enter the date.
• Press “Set Time” to enter the time.
SP Codes
SP5812-001~002 Service Telephone
Number Settings
SP5841-001
SP5853
Supply Name Setting –
Toner Name Setting:
Black
Stamp Data Download
SP7825 ( B064 Series Only ) Total Counter Reset
[B]
B064I010.WMF
Execute this SP and enter the contact numbers of the custom engineer. These are the numbers displayed when a service call is issued.
This name appears when the user presses the Inquiry on the
User Tools screen.
Do SP 5853 to copy stamp data to the hard disk, then turn the power off/on.
Execute after installation and after making all test copies to reset the electronic counter total.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-22
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (B475)
1.3 A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (B475)
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. A3/DLT Tray ..................................................................... 1
2. Short connector ................................................................ 1
3. Page size decals............................................................... 1
3
2
1
B475I001.WMF
SM 1-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (B475)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
1. Draw out the tandem tray completely to separate the left and right sides of the tray, then remove the front cover
[A] ( x 2).
2. Push in the right tandem tray [B].
3. Remove the left tandem tray [C]
( x 5). Save these screws.
[B]
[A]
B475I707.WMF
[C]
B475I708.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
A3/DLT FEEDER KIT (B475)
4. Remove the right tandem tray [A] ( x
2). Save these screws.
5. Connect the short connector [B] to the left tandem tray terminal [C].
[C]
6. Remove the stay [D] ( x 2) and reinstall it.
7. Attach the A3/DLT tray [E], using the screws removed earlier.
8. Re-install the front cover.
9. Switch the machine on, enter the SP mode and select the paper size for
Tray 1 with SP5959-001 (Paper Size –
Tray 1) For details, see SP5959 in section “5. Service Tables”.
10. Attach the appropriate decal for the selected paper size.
[A]
[D]
[B]
B475I709.WMF
B475I201.WMF
[E]
B475I202.WMF
SM 1-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LCT (B473)
1.4 LCT (B473)
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description
1. Flat-head shoulder screw - M4 x 6.................................... 1
Q’ty
2. Upper docking pins (grooved)........................................... 2
3. Lower docking pin (not grooved)....................................... 1
4. Installation Instructions ..................................................... 1
5. Paper Set Decal................................................................ 1
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Removing Tape
[B]
[A]
LCT (B473)
[C]
B473I001.WMF
B473I002.WMF
1. Remove the filament tape from the body [A] and top cover [B] of the LCT.
2. Remove the tape under the lid [C] of the LCT.
SM 1-27
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LCT (B473)
Preparing the Main Machine
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the LCT installation cover
[A] from the right side of the machine. ( x 2).
2. Save the screw on the left [B]. You will need it to install the LCT.
3. Remove the LCT connector cover
[C] (x 1) and the covers over the holes for the docking pins [D]. (x 3)
Installing the LCT
1. Insert the two upper docking pins
(grooved) [A] into the upper slots and the lower docking pin [B] into the lower slot.
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B473I003.WMF
[B]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-28
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B473I004.WMF
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LCT (B473)
[D]
[C]
[B]
2. Align the holes on the side of the LCT
[A] with the docking pins on the side of the machine [B], then slowly push the
LCT onto the pins.
NOTE : The release button [C] is used to unlock the LCT so it can be disconnected from the machine.
3. Connect the plug [D] of the LCT power cord to the side of the machine.
4. Insert the flat-head shoulder screw [E] into the hole and fasten it to lock the release lever in place.
For easier access to the hole for the screw [E], you can remove the right panel [F] ( x 2).
5. Switch the machine on and execute
SP5959 005 (Paper Size – Tray 4
(LCT)) to select the paper size. For details, see SP5959 in section “5.
Service Tables.”
[A]
SM
B473I005.WMF
B473I006.WMF
[F]
[E]
1-29
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.5 LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474)
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
⇒
Description
1. Cover ................................................................................
1
Q’ty
2. B4/LG frame .....................................................................
1
3. Bottom plate extension .....................................................
1
4. Rear bracket .....................................................................
1
5. Front bracket.....................................................................
1
6. Harness clamp..................................................................
1
7. Tapping hex screws - M4 x 8 ............................................
6
8. Tapping screws - M4 x 8...................................................
4
2
1
Rev. 04/2008
8
7 6 5
4
3
B474I001A.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-30
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474)
1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
If the LCT is connected to the machine
[A]
1. Open the cover and remove the paper.
2. Lower the LCT tray. Cover the near end sensor [A], then press the tray down button [B] to lower the tray bottom plate.
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
[B]
B474I507.WMF
3. Disconnect the LCT from the machine.
4. Remove the LCT upper cover [C].
[C]
B474I504.WMF
SM 1-31
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
5. Remove the LCT cover [A] ( x 1).
6. Remove the right stay [B] and reattach it below ( x 2).
7. Remove the right cover [C] ( x 2).
8. Attach the front bracket [D] with the beveled corner down ( x 2).
NOTE : If the brackets are difficult to install, raise the bottom plate with your hand.
9. Attach the rear bracket [E] with the beveled corner down ( x 2).
10. Attach the bottom plate extension [F] with the hex nuts ( x 4).
11. Align the positioning pin [G].
12. Attach the B4/LG frame [H] with the hex nuts ( x 2).
The kit is set for B4. If you need to change the paper size to LG, proceed to step 13 and 14. Otherwise, proceed to step 15.
[D]
[H]
[B] [C]
[E]
B474I553.WMF
[A]
B474I001.WMF
B474I502.WMF
[F]
[G]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-32
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LG/B4 FEEDER KIT (B474)
13. Move the front side fence [A] to the LG position and fasten ( x 1).
14. Move the rear side fence [B] to the LG position and fasten ( x 1).
15. Change the position of the lower limit sensor [C] ( x 1).
16. Attach the harness (not shown) to the back of the plate and secure the sensor connector wire.
17. Attach the LCT cover [D] provided with the kit ( x 1).
18. Re-attach the right cover [E] ( x 2).
19. Connect the LCT to the machine (
0).
20. Switch the machine on, enter the SP mode, then use SP5959 005 (Paper
Size – Tray 4 (LCT) to select the new paper size. For details, see SP5959 in section “5. Service Tables”.
[A]
[E]
[C]
[B]
B474I555.WMF
B474I508.WMF
[D]
B474I506.WMF
SM 1-33
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
1.6 3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
⇒
Description
1. Tapping screws - M3 x 6 .................................................. 2
Q’ty
2. Tapping screws - M4 x 8................................................... 4
3. Tapping screws - M4 x 14................................................. 4
4. Ground (earth) plate ......................................................... 1
5. Rear joint bracket.............................................................. 1
6. Front joint bracket ............................................................. 1
7. Upper output tray .............................................................. 1
8. Installation Instructions ..................................................... 1
9. Lower output tray .............................................................. 1
10. Cushion (with double-sided tape) ..................................... 1
1 2 3
4 5
6
Rev. 04/2008
7
8
10
9
B468I001A.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-34
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
This section describes the common installation instructions for these finishers:
• B468 Booklet Finisher . Does punching, shifting, corner stapling, and booklet
(saddle-stitch) stapling. The booklet finisher can be installed and used with the
B064 Series only. This finisher cannot be used with a B140 Series/B246 Series machine.
• B469 Finisher . Does punching, shifting, and corner stapling. Does not do booklet (saddle-stitch) stapling. This finisher can be installed and used only with the B064 Series or B140 Series. This finisher cannot be used with a B246 Series machine.
• B674 Booklet Finisher. Does punching, shifting, stapling, and booklet (saddlestitch) stapling . The booklet finisher can be installed and used only with the
B140 Series. This finisher cannot be used with a B064 Series or B246 Series machine.
Important!
Differences in installation procedures are denoted “ B468 ", “ B469 ” or
“ B674 ”.
Removing Tapes and Retainers
B468 (B064 Series)
B674 (B140 Series)
B469
SM
B468I001.WMF
B469I001.WMF
1-35
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
[A]
B468I002.WMF
1. Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping.
2. Remove all filament tape and shipping retainers from the front of the finisher.
3. Open the front door [A] and remove all the tape and shipping retainers from inside the finisher.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-36
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
Installation
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
[C]
[B]
[A]
B468I003.WMF
1. Install the front [A] and rear [B] joint brackets ( x 2 each, M4x 14).
2. Install the ground plate [C] ( x 2, M3 x 6).
SM 1-37
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
⇒
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
[B]
[D]
Rev. 04/2008
[C]
[A]
B468I004.WMF
3. Remove the screw of the lock lever [A] and pull the lever out. Keep the screw.
4. Peel the cover tape from the sponge cushion [B], then install it in the upper slot.
NOTE: If you will also install the cover interposer tray, do not attach the cushion here. Attach it to the cover interposer tray. The cover interposer tray must be installed on the finisher before you attach the finisher and tray to the main machine.
5. Align the brackets [C] with the slots in the finisher.
6. To avoid bending the entrance guide plates of the finisher, slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets enter the slots.
7. Fasten the lock lever [A] ( x 1) with the screw removed in Step 3. This locks the finisher against the side of the mainframe.
8. Connect the plug [D] of the finisher power cord to the connector on the machine.
CAUTION
Always move the finisher slowly to avoid bending the entrance guide plates. Bent guide plates could interfere with paper transport from the machine to the finisher.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-38
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[C]
B468/B674
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
[D]
[B]
[F]
[A]
B468I005.WMF
B469
[E]
B468 (B064 Series)
B674 (B140 Series)
1. Install the lower output tray [A] ( x 2).
NOTE: Only the lower output tray has a movable support tray [B].
2. Install the upper output tray [C] ( x 2).
3. Attach the staple position decal [D] to the ADF.
B469 (B064 Series/B140 Series)
1. Install the output tray [E] ( x 2).
2. Attach the staple position decal [F].
B469I005.WMF
SM 1-39
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000-SHEET FINISHERS (B468/B469/B674)
Selecting the Staple Supply Name
Access the SP mode and enter the following information.
5841* Supply Name Setting These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button on the initial User Tools screen.
005 Staple Enter the name of the staples in use for normal stapling
(not booklet stapling). This setting should be done for the
B468, B469, and B674.
Bind Enter the name of the staples in use for booklet stapling
(saddle-stitching). This setting is required only for the
B468 and B674
Enabling Booklet Binding
To enable booklet binding, you must select the ‘center stapling’ position.
1. Press the User Tools key.
2. Select “Copier/Document Server Features”.
3. Select the “Input/Output” tab, then access “Select Stapling Position”.
4. Select any “Stapling Position” button then select the center stapling symbol.
5. Exit the User Tools mode. Specify the number of copies, select the center stapling symbol on the operation panel, then start the print job.
These SP adjustments are available but not required at installation.
SP6902 Fold Position
Adjustment
SP6120 Staple Jogger
Adjustment
Use this SP to fine adjust the fold and staple positions if they are not aligned correctly. See “5. Service Tables”.
Allows fine adjustment of the staple unit jogger fences for different paper sizes, if required. See “5. Service Tables”.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-40
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008 PUNCH UNIT (B377)
1.7 PUNCH UNIT (B377)
The Punch Unit B377 can be installed only in the 3000-Sheet Finishers
B468/B469/B674.
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
⇒
Description
1. Punch unit ........................................................................ 1
Q’ty
2. Sensor arm....................................................................... 1
3. Step screw........................................................................ 1
4. Spring............................................................................... 1
5. Tapping screw - M3x 10 ................................................... 2
6. Tapping screw - M3 x 8 .................................................... 1
7. Spacer (2 mm).................................................................. 1
8. Spacer (1 mm).................................................................. 1
9. Hopper ............................................................................. 1
1 2
3 4
9
8 7
6
B377I001A.WMF
5
SM 1-41
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (B377)
⇒
1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord.
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
3. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).
4. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and paper guide [C] ( x 1).
5. Remove the plastic knockout [D].
6. Install the sensor arm [E] ( x 1).
7. Install the spring [F].
[C]
Rev. 04/2008
[A]
B377I201.WMF
[B]
B377I103.WMF
[E]
[D]
B377I202.WMF [F]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-42
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
⇒
1. Remove the shipping bracket [A] ( x
2).
2. Position the 2 mm spacer [B] and secure the punch unit ( x 2).
3. Secure the punch unit at the front with the shoulder screw [C] ( x 1).
[C]
4. Connect the harnesses [D] and clamp them as shown.
NOTE : No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. The punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine, so it knows what type of punch unit has been installed.
5. Slide the hopper [E] into the machine.
6. Fasten the two 1 mm spacers [F] to the rear frame. These may be used during future adjustments.
NOTE : The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the holes.
7. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation. [E]
PUNCH UNIT (B377)
[A]
[B]
B377I203.WMF
[D]
B377I105.WMF
[F]
B377I106.WM
F
SM 1-43
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
1.8 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Front door extension (Top) ............................................... 1
2. Rear cover extension (bottom) ......................................... 1
3. Shoulder screws ............................................................... 3
4. Tapping screws – M4 x 8.................................................. 7
5. Tapping screws – M3 x 6.................................................. 2
6. Tapping screws – M3 x 6.................................................. 5
7. Ground Plate .................................................................... 1
8. Plate extension (bottom)................................................... 1
9. Right rear cover plate (for B478/B706 only) ..................... 2
10. Right front corner plate (for B478/B706 only) ................... 2
11. Spacer (B468/B469/B674 only) ........................................ 1
12. Front door extension (bottom) .......................................... 1
1
2
3 4 5 6
7
12
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-44
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
11
10
9
B470I006.WMF
8
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
This procedure shows you how to install the Cover Interposer Tray B470 on the:
• 3000-sheet Finisher (Booklet Finisher) B468/B674
• 3000-sheet Finisher B469
• 3000-sheet Finisher B478/B706.
Important!
The Cover Interposer Tray B470 can be installed and used only on the
B064 Series or B140 Series machines. only
NOTE
• The B468/B469/B674 Finishers require installation of the front spacer only.
• The B478/B706 requires installation of corner plates.
Removing Tapes and Retainers
[A]
[E]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B470I001.WMF
[F]
B470I007.WMF
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. Remove all tape and retainers from the cover interposer tray [A].
3. Remove the tape and cardboard [B] from the ground connector.
4. Remove the cover [C] of the relay connector.
5. Loosen the screw of the bracket [D] ( x 1) then remove the bracket.
NOTE: If you will install the cover interposer tray with a finisher that was installed on the machine before this time (B468/ B469/ B478/ B674/
B706), remove the sponge strip [E] from the finisher. Keep it until you attach it again to the interposer tray.
6. Remove the guide plate [F].
SM 1-45
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
Attaching the Extensions
[E]
[A]
[F]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B470I003.WMF
CAUTION
Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine and that the copier is turned off and disconnected from the power outlet before you start the following procedure.
1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] ( x 3).
2. Remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher, and keep the screws.
3. Attach the bottom plate [C] ( x 2, M3 x 6). Then attach the ground plate [B] to the bottom plate ( x 2) with the screws that you removed in step 2.
4. Attach the bottom front door extension [D] ( x 2, M4 x 8).
5. Attach the top front cover extension [E] ( x 2, M4 x 8).
6. Attach the rear cover extension [F] ( x 2, M3 x 6).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-46
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
Attaching the Interposer Tray
[C] [B]
[A]
[D]
Booklet Finisher
B468/B469/B674 Only
B470I004.WMF
1. If you install the cover interposer tray on the B468/B469/B674 finisher, install the spacer [A]. You will hear a click when it is installed correctly.
NOTE: If you install the cover interposer tray on the B478/B706, do not install this spacer. This spacer is for the B468/B469/B674 installation only.
2. Lift the cover interposer tray, and align the keyholes [B] with the shoulder screws
[C]. Then move the cover interposer down onto the screws.
3. Attach the cover interposer with the screw [D] ( x 1, M3 x 6).
Important
• If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B468/B469/B674, skip the next section and go directly to “Attaching the Finisher to the Machine” on page 1-
50.
• If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B478/B706, go to the next section, install the corner plates on the B478/B706, then go to “Attaching the
Finisher to the Machine” on page 1-50.
SM 1-47
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
Attaching the Corner Plates for the B478/B706
The corner plates are installed on the B478/B706 only. Attach the cover interposer tray to the finisher before you attach the corner plates.
Right Rear Corner Plate (B478/B706 only)
[C]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B]
B470I009.WMF
1. Temporarily set the screws [A] (with approximately two turns) at the right end of the finisher extension table [B] ( x 2, tapping M4 x 8)
NOTE: You cannot see the holes, because there is tape on them. Punch the screws through the holes.
2. Align the notches [C] in the right rear corner plate [D] with the screws, and attach the plate.
3. If there is a gap [E] between the plate and the tray extension attached to the side of the finisher:
• Loosen the two screws below the table extension (not shown)
• Align the table extension with the corner of the finisher and the plate
• Tighten the tray extension screws.
4. With a long screw driver inserted through the notches in the right rear corner plate [D], tighten the screws. This attaches the right rear corner plate to the table extension [B].
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-48
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
Right Front Corner Plate (B478/B706 only)
[C]
[B]
B470I008.WMF
[A]
1. Temporarily set the screw [A] (M4 x 8) (with approximately two turns) to attach the panel at the right front corner.
NOTE: You cannot see the hole, because there is tape on it. Punch the screw through the hole.
2. Align the notch in the right front corner plate [B] with the screw and install it.
You hear a click when it is put into its correct position.
3. Put a long screwdriver into the plate cutout [C]. Then, tighten the screw to attach the right front corner plate.
SM 1-49
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
Attaching the Finisher to the Machine
[A] [F] [E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B470I005.WMF
1. Attach the sponge strip [A] (this is supplied with the finisher).
NOTE: If you will install the cover interposer tray with a finisher that was installed on the machine before this time, remove the strip from the finisher and attach it to the cover interposer tray.
2. Attach the guide plate [B] (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer
( x 2).
NOTE: Make sure to use the two small tapping screws supplied with the machine, and not the machine screws that you removed from the finisher with the guide plate.
3. Release the lock lever [C] ( x 1).
4. Lower the transport guide plate [D].
Important : Perform the following carefully. Do not bend the entrance guide plates. Bent guide plates could cause a blockage for paper transport between the finisher and copier.
5. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [E] go into the slots.
6. Attach the lock lever [C] ( x 1).
7. Lift the transport guide plate [D] to close it.
8. Connect the connector [E] into the copier.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-50
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B470)
9. Switch on the machine, and select the default paper size for the cover interposer.
Important : Be sure to execute the correct SP code for the machine. Please refer to the table below.
Machine
B064 series
B140 series
Correct SP Code
SP5959-006
SP5158-001 to 008
SM 1-51
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)
⇒
1.9 9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Trays ................................................................................. 9
2. Guide plate ....................................................................... 1
3. Installation Instructions ..................................................... 1
4. Tapping screws - M3 x 8................................................... 6
5. Decals (bin display) .......................................................... 1
1
2
Rev. 04/2008
5
4
3
B471I001A.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-52
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)
1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Important!
The 9-Bin Mailbox B471 can be installed and used only with a B064
Series or B140 Series machine. The B471 cannot be installed on a B246 machine.
Removing Tapes and Retainers
1. Remove the filament tape [A].
NOTE: Handle the mailbox carefully.
The corner leaf [B] can be damaged easily.
[A]
[B]
Installation
B471I001.WMF
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
If the Cover Interposer Tray B470 is installed on the Finisher B468/B469/B674, remove it. The cover interposer tray and mailbox cannot be installed on the finisher at the same time.
1. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher
( x 1).
2. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 1).
NOTE: Loosen the screw. Do not remove it.
[B]
[A]
SM
B471I002.WMF
1-53
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
9-BIN MAILBOX (B471)
3. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher ( x 2, M3 x 8).
4. Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of the finisher ( x 4, M3 x 8).
5. Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox.
6. Give the decals [D] to the customer for notation and pasting at the correct location.
[C]
[A]
[B]
B471I003.WMF
[D]
B471I004.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-54
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)
1.10 3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Cushion ........................................................................... 1
2. Table Extension ............................................................... 1
3. Leveling Shoes ................................................................ 1
4. Rear Joint Bracket ........................................................... 1
5. Front Joint Bracket........................................................... 1
6. Entrance Guide Plate....................................................... 1
7. Grounding Plate............................................................... 1
8. Auxiliary Tray Holder ....................................................... 2
9. Auxiliary Tray - Proof ....................................................... 2
10. Auxiliary Tray - Shift......................................................... 2
11. Tapping Screws - M4 x 8 ................................................. 2
12. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6 ................................................. 4
13. Tapping Screws - M3 x 8 ................................................. 4
14. Phillips Screws w/washer - M4 x 14................................. 4
15. Shift Tray ......................................................................... 4
16. Installation Procedure ...................................................... 1
1 2 3
4
SM
14
13
12
11
15
5
6
7
8
B706I201A.WMF
10
9
1-55
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)
1.10.2 INSTALLATION
Rev. 04/2008
B478I002.WMF B478I003.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
[F]
[C]
[B]
B478I014.WMF
B478I019.WMF
Important!
⇒
• The 3000-Sheet Finisher B478 can be installed and used only on a B064 Series machine.
• The 3000-Sheet Finisher B706 can be installed and used only on a B140, B246 or D052 Series machine.
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door and remove the shipping retainers. Remove brackets [A],
[B], and [C] ( x 2 each).
3. Install the front joint bracket [D] and rear joint bracket [E] ( x 2 each) (M4 x
14) on the left side of the copier.
4. Remove the connector cover [F].
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-56
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[A]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)
B478I004.WMF
[C]
[B]
B478I005.WMF
[D]
0 ~ 2 mm
0 ~ 5 mm
B478I107.WMF
5. Install the grounding plate [A] ( x 2) (M3 x 6).
NOTE: Set the grounding plate so that there is no gap between the grounding plate and the bottom frame of the finisher (as shown).
6. Install the table extension [B] as shown ( x 2) (M4 x 8).
NOTE: The edge of the table extension should be aligned with the edge of the finisher (as shown).
7. Attach the cushion [C] to the right side of the upper cover.
NOTE: If you are installing the cover interposer tray, do not attach the cushion here. Attach it to the cover interposer tray. The cover interposer tray must be installed before you dock the finisher and tray with the main machine. For details, see the Cover Interposer Tray B470 installation instructions.
8. Install the entrance guide plate [D] ( x 2) (M3 x 6).
SM 1-57
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3000 SHEET FINISHER (B478/B706)
[C]
[D] [B]
B478I534.WMF
[A]
B478I006.WMF
9. Attach the shift tray [A] ( x 4) (M3 x 8).
10. Open the front door of the finisher, and remove the screw from the locking lever, then pull out the locking lever [B].
11. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing in the locking lever [B].
NOTE: Before securing the locking lever, make sure that the top edges of the finisher and the copier are parallel from front to rear as shown [C].
12. Secure the locking lever [B] ( x 1) and close the front door.
13. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier.
14. Set the leveling shoes (x 4) under the feet and level the machine.
1.10.3 MOVING THE FINISHER TO A NEW LOCATION
Before you move the finisher, do SP6107-003. This moves all the finisher mechanisms to their home positions.
After you move the finisher, the mechanisms go back to the ready condition automatically after you turn the power on.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-58
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (B531/B812)
1.11 PUNCH UNIT (B531/B812)
The Punch Unit B531/A812 can be installed only in the 3000-Sheet Finisher
B478/B706.
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Punch unit......................................................................... 1
2. Harness Connector Cable - PCB ...................................... 1
3. Harness Connector Cable - HP Sensor 2 ......................... 1
4. Harness Connector Cable - HP Sensor 1, Hopper Full..... 1
5. Sensor Arm and Sensor.................................................... 1
6. Spacer (2 mm) .................................................................. 1
7. Spacer (1 mm) .................................................................. 2
8. Spring ............................................................................... 1
9. Step Screw (large) (M4 x 11) ............................................ 1
10. Tapping Screw (M4 x 10).................................................. 2
11. Step Screw (small) (M3 x 4).............................................. 1
12. Machine Screw, Washer (M4 x 6)..................................... 1
13. Knob ................................................................................. 1
14. Punch Waste Hopper........................................................ 1
1
2
3
4
5
14
13
12 11 10 9
8
7
B531I001.WMF
6
SM 1-59
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
PUNCH UNIT (B531/B812)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.11.2 INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
B531I09.WMF
[D]
[F]
[C]
[E]
B531I002.WMF
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover ( x 2).
3. Unpack the punch unit and remove the motor protector plate [A] ( x 4) and the cam lock plate [B] ( x 1).
4. Remove the inner cover [C] ( x 3).
5. Behind the inner cover at [D] and [E], press the lock tab to the right to release the inner cover from the frame.
6. Remove the plastic knockouts [F].
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-60
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (B531/B812)
[A]
[B]
B531I003.WMF
7. Remove the paper guide [A] ( x 4).
8. Install the sensor arm [B] ( x 1, small step screw (M3 x 4).
NOTE: Make sure that the sensor arm swings freely on the step screw.
9. Attach the spring [C].
B531I004.WMF
[C]
SM 1-61
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
PUNCH UNIT (B531/B812)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[D]
B531I006.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
B531I005.WMF
10. At the front, secure the punch unit [A] with the large step screw ( x 1, M4 x
10).
11. At the rear, position the 2 mm spacer [B] and attach the punch unit [C] ( x 2,
M4 x 10).
NOTE: At the hole just above the lock lever, use one of the screws from the paper guide removed above to fasten the remaining two spacers to the frame. These extra spacers are used to adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes.
12. At the front, fasten the punch unit knob [D] ( x 1).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-62
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[C]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (B531/B812)
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B531I007.WMF
[F]
B531I008.WMF
13. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to
CN600 of the punch unit PCB.
14. Connect the HP Sensor 2 harness connector [B] to CN130 of the finisher PCB and to HP Sensor 2.
15. Connect the single end of the hopper full sensor connector cable [C] to the hopper full sensor on the arm ( x 1, clamp x 1), then connect the other two connectors to HP Sensor 1 [D] and CN620 [E] of the punch PCB.
NOTE: No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. The punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine, so it knows what type of punch unit has been installed.
16. Slide the hopper [F] into the finisher.
17. Re-attach the inner cover and rear cover.
18. Close the front door and re-connect the finisher to the machine.
SM 1-63
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
JOGGER UNIT (B513)
1.12 JOGGER UNIT (B513)
The Jogger Unit B531 can be installed only on the 3000-Sheet Finisher B478/B706.
1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description
1. Jogger Unit B513 .............................................................. 1
Q’ty
2. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6 .................................................. 2
3. Installation Procedure ....................................................... 1
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-64
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
JOGGER UNIT (B513)
[A]
B513I001.WMF
[D]
[B]
B513I002.WMF
[E]
B513I003.WMF
[C]
1. Turn the main machine switch off and disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
2. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A] from the finisher and discard it.
3. Remove the cover plate [B] from the jogger unit ( x 2). Save the screws.
4. With the jogger unit connector on the left side, hook the frame of the jogger unit
[C] into the holes on the left and right side of the finisher frame.
5. On the left side, fasten the connector [D] to the socket ( x 1).
6. On the left and right side, attach the jogger unit frame to the side of the finisher with the screws [E] provided ( x 2).
7. Re-attach the jogger unit cover to its frame with the screws removed in step 2
( x 2).
SM 1-65
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
1.13 Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description
1. Lock Bracket – Rear (Cover Interposer Tray) ................... 1
2. Lock
3. Lock Bracket – Front (Cover Interposer Tray)*1 ............... 1
4. Lock
5. Ground Plate (Cover Interposer Tray) ............................. 1
6. Ground Plate (Z-folding unit) ........................................... 1
7. Ground Plate (Finisher or Cover Interposer Tray) ........... 1
8. Right
9. Left
10. Front Spacer *2 ................................................................ 1
11. Rear Spacer *2 ................................................................. 1
12. Power Cord....................................................................... 1
13. Sponge Strip..................................................................... 1
14. Screws M3 x 6 .................................................................. 8
15. Screws M4 x 6 .................................................................. 8
Q’ty
* 1
* 2
Items 3, 4, are not required for the B706 (SR841) with B070/B071.
Items 10, 11 are not required for the B674 (SR861)
1 2 3
4
9
8 7
6
11
5
10
12
15
14 13
B660I003.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-66
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008 Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
1.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
⇒
Important!
• The Z-Folding Unit B660-17, -26, -27 can be installed and used only on the B674
Finisher (B140 series).
• The Z-Folding Unit B660-57, -66, -67 can be installed and used only on the B700 or B701 Finisher (B246 series).
Before You Begin
• Do the installation procedure for the finisher but do not dock it to the machine.
The Z-folding unit must be installed between the finisher and the main machine.
• Do the installation for the cover interposer tray (if necessary).
• If the finisher is already installed, disconnect the finisher from the main machine.
(If the cover interposer tray is installed on the finisher, it is not necessary to remove the cover interposer tray.)
• Be cautious when installing the Z-Fold Unit B660. The unit may not be fully stable until attached to the finisher. Be Careful not to tilt the Z-Fold Unit as you perform the following procedures.
SM 1-67
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
Unpacking
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
[E]
[D]
[G]
[B]
[C]
B660I001.WMF
[F]
[I]
[I] [H]
B660I002.WMF
CAUTION
Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures.
1. Detach the head of the I/F connector [A].
2. Remove all tape [B] from unit.
3. Open the front door [C].
4. Raise the horizontal transport plate [D] and remove the cushion [E].
5. Pull out the Z-folding mechanism [F] and remove the cushion [G].
6. Open the right vertical transport cover [H].
7. Remove four spacers [I] by pulling on the string.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-68
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Docking to the Finisher
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[G]
[F]
B660I004.WMF
1. Remove the back cover of the finisher ( x 2).
2. Attach the left docking bracket [A] to the Z-folding unit ( x 2) (Bracket provided with the finisher).
3. Attach the right docking bracket [B] to the Z-folding unit ( x 2). (Bracket provided with the finisher).
4. Attach the rear locking bracket ( x 2).
• Attach rear bracket [C] if the cover interposer tray is installed.
• Attach rear bracket [D] if cover interposer tray is not installed.
5. Attach the front locking bracket ( x 2).
NOTE: This step is required only when the Z-folding unit is installed with the
B674 (SR861).
• Attach front bracket [E] if the cover sheet interposer is installed.
• Attach front bracket [F] if the cover sheet interposer is not installed.
6. Attach the ground plate [G] to the Z-folding unit ( x 2).
SM 1-69
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
1. Remove the tape from the sponge [A] and attach it to the Z-folding unit.
2. At the left bottom edge of the Z-folding unit, remove the bracket [B] ( x 1).
3. Push in the support [C].
4. Reattach the bracket [B] ( x 1).
[C]
[A]
[B]
5. If the cover interposer tray is attached to the finisher, attach the ground plate [D] to the Z-folding unit ( x 2).
CAUTION
With the support retracted, the Z-folding unit tips easily!
[D]
[B]
5 mm
B660I005.WMF
B660I006.WMF
B660I102.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-70
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
[B]
[C]
[F]
[E]
[D]
B660I013.WMF
[A]
6. Attach the ground plate [A] ( x 2) to the finisher (or the cover interposer tray).
NOTE: This is the ground with the flat plate attached with 2 vertical screws.
7. Open the front door of the finisher.
8. Pull out the lock lever [B] of the finisher ( x 1).
-or-
If the cover interposer tray is installed, pull out the lock lever of the cover interposer tray.
9. Dock the Z-folding unit to the finisher.
10. Fasten the screw [B] ( x 1).
11. Fasten screw [E] to front lock bracket [F].
NOTE:
• Screw [E] is not needed if the Z-folder will be installed with a B246 Series machine and the SR4000 B700 or SR970 B701.
• However, both brackets are required. Do not remove bracket .
12. Fasten the rear lock bracket [D] ( x 1).
SM 1-71
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
Docking to the Main Frame
[G] [C]
[H]
[A]
[D]
[I]
[B]
[E] [F]
B660I007.WMF
1. Fasten the two docking brackets [A] (provided with the Z-folding unit) to the main machine ( x 2 each).
2. At the right bottom edge of the Z-folding unit, remove the screw and bracket, push in the support [B], then reattach the screw and bracket.
3. Pull the top cover [C] toward you then raise it.
4. Raise the horizontal transport plate [D] to the left.
5. Pull out the Z-folding mechanism [E].
6. Pull out the Z-folding unit lock lever [F] ( x 1).
7. At the right bottom edge of the Z-folding unit, confirm that the breaker switch is
ON.
NOTE: This switch should display “ — ”. If you see “ O ”, set the switch to “ — ”.
The machine will not recognize the Z-folding unit if this switch is off.
8. Dock the Z-folding unit [G] to the main machine.
9. Push in the lock lever [F] and fasten it ( x 1).
10. Push in the Z-folding mechanism [E], lower the horizontal transport plate [D], then close the front door [C].
11. Attach the I/F cable [H] of the Z-folding unit to the main machine.
12. Connect the power cord [I] to the Z-folding unit.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-72
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
⇒
Rev. 04/2008
[A]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
B660I009.WMF
13. Reattach the finisher rear cover ( x 2).
14. Connect the I/F cable [A] of the finisher to the Z-folding unit.
15. Raise or lower the nuts , , , to level the machine.
SM 1-73
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
1.14 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
1.14.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories from the box against the following list.
Description Q’ty
1. Cushion (with double-sided tape) .................................... 1
2. Ground (earth) plate ........................................................ 1
3. Tapping screws - M4 x14................................................ 4
4. Tapping screws - M3 x 8................................................. 1
5. Leveling Shoes ................................................................ 3
6. Upper output tray ............................................................. 1
7. Lower output tray (B700 Only)......................................... 1
8. Auxiliary Tray................................................................... 1
9. Front joint bracket ............................................................ 1
10. Gasket ............................................................................. 1
Auxiliary Tray for Shift Tray (B700 Only – Not Shown).....
1
Auxiliary Tray for Proof Tray (B700 Only – Not Shown) ...
1
Auxiliary Tray Storage Pocket (B700 Only – Not Shown).
1
* 1 3 screws M3x6 are provided for the B700.
1
2 3
4
5
6
10
9
10
8
7
B700I201.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-74
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 04/2008
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
1.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
This section describes the common installation instructions for two peripheral devices:
• B700 Booklet Finisher. Does punching, shifting, corner stapling, and booklet
(saddle-stitch) stapling.
• B701 Finisher . Does punching, shifting, and corner stapling but no booklet
(saddle-stitch) stapling unit.
⇒
Important!
• The 2000-Sheet Finisher B700 can be installed only on a B246/D052 Series machine.
• The 2000-Sheet Finisher B701 can be installed only on a B246/D052 Series machine.
NOTE: Differences in the installation procedures are noted as “ B700 ” or “ B701 ”.
Removing Tapes and Retainers
B700 B701
B700I102.WMF B701I102.WMF
WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures.
1. Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping.
2. Remove all filament tape and shipping retainers from the finisher.
SM 1-75
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
B700 B701
B700I202.WMF
3. Open the front door.
4. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers inside the finisher.
B701I202.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-76
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
B700
[A]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
B701
[A]
B701I204.WMF
B700I204.WMF
5. Pull out the jogger unit [A].
6. Remove the tapes and retainers.
SM 1-77
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
Docking the Finisher
[A]
[B]
B700I106.WMF
7. If you are not installing the Cover Interposer B704, peel the strip from the sponge cushion [A] and attach it to the finisher then go to the next step.
If you are installing the Cover Interposer B704:
• Do not attach the sponge cushion to the finisher. It must be attached to the cover interposer.
• Do not attach the grounding plate [B] to the finisher. It must be attached to the cover interposer.
• Install the interposer now. The cover interposer must be installed before you dock the finisher to the copier.
9. Use a short screwdriver to attach the grounding plate [B] ( x 2, M3 x 6).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-78
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
[A]
[B]
10. Attach the rear bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x 14).
11. Attach the front bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x 14).
B700I105.WMF
SM 1-79
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
[F]
[E]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
B700I107.WMF
12. Remove the screw [A] to release the lock lever [B] ( x 1).
13. To avoid bending and damaging the paper entrance guide plates [C], slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [D] enter their slots.
14. Attach and tighten the screw removed in Step 11.
15. Connect connector [E] to the main frame.
16. Attach the gasket seal [F] as shown.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-80
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[A]
Attaching the Trays
B700
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
B701
[A]
[B]
[C]
B700I208.WMF
B700
1. Attach the upper output tray [A] ( x 1, M3 x 8).
NOTE: Make sure the metal plate [B] overlaps the tray.
2. Attach the lower output tray [C].
3. Use the round-head rivet (provided accessory) to fasten the auxiliary tray storage pocket to rear cover of the finisher.
4. Place the auxiliary trays for the shift tray and proof tray in the pocket.
B701
1. Attach the output tray [A].
NOTE: Make sure the metal plate [B] overlaps the tray.
B701I208.WMF
B246I901.WMF
SM 1-81
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
Leveling the Finisher
[C]
B701I109.WMF
[B]
[A]
1. Set the leveling shoes [A] (x 3) under the feet [B].
2. Use a wrench to adjust the height of the screws [C] to level the machine.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-82
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
Selecting the Staple Supply Name
Enter the SP mode and execute the following information.
5841* Supply Name Setting These names appear when the user prints the Inquiry
List Press the Counter key, then press ‘Print Inquiry List’.
Press the Inquiry button on the initial User Tools screen.
Enter the name of the staples in use for normal stapling
(not booklet stapling). This setting should be done for both the B700 and B701.
Enter the name of the staples in use for booklet stapling
(saddle-stitching). This setting is required only for the
B700.
Enabling Booklet Binding (B700 Only)
To enable booklet binding (saddle-stitching) for the B700, you must select the center stapling position.
1. Press the User Tools key.
2. Select “Copier/Document Server Features”.
3. Select the “Input/Output” tab.
4. Select any “Stapling Position” button then select the center (saddle-stitch) stapling symbol.
5. Exit the User Tools mode. Specify the number of copies, select the center stapling symbol on the operation panel, then start the print job.
SM 1-83
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
Auxiliary Trays
The auxiliary trays are stored in the auxiliary tray storage pocket mounted on the back cover of the finisher.
Make sure that the customer understands the following points about these auxiliary trays:
• The trailing edges of excessively curled or Z-folded paper can activate the tray full sensors before the tray is actually full.
• Once the "Exit Tray Full" message displays, the job cannot continue until some sheets are removed from the tray, even if only partially full. The trays are designed to prevent this problem.
• The auxiliary tray for the shift tray should be installed for Z-folding jobs.
• The auxiliary tray for the proof tray should be installed only when excessively curled paper is triggering early "Exit Tray Full" alerts.
• Normally, both auxiliary trays should be placed in the pocket mounted on the back of the finisher.
Proof Exit Auxiliary Tray
Follow the procedures below to install the auxiliary tray for the proof tray.
1. First, remove the paper form the paper feed tray, turn it upside down, and continue printing. This may solve the problem.
2. If the "Exit Tray Full" alerts continue, set the proof auxiliary tray [A] on the proof tray on the top of the finisher.
[A]
3. Make sure that the arms of the auxiliary tray fit tightly over the ridges
of the proof tray below.
B246I903.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-84
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
Shift Auxiliary Tray
1. Open and close the front door of the finisher.
This initializes the finisher and moves the shift tray to the standby position.
2. Open the front door again and leave it open.
3. Set the shift auxiliary tray [A] on the shift tray as shown.
4. Close the front door.
This initializes the finisher again and moves the shift tray to the new standby position with the auxiliary tray installed.
5. After the Z-folding job is finished, remove the tray and store it in the auxiliary tray storage pocket on the back of the finisher.
6. Open and close the front door to reinitialize the finisher and reset the standby position of the shift tray.
[A]
B246I902.WMF
SM 1-85
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (B702)
1.15 PUNCH UNIT (B702)
The Punch Unit B702 can be installed only in the 2000/3000-Sheet Finisher
B700/B701.
1.15.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
Description Q’ty
Punchout Waste Unit .............................................................. 1
Slide Drive Unit ....................................................................... 1
Punch Waste Hopper.............................................................. 1
Screws (M3 x 6)...................................................................... 5
Side-to-Side Detection Unit .................................................... 1
Punching Unit ......................................................................... 1
1
2
6
3
5
4 B702I101.WMF
WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-86
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (B702)
1.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[C]
B702I102.WMF
Rear
[B]
[A]
Front
[D]
B702I103.WMF
[E]
[F]
1. If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [A] and separate the finisher from the copier.
2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2) and open the front door.
NOTE: At the base of the back cover, be sure to disconnect the tabs that fasten the cover to the frame.
3. Remove the guide plate [C] ( x 2).
4. Slide the punch unit [D] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that pin engages correctly at the front and rear.
5. Connect and fasten the punch unit [E] ( x 2, x 1).
NOTE: The connectors are coiled and tied above the PCB on the right.
SM 1-87
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
PUNCH UNIT (B702)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
{ |
[C]
[A]
B702I104.WMF
3-pin connector
[B]
B702I105.WMF
6. Fasten the slide drive unit [A] to finisher and connect it to the punch unit
( x 2, x 1). Press in on the slide drive unit at { when you attach screw | .
7. Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
8. Insert the side-to-side detection unit [B]. Make sure that the two pins are engaged correctly at the front.
9. Confirm that the side-to-side detection slides smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with their grooves.
10. Fasten the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear ( x 2, x 1,
x 1).
11. Pull the short connector out of the connector [C] then connector it ( x 1).
NOTE: This is the 3-pin connector.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-88
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (B702)
4-pin Connector
[D]
[C]
B702I106.WMF
[A]
B702I107.WMF
12. At the front, use a pair of nippers to remove the knockout [A]
13. Insert the punch waste transport unit [B] into the finisher.
NOTE: Make sure that the punch waste transport unit slides smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
14. Remove the short connector from the connector [C].
NOTE: This is the 4-pin connector.
15. Connect connector and fasten the punch waste transport unit.
( x 1, x 1, x 1).
16. Set the hopper [D] in its holder.
SM 1-89
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
1.16 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
1.16.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
Description Q’ty
2. Rear cover extension (bottom) ......................................... 1
10. Gasket Seals .................................................................... 2
11. Right Rear Cover Plate (B706 only).................................. 1
12. Spacer .............................................................................. 1
13. Anti-Static Brush ............................................................... 1
14. Spacer (B706 only) ........................................................... 1
15. Spacer (Not used)............................................................. 1
16. Right front corner plate (for B706 only)............................. 2
17. Front door extension (bottom) .......................................... 1
1 2
3 4 5 6
7
8
11
10
9
17
16
15
14
13
B704I101.WMF
12
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-90
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
1.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The Cover Interposer Tray B704 can be installed on the following finishers only:
• 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700
• 3000-Sheet Finisher B701
• 3000-Sheet Finisher B706
Removing Tape and Retainers
[A]
[B]
B704I102.WMF
WARNING!
Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine and that the copier is switched off and unplugged before starting the following procedure.
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. Remove all tape and retainers from the cover interposer tray [A].
3. Remove the tape and cardboard [B] from the ground connector.
SM 1-91
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706)
[A]
[B]
[C]
B704I103.WMF
1. Remove the cover [A] of the relay connector.
2. Loosen the screw of the bracket [B] ( x 1) then remove the bracket.
3. Remove the guide plate [C]. (This guide plate will be attached to the cover interposer; do not discard it.)
Important : If you are installing the cover interposer tray with a previously installed finisher B700/B701/B706, remove the sponge strip from the finisher and save it for re-attachment to the interposer tray.
4. If you are installing the B700/B701, attach the extensions to the finisher without modification. Go to "Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701" on page 1-96.
-or-
If you are installing the B706, modify the extensions and attach them to the finisher. Go to "Attaching the Extensions for the B706" on page 1-93.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-92
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
Attaching the Extensions for the B706
Important!
• The procedures in this section are for installation of the cover interposer with the
B706 only.
• If you are installing the cover interposer with the B700/B701, go to the next section.
Modify the Attachments for the B706
Front Door Extension (Top)
[D]
Rear Cover Extension (Bottom)
[A]
[E]
[G]
[C]
[B]
[H]
[F]
Bottom Plate Extension
B704I108.WMF
Front Door Extension:
1. Attach spacer [A] to the front door extension (top) ( x 2).
2. Remove the lower hinge [B] and replace it with [C] ( x 2).
Rear Cover Extension (Bottom):
3. Remove [D] and replace it with [E] ( x 1).
4. Remove [F] and replace it with [G] ( x 1).
Plate Extension (Bottom):
5. Remove bracket [H] and attach it to the end of the bottom plate extension
( x 2).
SM 1-93
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
Prepare the Cover Interposer for the B706
[C]
[B]
[A]
B706I900.WMF
1. Remove spacer [A] ( x1).
2. Attach spacer [B] ( x1).
3. Remove the screws from the connector case [C] ( x2).
4. Push the connector case in the direction of the arrow until the second set of holes are aligned with the holes below, then attach the screws.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-94
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
Attach the Extensions to the B706
{ [A]
[E]
|
}
[F]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B704I110.WMF
1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] {|} ( x 3).
2. If the finisher has been previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher and keep the screws.
3. Attach the bottom plate [C] ( x 2, M3 x 6).
4. Attach the ground plate to the bottom plate ( x 2).
5. Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] ( x 2, M4 x 8).
NOTE: Attach this cover first.
6. Attach the top front cover extension [E] ( x 2, M4 x 8).
7. Set two screws into the holes provided for the rear cover extension [F] ( x 2,
M3 x 6).
8. Set the keyholes of the rear cover extension over of the heads of the screws.
9. Press up on the bottom of the rear cover extension to close the gap at the top of the cover, then tighten the screws.
SM 1-95
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701
[E]
|
{
}
[A]
[F]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B704I104.WMF
1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] {|} ( x 3).
2. If the finisher has been previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the finisher and save the screws.
3. Attach the bottom plate [C] ( x 2, M3 x 6) then attach the ground plate to the bottom plate ( x 2).
4. Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] ( x 2, M4 x 8).
5. Attach the top front cover extension [E] ( x 2, M4 x 8).
6. Attach the rear cover extension [F] ( x 2, M3 x 6).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-96
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/ B706)
[B] [A]
[C]
B704I105.WMF
1. Pick up the cover interposer tray, align the keyholes [A] with the shoulder screws [B], then slide the cover interposer down onto the screws.
2. Secure the cover interposer with the screw [C] ( x 1, M3 x 6).
3. If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B700/B701, skip the next section and go directly to “Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine” on page 1-100.
-or-
If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B706, go to the next section, install the corner plates on the B706, then go to “Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine” on page 1-100.
SM 1-97
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706
Important!
: The corner plates are installed on the B706 only.
Right Rear Corner Plate (B706 only)
NG OK
[C]
[D]
[A] [B]
B704I112.WMF
1. Temporarily attach the screws [A] (with about two turns) to the right end of the finisher extension table [B] ( x 2, tapping M4 x 8).
NOTE: The holes are not visible because they are covered with tape. Just punch the screws through the holes.
2. Align the cutouts [C] of the right rear corner plate [D] with the screws and attach the plate.
3. With a long screw driver inserted through the cutouts in the right rear corner plate [D], tighten the screws to fasten the right rear corner plate to the table extension [B].
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-98
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
[C]
[B]
[A] B704I111.WMF
4. Temporarily attach the screw [A] (M4 x 8) with about two turns to fasten to the panel at the right front corner.
NOTE: The hole is not visible because it is covered with tape. Just punch the screw through the hole.
5. With the clamp [B] under the edge of the corner, align the cutout [C] in the right front corner plate with the screw, then snap it into position.
6. With a long screwdriver inserted into the plate cutout [C], tighten the screw to fasten the right front corner plate.
SM 1-99
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine (B700/B701/B706)
[C]
[A]
[B]
1. Attach the rear bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x14).
2. Attach the front bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x14).
3. Attach the gasket seals [C] and [D].
[D] B704I121.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-100
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
[G]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[F]
[D]
B704I106.WMF
4. Attach the sponge strip [A] that is supplied with the finisher.
5. Attach the guide plate (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer.
• Attach the front end [B] of the plate ( x 1).
• Attach the rear end of the plate with the anti-static brush [C] ( x 1).
Important : Use the two small tapping screws that are supplied, not the machine screws removed from the finisher guide plate.
6. Release the lock lever [D] ( x 1).
7. Attach the pad [E]. (This pad is provided with the finisher.)
8. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [F] go into the slots.
WARNING!
Move the finisher carefully, or you will bend the entrance guide plates.
9. Attach the lock lever [D] ( x 1).
10. Connect the connector [G] to the copier.
Important!
• Check the duct { on the left side of the machine.
• Make sure that the sponge does not prevent air flow through this duct.
• Note : (B246/D054 Only) If the correct paper sizes are not detected by the cover interposer after install, manually put in the correct sizes via SP6107.
B132I734.WMF
SM 1-101
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
• Note : (B064/B140) If the correct paper sizes are not detected, see “Cover
Interposer Tray B470 “ Service Manual , sections 2.1.3.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-102
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703)
1.17 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703)
1.17.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
Description Q’ty
1. Jogger Unit ...................................................................... 1
2. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6 .................................................. 2
1
2
B703I101.WMF
SM 1-103
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703)
1.17.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[B]
[A]
B703I103.WMF
B703I102.WMF
Important!
The Output Jogger Unit B703 can be installed only on the 2000/3000-
Sheet Finisher B700/B701.
WARNING!
Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures.
1. Turn the main machine switch off.
2. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A].
4. Remove the cover plate [B] ( x 2). Save the screws.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-104
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[C]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703)
[B]
[A]
B703I104.WMF
5. While you hold the jogger unit with the connector on the left, put the hooks of the frame of the jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame.
6. Fasten connector [B] to the socket ( x 1).
7. Attach the jogger unit to the finisher ( x 2).
8. Reattach the jogger unit cover [C] to the jogger unit ( x 2).
9. Enter Service Mode (5.1.1) and change SP6118 to “1”
SM 1-105
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIL BOX (B762)
1.18 MAIL BOX (B762)
1.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
⇒
Description Q’ty
1. Trays................................................................................. 9
2. Guide plate ....................................................................... 1
3. Tapping screws - M3x8..................................................... 6
4. Decals (bin display) .......................................................... 1
1
2
Rev. 04/2008
4
3
B762I001A.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-106
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.18.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
MAIL BOX (B762)
[A]
[B]
B762I101.WMF
Important!
The Mail Box B762 can be installed only in the 2000/3000-Sheet
Finisher B700/B701.
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the filament tape [A].
Important : Handle the mailbox carefully. The corner leaf [B] can be damaged easily.
SM 1-107
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
MAIL BOX (B762)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
[B]
B762I102.WMF
2. If the Cover Interposer Tray B704 is installed on the B700/B701, remove it.
NOTE: The cover interposer tray and mailbox cannot be installed on the finisher at the same time.
3. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher ( x 1).
4. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 1).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-108
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MAIL BOX (B762)
[A]
B762I103.WMF
[B]
[C]
B762I104.WMF
[D]
5. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher ( x 2, M3x8).
6. Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of the finisher ( x 4, M3x8).
7. Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox.
8. Give the decals [D] to the customer for notation and attaching at the correct location.
SM 1-109
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY TRAY (B756)
1.19 COPY TRAY (B756)
1.19.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
Description Q’ty
1. Copy Tray ......................................................................... 1
2. Actuator Arm and Bracket (not used)................................ 1
3. Tapping Screw (not used)................................................. 2
4. Large Cap ......................................................................... 1
5. Small Cap ......................................................................... 4
6. Tapping Screw (M4 x 8).................................................... 1
7. Harness Clamp ................................................................. 1
8. Paper Height Sensor......................................................... 1
9. Actuator Arm Bracket........................................................ 1
10. Sensor Bracket ................................................................. 1
11. Actuator Arm..................................................................... 1
1 2
3
11
10 9
8
7
6
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-110
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
5
4
B756I001.WMF
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.19.2 INSTALLATION
COPY TRAY (B756)
[A]
B756I101.WMF
Important!
The Copy Tray B756 can be installed only on a B140 Series machine or a B246 Series machine.
1. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( x 2).
SM 1-111
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY TRAY (B756)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[C]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[A]
B756I003.WMF
2. Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket
[C].
3. Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket [D] to the copier ( x 3).
4. Attach the sensor harness [E] ( x 1, x 4).
5. Attach the actuator [F] to the arms of the actuator arm bracket.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-112
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY TRAY (B756)
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B756I002.WMF
6. Reattach the left upper cover [A] ( x 2).
7. Attach the tray [B].
8. Attach the small caps [C] to the holes { , | , } , ~ .
9. Attach the large cap [D] to cover the finisher power connection point.
SM 1-113
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)
1.20 KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER
BRACKET (B452)
1.20.1 KEY CARD BRACKET B498 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description Qty
1. Key Card Table................................................................... 1
2. Harness Clamp ................................................................... 1
3. Tapping Screws (M3 x 8) .................................................... 4
4. Tapping Screws (M4 x 14) .................................................. 2
5. Stud ................................................................................... 1
6. Decal .................................................................................. 1
7. Key Card Table Support ..................................................... 1
1
2 3 4
7
6
B498I001.WMF
5
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-114
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)
1.20.2 KEY COUNTER BRACKET B452 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description Qty
1. Plate nuts............................................................................ 2
2. Rear Bracket....................................................................... 1
3. Front Bracket ...................................................................... 1
4. Tapping Screws (M3 x 6) .................................................... 2
5. Tapping Screws (M4 x 8) .................................................... 3
6. Tapping Screws (M4 x 16) .................................................. 2
7. Harness ............................................................................. 1
8. Shoulder Screw ................................................................. 1
9. Key Counter Bracket Cover ................................................ 1
10. Key Counter Bracket......................................................... 1
1 2 3
4 5 6
9
8
B452I001.WMF
7
SM
10
1-115
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)
1.20.3 INSTALLATION
Assemble the Key Counter Bracket
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B452I002.WMF
1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inner surface of the key counter bracket [B].
2. Attach the key counter holder [C] to the key counter bracket ( x2).
3. Attach the key counter bracket cover [D] ( x2).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-116
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)
Install the Key Card Bracket and Assembled Key Counter
[D] [B]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[A]
B498I002.WMF
B498I003.WMF
WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure.
1. Remove the cover [A] ( x2).
2. Remove the right upper cover [B] ( x2).
3. Remove the three caps [C].
4. Attach the stud [D].
5. Put the keyholes [E] of the key card table [F] over the heads of the shoulder screws, as shown above. Then tighten the screws to attach the table (M4 x 14,
x2).
SM 1-117
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)
[A]
[B]
[C]
B498I004.WMF
6. Attach the key counter bracket [A] ( x 2).
7. Attach the harness [B] to the key counter bracket and the machine ( x 1).
8. Attach the bracket support [C] to the side of the copier ( x 2).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-118
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
1.21 COPY CONNECTOR KITS
1.21.1 COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B525-10, -12) FOR B064 SERIES
Important Notes
1. The following are the specialized firmware versions for use with the Copy
Connector Kit or MLB option. When installing either of these options, it is necessary to install the following firmware together as a set:
Software Part Number
GW Controller: System B5254108
GW Controller: Copy B5254109
Version (1st released)
5.07
5.07
Printer/Scanner B5255204 4.15/5.00
LCDC
B5254176 (NA)
B5254177 (EU)
2.04
2. With the Copy Connector/MLB modifications, the machine firmware has been divided up into 2 main groups:
1) The Copy Connector/MLB group (beginning with the versions listed above).
2) The usual firmware used up to the present, i.e. for machines without the
Copy Connector or MLB options.
Important: Firmware from these two groups cannot be used interchangeably.
Always update within the same group, otherwise the machine will not operate correctly.
3. The Copy Connector Kit and MLB options cannot be installed in the same machine. It is necessary to install one or the other.
4. As shown above, the GW controller firmware for the Copy Connector/MLB group has been divided into GW System and GW Copy, as the increased size has exceeded the card's storage capacity.
SM 1-119
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Copy Connector Board .......................................................... 2
2. MLB Interface Board.............................................................. 2
3. Interface Cable ...................................................................... 3
4. Interface Harness – Power Line............................................. 2
5. Hub ........................................................................................ 2
6. Key Top – Application ............................................................ 6
7. Key Top – Printer................................................................... 2
8. Anti-static Cap ....................................................................... 2
9. Knob Screw ........................................................................... 4
10. Decal – Copy Connector........................................................ 4
11. Tapping Screw – M3 x 8 ....................................................... 4
1
2 6 7
5
3
4
8
10 11 9
B246MTC1CCK.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-120
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
Installation
CAUTION
Unplug the machine main power cord before starting the following procedure.
Perform the following procedures for both the main and sub copiers.
Installing the Firmware: (B064 Series)
[A]
1. Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
2. Remove the controller cover ( x 10).
3. Turn on DIP SW2-1 on the controller board [A].
4. Install the following firmware.
• GW Controller (System and Copy)
• Printer/Scanner
• NIB
5. Turn off DIP SW2-1 on the controller board.
6. Install the following firmware.
• BCU
• LCDC
B110I201.WMF
SM 1-121
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installing the Hardware (B064 Series)
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B110I202.WMF
B110I201.WMF
1. Replace the interface board [A] with the MLB Interface Board [B].
NOTE: This step is not necessary from the following Serial Numbers:
Part Number Serial Number Part Number Serial Number
B06417 J4235300054 B06517 J4335300191
B06419 J42304XXXXX B06519 J43304XXXXX
B06422 J42304XXXXX B06522 J43304XXXXX
B06424 L1283040001 B06524 L1293040001
B06426 7P10430001 B06526 7P20430001
B06427 J4230300409 B06527 J43304XXXXX
B06428 J42304XXXXX B06528 J43304XXXXX
B06429 J42304XXXXX B06529 J43304XXXXX
B06469 J42304XXXXX B06569 J43304XXXXX
2. Remove the 4P connector [C] for the HDD and connect it to CN319 on the MLB
Board.
3. Connect one end of the power interface harness [D] to the HDD connector, and the other end to CN318 on the MLB Board.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-122
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
B110I203.WMF
4. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 2).
5. Install the CCK interface board [B] as shown.
6. Connect the harness [C] to CN315 on the MLB Board.
7. Attach the decals [D] as shown.
B110I102.WMF
SM 1-123
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
B110I204_RTB.WMF
B110I103_RTB.WMF
8. Lead the interface cable [AI] through the anti-static cap [BJ], and then connect it to the interface board.
9. Attach the anti-static cap (2 knob screws [C]).
10. Replace the key top [D].
11. Repeat both the firmware and hardware procedures above for the other copier.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-124
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
12. Perform Steps 12 and 13 below if the distance between the two machines is more than 4.5m.
[B]
[A]
B110I205.WMF
13. Use the Hubs [A] to connect the interface cables.
NOTE: When connected in this way, the maximum length possible is 13.5m (3 interface cables).
14. Attach the ferrite cores [B] as shown.
SM 1-125
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.21.2 COPY CONNECTOR KIT (B328-03) FOR B140 SERIES
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
B328I101.WMF
Description Q’ty
1. Interface Cable 1394.............................................................. 3
2. Repeater Hub 1394 ............................................................... 2
3. Connection PCB .................................................................... 2
4. Power Repeater Cable........................................................... 2
5. Keytops for B070/B071 (NA, EU 1 each)
“Other Function” .................................................................... 2
“Printer/Other Function” ......................................................... 2
6. Keytops for B140 series (NA, EU 1 each)
“Other Function”..................................................................... 2
“Printer/Other Function” ......................................................... 2
“Printer/Other Function” + Scanner........................................ 2
7. SDRAM DIMM 64 MB ........................................................... 2
8. Operating Instructions (NA) .................................................. 1
9. CD-ROM (Operating Instructions for EU) .............................. 1
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-126
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
Preparation
Before you begin the installation procedure:
• Check the distance between the machines to be connected.
• Check if the printer/scanner option is installed on the machines.
Measure the distance between the machines. Then check the number of cables and repeater hubs that are necessary.
DISTANCE
Up to 4.5 m (14.8 ft.)
4.5 ~ 9.0 m (14.8 ~ 29.5 ft)
9.0 ~ 13.5 m (29.5 ~ 112.5 ft.
POWER REPEATER
HUBS
None
1
2
INTERFACE
CABLES
1
2
3
Three sets of key-tops (2 per set, 1 for NA, 1 for EU) are included for each machine, but you must install only one key-top on each machine.
• Install the key labeled “Printer/Other Function + Scanner” (or its equivalent symbol key-top for EU) on a machine with the printer/scanner option installed
• Install the key labeled “Other Function” (or its equivalent symbol key-top for EU) on a machine without the printer/scanner option.
SM 1-127
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation (B140 Series)
[C]
[B]
B659I103.WMF
[A]
B661I110.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the controller box cover [A] ( x 12).
3. Remove the cover from Slot A2 [B] ( x 2).
4. Put the Copy Connector Kit board [C] in Slot A2 and tighten the knob screws (x
2).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-128
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[A]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
B661I113.WMF
[F]
B659I112.WMF
5. Connect one end [A] of the power supply harness to the mother board ( x 1).
6. Connect the other end [B] of the power supply harness to the connector board
( x 1).
7. Connect the 64 MB DIMM [C] to the mother board.
NOTE: This memory chip is a data transfer buffer.
8. Connect the connector board [D] to Slot A2.
9. Connect one end of the connector cable [E] to the copy connector board.
10. Connect the other end of the cable to the other machine.
-or-
If the distance between the machines is more than 4.5 m (14.8 ft.), connect the cables to a connector hub [F].
SM 1-129
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
B064I402.WMF
15. Replace the key tops [A].
16. Repeat the firmware and hardware procedures above for the other copier.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-130
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
1.21.3 COPY CONNECTOR (B842) FOR B246/D052 SERIES
Accessories
Description Q’ty
1. Tandem/FCU Mount ..............................................................2
2. Copy Connector Board B842 .................................................2
3. Power Repeater Cable...........................................................2
4. Coupling Interface Cable 1394 .............................................3
5. Screws ...................................................................................3
6. Repeater Hub 1394 ...............................................................2
7. Keytops..................................................................................2
1 2
3
B842I101.WMF
4
5
7
6
SM 1-131
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Preparation
Before you begin the installation procedure:
• Measure the distance between the machines to be connected.
• Confirm that the printer/scanner option is installed on the machines.
Determine the number of cables and repeater hubs that are necessary based on the distance measured between the machine.
DISTANCE
Up to 4.5 m (14.8 ft.)
4.5 ~ 9.0 m (14.8 ~ 29.5 ft)
9.0 ~ 13.5 m (29.5 ~ 112.5 ft.
POWER REPEATER
HUBS REQUIRED
None
1
2
INTERFACE CABLES
REQUIRED
1
2
3
• Install the key labeled “Printer/Other Function + Scanner” (or its equivalent symbol key-top for EU) on a machine with the printer/scanner option installed
• Install the key labeled “Other Function” (or its equivalent symbol key-top for EU) on a machine without the printer/scanner option.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-132
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Installation (B246 Series)
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
[B]
[C]
[A] B842I102.WMF
[D]
• Disconnect ADF cable
Remove:
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Controller box cover ( x13)
[E]
B842I103.WMF
1. If a file format converter board [A] is installed in slot A2 , remove it (Knob x2).
2. Remove the slot cover [B] of slot A1 ( x2).
3. Remove the file format converter mount [C] ( x2).
4. Remove the lower board slot face plate [D] ( x3).
5. Insert the Tandem/FCU mount [E] and fasten it ( x3).
• Confirm that the edge connector fastened to the mother board before you fasten the screws.
SM 1-133
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[B]
[A]
[C] B842I104.WMF
[E]
[D]
B842I105.WMF
6. Reattach the slot face plate [A] ( x3).
7. Insert the copy connector board [B] and fasten it (Knob x2)
8. Connect the power repeater cable [C] to the copy connector board and the
Tandem/FCU mount ( x2).
9. Reattach the file format converter mount [D] ( x2)
10. If the file format converter [E] was removed from slot A2 , reinstall it (Knob x2)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-134
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY CONNECTOR KITS
[A]
B842I107.WMF
[B]
B842I106.WMF
11. Do Steps 1-10 to install the PCBs in the other machine.
12. Connect the machines with the coupling interface cable.
-or-
If the distance between the machines is more than 4.5 m (14.8 ft.), use two cables by connecting them with a connector hub [A].
13. Replace the keytops [B] on both machines.
SM 1-135
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.22 MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.22.1 PRINTER/SCANNER KIT (G338), PRINTER KIT (G339)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Scanner/Printer DIMM (G338) or Printer DIMM (G339)......... 1
3. NIB ........................................................................................ 1
4. Screws M3 x 8..................................................................... 2
6. Key Top Assembly ................................................................ 1
9. CD-ROM................................................................................ 2
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-136
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B246MTC1PS.WMF
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.22.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Inserting DIMMs
Read this section carefully before installation so you know how to insert the DIMMs correctly.
CAUTION
Follow the procedure below to connect the DIMMs to the controller board.
Incorrect insertion can damage the controller board or cause a bad connection between the DIMM and controller contacts. If the upper contact is pressed in and bent, the resulting poor connection could cause the entire system to not operate.
[A] [B]
[C]
G338I901.WMF
1. Hold the ROM DIMM with the edge connector [A] pointing toward the slot and the notch [B] on the DIMM in the upper right corner.
2. Insert the edge connector [C] into the slot at a 30-degree angle from the surface of the board.
NOTE: If the angle is too low, the upper contact could bend.
3. Move the outside edge of the ROM DIMM up and down slightly until it works into the connector, then gently press it down level with the controller board.
SM 1-137
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
Installation Procedure
[D]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[B]
G338I201.WMF
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: The printer/scanner unit requires at least 128 MB of memory (more is recommended). Memory chips are not packaged with this unit.
1. Disconnect the ADF cable.
2. Remove the rear upper cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the controller cover ( x 10).
CAUTION
Make sure that the DIMMs are inserted correctly. ( 0)
4. Insert the SDRAM DIMM (expansion memory 128 MB or 256 MB) [A] into
PC133 on the controller.
5. Insert the ROM DIMM [B] (printer/scanner) board into Slot 1.
6. Remove the Centronics connector cover [C] and insert the Centronics connector [D] into CN310 and fasten with the provided screws ( x 2).
Rating voltage of interface connectors: Max. DC 5V
7. Remove the slot covers [E] ( x 2).
8. Install the NIB [F] into CN311 ( x 1).
Rating voltage of interface connectors: Max. DC 5V
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-138
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[A]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
G338I402.WMF
9. Make sure that the following SP commands are set correctly.
• SP5811 – Machine No. Setting
• SP5907 – Plug & Play
10. Attach the provided decal near the machine name on the copier.
11. Wrap the Ethernet cable three times inside the ferrite core, close the ferrite core, then connect the modular jack to the NIB.
12. Follow the procedures in the instruction manuals to perform the user settings.
13. Replace the key top assembly [A].
SM 1-139
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.22.3 PS3 (B525-08)
B064I204.WMF
1. Remove the rear upper cover ( x 2).
2. Remove the controller cover ( x 9).
3. Insert the PS3 module [A] into Slot 2.
CAUTION
Make sure that the DIMM is inserted correctly.( 1.22.2)
[A]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-140
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.22.4 USB 2.0 (B525-01)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
Installation Procedure
[A]
[B]
B064I202.WMF
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear upper cover ( x 2).
2. Remove the controller cover ( x 10).
3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Insert the USB board [B] into the PCI slot.
5. Fasten the slot cover to the USB board ( x 2).
6. Use SP5990-005 to print a Self-Diagnostic Report with the system settings and confirm that the machine correctly recognizes the interface.
SM 1-141
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
USB SP Settings
The following SP commands are available. However, only one setting may require adjustment and this setting should be performed only if the customer is experiencing USB data transmission errors.
NOTE: Do not change the settings marked “DFU”. These settings are for design and factory use only.
To enter the SP mode:
1. Press Clear Modes
2. On the operation panel keypad, press .
3. Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
4. Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel to open the SP command selection screen.
SP Mode (Service) Open All Close All Copy Window SP Direct
14APR 2002 03:25
X-XXX-XXX Exit
SP1XXX
SP2XXX
SP3XXX
SP4XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
Feed
Drum
Process
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
Data Log2
Group
Page
Line
Line
Page
Group
COPY: SP1-001-001
Initial 0
21
Prev Page Next Page
B064I999.WMF
5. Enter .
SP No. Name Function
5844-002 Vendor ID
Adjusts the USB transfer rate. Do not change the setting unless there is a data transfer error using the USB high speed mode.
HS/FS: High speed/Full speed auto adjust
(480Mbps/12Mbps)
FS: Full speed (12Mbps fixed)
Displays the vendor ID. DFU
5844-003 Product ID Displays the product ID. DFU
5844-004 Dev. Release Num Displays the development release version number. DFU
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-142
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.22.5 IEEE1394 (G561) FIREWIRE INTERFACE
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
SM 1-143
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
Installation Procedure
[A]
[B] [C]
B064I205.WMF
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear upper cover ( x 2).
2. Remove the controller cover ( x 9).
3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Attach the IEEE1394 board [B].
5. Use the provided cable to connect the machine and the computer.
6. Make sure that the jumper is on TB2 [C].
7. Print a system settings list and confirm that the machine correctly recognizes the interface.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-144
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394
Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
1. Press User Tools/Counter.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
3. Press Interface Settings.
System Intialization Settings
Select the desired settings.
End
Network Parallel Interface
IP Address
IEEE 1394
0000.0000.0000.0000
IEEE 802.1b
SCSI Print Bi-directional On
Subnet Mask
IP Over 1394
0000.0000.0000.0000
Enabled
SCSI Print Enabled
B064I998.WMF
4. Press the key and enter the following settings:
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• IP Over 1394. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
IP Over 1394 as the default setting for the printing method.
• SCSI Print. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
SCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method.
• SCSI Print Bi-directional. Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.
SM 1-145
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394
The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
To enter the SP mode:
1. Press Clear Modes
2. On the operation panel keypad, press .
3. Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
4. Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel to open the SP command selection screen.
SP Mode (Service)
SP1XXX
Open All Close All
Group
Copy Window SP Direct
COPY: SP1-001-001
14APR 2002 03:25
X-XXX-XXX Exit
SP2XXX
SP3XXX
SP4XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
Feed
Drum
Process
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
Data Log2
Page
Line
Line
Page
Group
Initial 0
21
Prev Page Next Page
B064I999.WMF
5. Enter .
SP No. Name
5839-004 Device Name
5839-007 Cycle Master
5839-008 BCR Mode
Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE 1394 standard bus.
Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for the
Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus for when IRM is not in use. Three settings are available: 00,
01, 11.
5839-009 IRM 1394a Check Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394 is conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
5839-010 Unique ID
Function
Sets the names for all the physical devices connected to the IEEE 1394 firewire network.
5839-011 Logout
5839-012 Login
5839-013 Login MAX
Enables the “Node_Unique_Id” setting for enumeration on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
Determines how successive initiator login requests are handled during login for SBP-2.
Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range: 1
~ 62.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-146
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.22.6 IEEE802.11B WIRELESS LAN (G628)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Wireless LAN PCB (GW-WLAN) ........................................... 1
4. Wireless LAN Instructions ..................................................... 1
SM 1-147
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
Installation Procedure
[E]
40 ~ 60 mm
[A] [C]
[B]
B064I206.WMF
[D]
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
B064I207.WMF
1. Remove the rear upper cover ( x 2).
2. Remove the controller cover ( x 9).
3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Insert the wireless LAN board [B] into the PCI Slot 1.
5. Fasten the slot cover to the wireless LAN board ( x 2).
6. Set the jumper [C] between pins 3 and 4 on the wireless LAN board.
7. Insert the LAN PC card [D] into the wireless LAN board.
8. Connect the antennas. Use the provided double-sided tape to attach the antennas [E] to the side of the machine.
NOTE: 1) Set the antennas 40~60 mm apart (1.5~2.5").
2) Attach the antennas where they will not be moved or damaged by opening and closing the door of the machine.
3) Set up the antenna in an area that is free of interference from electrical equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field.
4) Always remove the antenna before moving the machine.
5) If reception is poor, move the machine and antenna closer to the access point.
9. Print a system settings list and confirm that the machine correctly recognizes the interface.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-148
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN
Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be used if Ethernet is being used.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select Interface Settings → Network (tab) → Network I/F Settting
4. Select either “Ethernet” or “IEEE 802.11b”.
5. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options are displayed.
System Intialization Settings
Select the desired settings.
End
Network Parallel Interface
Transmission Speed
IEEE 1394
802.11 Ad Hoc Mode
IEEE 802.1b
SSID Setting ASSID
Channel 11 Bandwidth Status
WEP (Privacy) Setting Disabled 1/2 Previous Next
B064I997.WMF
6. Transmission Mode . Select either “Ad Hoc Mode” or “Infrastructure Mode”.
7. SSID Setting . Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
8. Channel . This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
SM 1-149
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
9. WEP (Privacy) Setting . The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to unlock encoded data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There are 64 bit and
128 bit WEP keys.
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
10. Bandwidth Status . This setting is enabled only for the Infrastructure Mode.
Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth. One of the following is displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN:
Good
Fair
76 ~ 100%
41 ~ 75%
Poor 21 ~ 40%
Unavailable 0 ~ 20%
11. Transmission Speed . Press the Next button to display more settings, then select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the closest machine or access point, depending on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
12. To initialize the wireless LAN settings, use page 2/2. Press Execute to initialize the following settings:
• Transmission
• Channel
• Speed
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-150
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 04/2008
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
SP Mode Settings for 802.11b Wireless LAN
The following SP commands can be set for 802.11b
1. Press Clear Modes
2. On the operation panel keypad, press .
3. Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
4. Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel to open the SP command selection screen.
SP Mode (Service) Open All Close All Copy Window SP Direct
14APR 2002 03:25
X-XXX-XXX Exit
SP1XXX
SP2XXX
Feed
Drum
Group
COPY: SP1-001-001
Page
SP3XXX Process
SP4XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
Line
Line
Page
Initial 0
21
Data Log2
Group Prev Page
SP8XXX
Next Page
B064I999.WMF
⇒
5. Enter "5840".
SP No. Name
5840-006 Channel MAX
5840-007 Channel MIN
Function
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your country.
5840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
SM 1-151
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
1.22.7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB) (B519)
NOTE:
1. This table shows the special firmware versions to use with the Copy Connector
Kit or File Format Converter (MLB option). When you install one of these options, it is necessary to install these firmware modules together as a set .
Software Part Number
GW Controller: System B5254108
GW Controller: Copy B5254109
Version (1st released)
5.07
5.07
Printer/Scanner B5255204 4.15/5.00
NIB/Netfile B5254114 3.00/1.79
LCDC
B5254176 (NA)
B5254177 (EU)
2.04
2. With the Copy Connector/MLB modifications, the machine firmware is divided into 2 main groups:
1) The Copy Connector/MLB group (this starts with the versions in the table above)
2) The usual firmware that was used until this time, that is, for machines without the Copy Connector or MLB options.
Important: Do not mix firmware from these two. Always use firmware from the same group , or the machine will not operate correctly.
3. The MLB option cannot operate with any of these items installed. You must remove these before you start the procedure below:
- Wireless LAN board
- IEEE1394 I/F board
- USB2.0 I/F board
- Copy Connector Kit components
4. As shown above, the GW controller firmware for the Copy Connector/MLB group is divided into GW System and GW Copy. This is because the firmware is too large to go on one card.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-152
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 04/2008
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. File Format Converter Board ................................................. 1
2. MLB bracket........................................................................... 1
3. MLB panel.............................................................................. 1
4. Screw M3 x 6 ......................................................................... 2
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power code before you start this procedure.
⇒
Installing the Firmware
1. Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
2. Remove the controller cover ( x 10).
3. Push DIP SW2-1 on the controller board to the UP position (ON).
4. Install these firmware modules.
• GW Controller (System and Copy)
• Printer/Scanner
• NIB Netfile
5. Turn off DIP SW2-1 on the controller board.
6. Install these firmware modules.
• BCU
• LCDC
SW 3
ON
1 2 3 4
SW 2
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
SW 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G148R158.WMF
SM 1-153
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B064 SERIES
Installing the Hardware
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B110I104.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Remove the bracket [B] and attach the MLB panel [C].
3. Attach the File Format Converter board [D] to the controller board ( x 2).
4. Replace the controller board cover and rear cover.
5. Turn the main switch ON.
6. Do a network function Memory Clear (SP5801-010).
7. Do an NCS function Memory Clear (SP5801-011). This resets the network password to “password”.
NOTE: This step is necessary to make sure that the password is reset correctly.
8. Input these default values manually (SP5836).
SP Number Value SP Number Value
5836-001 0 5836-082 1
5836-002 0 5836-083 1
5836-072 0 5836-085 1
5836-073 0 5836-086 2
5836-075 0 5836-091 50
5836-076 1
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-154
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 04/2008
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
1.23 MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
1.23.1 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD
Important:
• These instructions and procedures apply to both the B140 Series B246 Series and D052 Series.
Overview
The machine has three SD card slots:
• For the B246/D052 Series, slot 1 (C1) is used for the system card (Never remove the system SD card from Slot 1) . (B140 Series machines do not employ a system card.)
• Slot 2 (C2) is used for application programs
• Slot 3 (C3) is used for servicing (firmware updates)
NOTE: Only one SD card slot (C2) is available for SD card applications with the B140 and B246/D052 machines. If the customer wants to use more than one application, the applications must be copied onto the same
SD card.
Important
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the target SD card.
• Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time. Correct operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
• The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application program. Also, the service technician may occasionally need to check the SD card and its data to solve problems. For these reasons SD cards must be stored with the machine. ( Pg. 1-158)
• A licensing agreement prohibits copying of the PostScript SD card. However, you can copy any application from another SD card to the PS3 SD card.
• Once an SD card has been used to combine applications on that card, that SD card cannot be used for a different function.
• Never remove the System SD Card from Slot 1.
• Before uploading to an SD card, always make sure that the write-protect switch is OFF. (It is very easy to accidentally turn on the write-protect switch when inserting or removing an SD card.)
SM 1-155
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 08/2007
Merging Applications
Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card.
1. Turn off the copier.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x2).
3. Insert the Source SD card into the source SD card slot on the left side of the controller box. This card contains the application that you want to copy.
Series Source SD Card Slot
B140 Series
B246 Series
C3
C3
NOTE: The PS SD card cannot be the source card (it cannot be copied).
4. Check the target SD card and confirm that its write-protect switch is OFF.
⇒
5. Insert the Target SD card into the target SD card slot.
Series Target SD Card Slot
B140 Series C1
B246 Series C2
6. Turn the copier on.
7. Do .
8. Select "Execute".
9. Obey the instructions on the display and select "Execute" to start copying.
10. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit".
⇒
11. Turn the copier off.
12. Remove the Source SD card from C3 . Leave the target SD card in C2 (or C1) .
13. Turn the copier on.
14. Go into the User Tools mode and check that all the applications on the SD card in Slot 2 are enabled:
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version
15. Turn the copier off again, then:
• Reattach the SD card slot cover.
• Attach the rear cover of the machine.
• Store the SD cards that were copied. ( Pg.1-158)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-156
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
Important!
• After an SD card has been copied, it can no longer be used. However, it must be stored in the machine to serve as proof of purchase by the customer.
• The original card can also be used to perform an undo procedure (SP 5873 002).
• Before you store an SD card, label it carefully so it can be identified easily if you need to do the undo procedure (see below).
Undo Exec
Do this procedure if you moved an option from the original SD card to another card by mistake and you need to restore the original SD card.
1. Turn the main switch OFF.
2. Put the SD cards into the SD card slots as follows:
SD Card B140 Series
Source (with copied appli.) C1
B246/D052 Series
C2
Target (now blank)
3. Turn the main switch ON.
4. Do (Undo Exec).
C3 C3
5. Follow the instructions of the operation panel messages.
6. Turn the main switch OFF.
7. Remove the Source SD card (from C1 of B140 Series, C2 of B246/D052
Series).
8. Remove the option Target SD card from C3.
9. Insert restored SD card (the target) into the SD card slot.
B140 Series C1
B246/D052 Series C2
10. Turn the main switch ON.
11. Do SP5990-005 (Loading Program) and make sure the program runs correctly.
12. Turn the main switch OFF.
13. Remove the SD card.
SM 1-157
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
Storing Copied SD Cards On Site
The source SD cards (cards with applications that have been moved to another SD card) cannot be used in another machine unless the SD card is restored with
SP5873 002 (Undo Exec). However, these cards must be stored at the machine site because they serve as proof of purchase by the customer.
Return copied SD cards to the customer for safekeeping, or tape the copied SD cards to the inside of the front door.
Do not remove copied SD cards from the machine site.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-158
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
1.23.2 OVERVIEW
To make it easy to install MFP options, there are 6 slots (A1, A2, B1 to B4) for boards and 3 slots (C1 to C3) for SD cards on the controller box. Each board or SD card must be put in its assigned slot. The correct slots for each option are shown on the decal attached to the controller box cover (shown in the diagram).
MFP Option Slot Assignment
C1
C2
B1 B2
C3 B3 B4
A1 A2
A1
A2 Tandem
B1
1394/802.11b/
USB2.0/Bluetooth
B2 File Format Converter
B3 Paralle(1284)
B4 Ethernet
C1 Printer/Scanner
C2 Option PDL
C3 Service
B659I101.WMF
SM 1-159
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 04/2008
⇒
1.23.3 PRINTER/SCANNER KIT (B659/D406)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. 256 MB Memory DIMM ......................................................... 1
2. NIB Board ............................................................................ 1
3. Centronics Board (IEEE 1284)............................................... 1
4. Printer/Scanner SD Card ....................................................... 1
5. Keytop.................................................................................... 1
6. Ferrite Core............................................................................ 1
7. CD-ROM ................................................................................ 2
NOTE: The optional 256 MB Memory Kit B585 is necessary for this installation.
This memory kit is not supplied with the Printer/Scanner Kit B580.
1
2
3
4
7
5 6
B246MTC2PS.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-160
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Installation
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
B659I103.WMF
B659I104.WMF
CAUTION
Before you start this procedure, turn the machine off and disconnect the power plug from the power source.
1. Remove the rear covers.
2. Remove the controller box cover [A] ( x 12).
3. Hold the 256 MB memory DIMM [B] as shown.
4. Install the DIMM in slot [C] above the other memory DIMM [D].
NOTE: To remove the memory DIMM, pull out the spring-loaded clips on one of the two ends of the DIMM.
5. Attach the controller box cover.
SM 1-161
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
[E]
[F] [I]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[G]
B659I102.WMF
[H]
6. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B4 ( x 2).
7. Install the NIB board [B] in Slot B4 and secure it with the screws.
8. Remove the cover [C] of Slot B3 ( x 2).
9. Install the Centronics board [D] in Slot B3 and secure it with the screws.
10. Remove the slot cover [E] ( x 2).
11. Hold the SD Card [F] with its label turned as shown above, then install it in Slot
C1.
NOTE: If you push in the SD Card, this releases it for removal. Make sure the
SD Card is installed and locked in position. If it is not fully in the slot, push it in carefully until it locks in position.
12. Wind the cable [G] one full turn around the ferrite core [H], then close the core to lock it.
13. Connect the adapter [I] to the NIB board.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-162
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
[A]
B064I402.WMF
14. Attach the decal near the machine name on the copier.
15. Obey the procedures in the operating instructions to make the user settings.
16. Replace the old key top assembly [A] with the new one [B].
17. Make sure that these SP commands are set correctly.
• SP5811 – Machine No. Setting
• SP5907 – Plug & Play
SM 1-163
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 04/2008
1.23.4 PS3 (B525-15)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. PostScript3 Emulation SD Card............................................. 1
⇒
Installation
B140 Series
• The PS3 SD card can be used only with the P/S kit SD card in the machine.
• Insert the printer/scanner kit SD card in Slot C2 and the PS3 SD card in Slot C1.
Installation
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).
[B]
3. Install the PS3 SD Card [B] in Slot C2.
• If you push in the SD Card, this releases it for removal.
• Make sure the SD Card is installed and locked in position.
• If it is not fully in the slot, push it in carefully until it locks in position.
4. Turn the machine on.
B659I111.WM
F
[A]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-164
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
1.23.5 USB 2.0 INTERFACE BOARD (B596-01)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. USB 2.0 Interface Board ........................................................ 1
Installation
You can only install one of these cards, because only one PCI slot (B1) is available for these options:
• USB 2.0
• IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit G377
If a different card is installed in B1, you must remove it before you install USB 2.0
Interface Board.
[A]
B659I108.WMF
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Remove the cover of Slot B1 ( x 2).
3. Install the USB 2.0 interface board [A] in Slot B1 and attach it with the screws.
4. Print a configuration page to make sure that the machine can see the USB interface board.
User Tools > Printer Features > List Test Print > Configuration Page
SM 1-165
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
1.23.6 IEEE 1394 INTERFACE BOARD (B581-01)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. IEEE 1394 Interface Board .................................................... 1
2. 4-Pin Cable ............................................................................ 1
3. 6-Pin Cable ............................................................................ 1
Installation
You can only install one of these cards, because only one PCI slot (B1) is available for these options:
• USB 2.0
• IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit G377
If a different card is installed in B1, you must remove it before you install IEEE
1394 Interface Board.
[A]
B659I108.WMF
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Remove the cover of Slot B1 ( x 2).
3. Install the IEEE 1394 board [A] in Slot B1 and attach it with the screws.
4. Turn the machine on and print a configuration page to make sure that the machine can see the IEEE 1394 (FireWire) board:
User Tools> Printer Features> List Test Print> Configuration Page
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-166
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
1.23.7 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE BOARD (B582-01, -02)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. IEEE 802.11b Interface Board............................................... 1
3. Antennas .............................................................................. 2
Installation
You can only install one of these cards, because only one PCI slot (B1) is available for these options:
• USB 2.0
• IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit G377
If a different card is installed in B1, you must remove it before you install IEEE
802.11b Interface Board.
[B]
[A]
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Remove the cover of Slot B1 ( x 2).
3. Remove the plastic cap from the PCI card.
B659I108.WMF
4. Insert the PCI card [A] into the wireless LAN board.
5. Install the wireless LAN board [B] in Slot B1 and attach it with the screws.
SM 1-167
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
40 to 60 mm
[B]
[A]
[D] B659I105.WMF
[C]
6. Remove the tape from the back of the Velcro patches [A]. Then, attach the patches to the right rear corner of the main frame. Attach the antennas [B] to the patches.
7. Put the connectors through the antenna cap [C].
8. Connect each antenna to a terminal [D] and attach the antenna cap.
NOTE: 1) You should attach the antennas as specified above for optimal results. However if you place one or both antennas in a different location, make sure that the antennas are separated by a minimum of 40~60 mm (1.5~2.5").
2) Install the antennas in an area that is free of interference from electrical equipment that causes a strong electromagnetic field.
3) Always remove the antennas from the corners of the machine and disconnect them before you move the machine.
4) If reception is not good, move the machine and antennas nearer to the access point.
9. Turn the machine on and print a configuration page to make sure that the machine can see the installed IEEE 802.11b interface board:
User Tools> Printer Features> List Test Print> Configuration Page
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-168
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
1.23.8 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT (G377)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
Installation
You can only install one of these cards, because only one PCI slot (B1) is available for these options:
• USB 2.0
• IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit G377
If a different card is installed in B1, you must remove it before you install the
Bluetooth interface unit.
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
1. Remove the slot cover from Slot B1 [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [A] (Knob-screw x 2).
3. Insert the Bluetooth card [B] in the slot.
4. Push the antenna [C] to extend it.
5. Attach the antenna cap [D].
B659I108.WMF
SM 1-169
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
1.23.9 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) ................... 1
Installation
Rev. 03/2007
[A]
⇒
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Remove the cover of Slot A2 ( x 2).
⇒
3. Install the file format converter board [A] in Slot A2 and attach it with the screws.
B659I109.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-170
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
1.23.10 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
Before You Begin…
1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the machine. The correct type for this machine is type "C".
Important: If the NVRAM is replaced then the data overwrite security feature must be replaced with the new data overwrite security option.
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings:
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password
Important : These settings must be set up by the customer before the Data
Overwrite Security unit can be installed.
3. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator
Authentication Management"> "Admin. Authentication"> "On"
If this setting is "Off" inform the customer that this setting must be "On" before you can do the installation procedure.
4. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator
Authentication Management"> "Available Settings
NOTE: "Available Settings" is not displayed until Step 2 is completed.
If this setting is not selected,inform the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do the installation procedure.
SM 1-171
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
Seal Check And Removal
[A]
B692I901.WMF
[B]
B692I903.WMF
CAUTION
Before you start the installation, you must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes should be blank.
Important : If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do not install the components in the box. Stop the procedure and contact your Sales Division.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the box.
3. After you remove each seal, the “VOID” marks [B] appear. This is normal.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-172
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
The machine should always be turned off and its power cord disconnected before you do any of these procedures.
1. If the machine is on, turn off the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB is installed,.
[A]
[B]
B659I111.WMF
3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Install the SD Card [B].
5. Connect the network cable if the NIB is installed.
6. Turn the main power switch on.
7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup).
8. Exit SP mode.
9. Turn the operation switch off, then turn the main power switch off.
10. Turn the main power switch on again.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
SM 1-173
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
[A]
[B]
12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version [A] in the diagnostic report are the as the ROM and version number of [B].
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-174
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B140/B246/D052 SERIES
13. Turn "Auto Erase Memory Setting" on:
[User Tools]> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Auto Erase Memory
Setting> ON
14. Exit User Tools.
[A]
[B] [C]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi .
Total Copies
0 1 0
B692I904.WMF
B692I905.WMF
15. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
NOTE: If it is not displayed, repeat the procedure from Step p7 again.
16. Make a Sample Copy.
17. Check the overwrite erase icon.
• The bottom of the icon becomes thicker [B].
• “Next Copy” is shown for a short time under the icon.
• The icon goes back to its usual shape [C].
18. Remove the Document Server and Scanner key-tops, and replace them with the blank key-tops that are supplied with the kit.
SM 1-175
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 04/2008
1.24 MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.1 OVERVIEW
To make it easy to install MFP options, there are 5 slots for boards (B1, B2, B3, A1,
A2) and 3 slots (C1, C2, C3) for SD cards on the controller box. Each board or SD card must be inserted in its assigned slot. The correct slots for each option are shown on the decal attached to the controller box cover (shown in the diagram).
B246I999.BMP
Below is a list of the controller options that can be installed on a B246 Series machine.
Slot No.
--- B829-03
A2 B609-04
Name
Copy Data Security Unit Type C (IPU Option)
File Format Converter Type C
B1
B2 * 1
B2
B825
826
B581-01
USB Host Interface Unit Type A
Bluetooth Interface Unit
IEEE 1394 Interface Board
B2 B582-01, 02 IEEE 802.11b
B2 B679 IEEE1284
B2 B818 Remote Communication Gate Type CM1
Section
1.24.13
1.24.8
1.24.11
1.24.7
1.24.5
1.24.6
1.24.15
1.24.10
⇒
B3
C1
C2 *
2
C3
G381
System
B735
B861
Gigabit Ethernet G381
System Slot (Holds the system software. Never remove this SD card!)
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C
Java VM Card
1.24.16
---
1.24.9
1.24.14
1.24.3
C2 B525-15 PS3
C3 B828 Browser Unit Type B
1.24.4
1.24.12
C3 Service SD card for machine firmware update by the
*
*
1
2 customer engineer. Also for Browser Unit B828
Only one of these boards can be inserted at a time.
This is the only SD card slot available for applications. If more than one application is to be used, the applications must be merged onto one SD card. ( 1.23.1)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-176
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.2 COMMON PROCEDURES
Inserting SD Cards
Insert SD cards with the notched corner down.
The insertion point for the SD cards are offset slightly to the left. Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly before you push it into the slot.
Pushing in the SD Card also releases it for removal. Make sure the SD Card is inserted and locked in place. If it is partially out of the slot, push it in gently until it locks in place.
Storing Copied SD Cards
Copied SD cards cannot be used. However, they nonetheless must be stored at the site to server as proof of purchase by the customer.
00MTY.bmp
00MTY.BMP
SM 1-177
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
1.24.3 PRINTER SCANNER KIT (B841/D406)
B841: B246/B248/B249, D406: D052/D053/D054
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. Printer/Scanner SD Card ........................................................... 1
2. 256 MB Memory DIMM ............................................................. 1
3. Keytop Printer ............................................................................ 1
4. Keytop Scanner ......................................................................... 1
5. CD-ROM .................................................................................... 2
1
2
3
4
Rev. 04/2008
5
B246MTC3PS.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-178
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Installation
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
[A]
[B]
B841I101.WMF
CAUTION
Before you start this procedure, turn the machine off and disconnect the power plug from the power source.
1. Remove the rear upper and lower covers ( x 2 ea.) ( 3.3.2)
2. Remove the controller box cover [A] ( x 13).
3. Insert the 256 MB memory DIMM [B] into the empty slot.
4. Reattach the controller box cover.
SM 1-179
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
5. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
( x1)
6. Hold the SD Card [B] with its label turned as shown above, then install it in Slot C2 .
7. Wind the cable [C] one full turn around the ferrite core
[D], then close the core to lock it.
8. Connect the adapter to the network board in Slot B3 .
NOTE: The USB/Ethernet Board is pre-installed in Slot
B3 .
[D]
[C]
B841I102.WMF
TEMPI901.BMP
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-180
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
⇒
Rev. 04/2008
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
B841I103.WMF
9. Attach the decal near the machine name on the copier.
10. Obey the procedures in the operating instructions to do the user settings.
11. Remove the dummy keytops , and discard them.
12. Attach the new keytops Printer , Scanner.
13. Make sure that these SP commands are set correctly:
• SP5985 001 : Device Setting - On Board NIC (Set to "1" Enable)
• SP5985 002 : Device Setting – On Board USB (Set to "1" Enable)
• SP5811 – Machine No. Setting
• SP5907 – Plug & Play
NOTE: After you change SP 5985 001 and 002, you must then turn the main power switch off and on.
SM 1-181
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 04/2008
1.24.4 POSTSCRIPT3 (B525-44)
Accessories
Description Q’ty
1. PostScript3 Emulation SD Card .................................................1
2. Decal..........................................................................................1
⇒
Important
B246
• The system card must be in Slot C1 at all times.
• Only one SD card slot (C2) is available for applications. Therefore, the contents of the printer/scanner SD card must be copied to the PS3 SD card.
Installation
1. Switch the machine OFF.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
( x 1).
3. Insert the PS3 SD Card [B] into Slot C2 .
4. Switch the machine ON.
[A]
[B]
B525I101.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-182
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.5 IEEE1394 INTERFACE BOARD (B581)
Accessories
Description Q’ty
1. IEEE 1394 Board ..................................................................1
2. 4-Pin Cable...........................................................................1
3. 5-Pin Cable...........................................................................1
Installation
One PCI slot ( B2 ) is available for use with one of these options:
• Centronics 1284
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• IEEE 801.11b (Wireless LAN)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit B826
• @Remote Network Interface B818
Important
If another card is installed in B2 , you must remove it before installing this card.
[A]
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B2 ( x 2).
3. Insert the IEEE 1394 board [B] into Slot B2 and fasten it with the screws.
[B]
B581I101.WMF
4. Switch the machine on and print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board:
User Tools> Printer Features> List/Test Print> Configuration Page
SM 1-183
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.6 WIRELESS LAN G813 (802.11B)
Accessories
Description Q’ty
1. IEEE 801.11b Board ..............................................................1
2. PCI Card ................................................................................1
3. Cover Cap..............................................................................1
Installation
One PCI slot ( B2 ) is available for use with one of these options:
• Centronics 1284
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• IEEE 801.11b (Wireless LAN)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit B826
• @Remote Network Interface B818
Important
If another card is installed in B2 , you must remove it before installing this card.
[A]
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B2 ( x
2).
3. Insert the PCI card [B] into the wireless LAN board [C].
4. Insert the wireless LAN board [C] into
Slot B2 and fasten it with the screws.
[D]
[B]
[C]
5. Attach the cap [D].
6. Switch the machine on and print a
G813I101.WMF configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board:
User Tools> Printer Features> List/Test Print> Configuration Page
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-184
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.7 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE C B826
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories.
No. Description Q’ty
1
2 Bluetooth card cover 1
4 Bluetooth card adapter
1
1
Installation
One PCI slot ( B2 ) is available for use with one of these options:
• Centronics 1284
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• IEEE 801.11b (Wireless LAN)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit B826
• @Remote Network Interface B818
Important
If another board is installed in B2 , you must remove it before installing this card. [A]
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the I/F cover slot [A] of Slot
B2 ( x2).
3. Touch a metal surface to remove static charge from your hands before you touch the interface card.
4. With both labels facing up, insert the
Bluetooth card [B] into the adapter [C].
[E]
5. With the labels facing down, insert the adapter [C] into the Bluetooth board
[D].
[D] [B] [C]
6. Insert the interface board (with card and adapter inserted) into Slot B2 .
7. Attach the card cover [E] (used to prevent static electricity).
8. Confirm that Bluetooth is installed correctly:
User Tools> Printer Features> List/Test Print> Configuration Page
B826I101.WMF
SM 1-185
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.8 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE C B609
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) ......................... 1
Installation
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Remove the cover of Slot A2 [A]
( x 2).
3. Install the file format converter board [B] in
Slot A2 and attach it with the screws.
[A]
[B]
B609I101.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-186
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 09/2006
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
1.24.9 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE C B735
Before You Begin The Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values: z Supervisor login password z Administrator login name z Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password.
2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” – “Machine Management” is ON.
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Machine Management]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation procedure.
3. Make sure that under Machine Management “Administrator Tools” is enabled
(selected).
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication
Management] – [Machine Management] - [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.
Accessory Check
The B246 series uses a Type C Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
SM 1-187
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
Seal Check and Removal
Rev. 09/2006
[A]
B735I901.WMF
1. Ensure a customer witness is present when opening the DOSS option.
2. Make sure that:
1) The box has two pieces of tape
[A] attached to the corners in the photo, AND
2) These two tapes are blank .
[B]
B735I903.WMF
¾ If you can see “VOID” on the surface of the tape, DO NOT install the components in the box. Stop this procedure and contact the Technical Hotline via the e-Lert form on the TSC Website. Retain the box and its contents. Any tampering of the DOSS option will need to be investigated.
4. If the results of Step 1 are OK, remove the two pieces of tape from the box.
Note: After you remove the tapes, you will see “VOID” written on the box under the tape [B]. This is normal.
5. The procedures outline in this bulletin needs to be followed if the DOSS option is replaced due to a failure.
CAUTION
Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power switch and unplug the power cord.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-188
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 09/2006
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
The machine should always be turned off and its power cord disconnected before you do any of these procedures.
1. If the machine is on, turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB is installed.
[A]
[B]
B735I101.WMF
3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
4. Install the SD Card [B].
5. Connect the network cable if the NIB is installed.
6. Turn the main power switch ON.
7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup).
8. Exit SP mode.
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, then turn the main power switch OFF.
10. Turn the main power switch ON again.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
SM 1-189
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 09/2006
⇒
12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are the same as those in the chart below: z [A]: “ROM Number/Firmware Version” – “HDD Format Option” z [B]: “Loading Program” – “GW1a_zoffy” ( Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C)
“Loading Program” – “GW2a_zoffy” ( Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D)
Diagnostic Report:
Data Overwrite Security
Unit
Data Overwrite Security
Unit
Type C
Type D
“ROM No. / Firmware
Version” [A]
HDD Format Option:
B7355050 / 0.04
HDD Format Option:
B7355060 / 0.03
“Loading Program”
GW1a_zoffy:
B7355050 / 0.04
GW2a_zoffy:
B7355060 / 0.03
[B]
Important: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the firmware is upgraded.
• If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same, this means the unit was not installed correctly.
If this happens:
¾ Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D).
The B246 series uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C.
¾ If they do not match:
1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1.
2) Replace the “Data Overwrite Security Unit” (SD card) with the correct type. Redo installation procedure.
3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.
13. Turn “Auto Erase Memory Setting” ON:
User Tools >> System Settings >> Administrator Tools >> Auto Erase Memory
Setting >> ON
¾ If the customer has enabled Administrator Authentication Management -
Machine Management they will have to log in to change this User Tool setting.
14. Exit User Tools.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 09/2006
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
15. Power the machine OFF/ON.
[A]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi .
Total Copies
0 1 0
[B] [C]
16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel.
If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again.
17. Make a sample copy.
18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows:
• The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B].
• “Next Copy” is displayed for a short time under the icon.
• The icon returns to its usual shape [C].
SM 1-191
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.10 REMOTE COMMUNICATION GATE TYPE CM1 (B818)
Accessories
Description Q’ty
1. @Remote Network Interface Unit ..........................................1
Installation
One PCI slot ( B2 ) is available for use with one of these options:
• Centronics 1284
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• IEEE 801.11b (Wireless LAN)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit B826
• @Remote Network Interface B818
Important
If another board is installed in B2 , you must remove it before installing this card.
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B2
( x 2).
3. Attach the connector plate [B] ( x
1).
4. Insert the @Remote Network
Interface board [C] into Slot B2 and fasten it with the screws
( x 1).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B818I101.WMF
5. Enter the SP mode and note the settings of the following SP codes:
SP5816 Remote Service Note Setting
154 Outside Line/Outgoing Number
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-192
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
6. Follow the flow chart below to do the SP settings for @Remote Network
Interface B818.
Start
SP5816 201
Confirm device installation status
0: Not Installed yet
SP5816 202
Input request number
SP5816 203
Confirm device data
SP5816 204
Show result of device confirmation
Process failed
1: Request No. Error
9: Under processing
Failed
1: Under Installation
2: Registration finish completely
3: Already Registered
4: Not NRS Compatible Device
SP5816 208
Display error code
End: Cannot Install
Other error
3,4,5,6: Communication error
0: Succcess
SP5816 205
Input device location
SP5816 206
Start device registration
SP5816 207
Show device registration result
9: Under registration
Other error
3,4,5,6: Communication error
0: Succcess
Finish
B246I905.WMF
7. Confirm that the @Remote Network Interface B818 modem is installed correctly:
User Tools> Printer Features> List/Test Print> Configuration Page
SM 1-193
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
-2391
-2393
-2394
-2395
-2396
-2397
-2398
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
Here is a list of error codes that may appear during Cumin installation.
Error Code
Illegal Modem Parameter Error
-11001
-11002
Chat parameter error
Chat execution error
Cause
Procedure or Setting Errors
-12002 @Remote Network Interface B818 device attempted to register itself at Remote Center without reference to @Remote Network
Interface B818 registration at Remote Center
-12003
-12004
Registration attempted without certification.
Installation attempted by inputting machine number with illegal certification or illegal ID2 illegal (05A).
-12005 Notification or registration done when transmission with the
Remote Center is disabled or with @Remote Network Interface
B818 set in illegal status.
-12006
-12007
Reference execution with Box registration completed.
Final registration executed with a number different from the request number.
-12008 Certification update failed because a job was in progress or for some other reason.
Errors Caused by GW Controller Response
-2385
-2387
When installation was attempted outside Japan, the Box Tel No included a domestic (Japan) dial up reference not applicable overseas.
Not supported at Remote Center.
Device registration duplicated
Basil unit not registered
Device not registered
Basil Box ID illegal
Basil Device ID illegal
ID2 format incompatible
Format of request number incompatible.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-194
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.11 USB HOST INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B825)
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
USB Host Interface Type A.......................................................... 1
Installation
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot B1 ( x2).
2. Install the USB host interface board [B] in
Slot B1 ( x2).
[A]
[B]
B825I101.WMF
SM 1-195
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.12 BROWSER UNIT TYPE B (B828)
Accessories
Description Q’ty
Browser Unit B828 SD Card ........................................................1
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
( x1).
3. Push the SD card [B] into Slot C3 .
4. Turn the machine on.
[A]
5. Push [User Tools].
6. Push [Login/Logout] on the operation panel
7. Login with the administrator user name and password.
8. Select "Extended Feature Settings".
9. Select "Extended Feature Settings" again.
10. Select "SD Card".
11. Select the "Browser" line.
[B]
B828I101.WMF
12. Under "Install to:" select Machine HDD" and select "Next."
13. When you see "Ready to Install" check the information on the screen to confirm your previous selection.
14. Select "OK". You will see "Installing…" then "Completed".
15. Select "Exit" twice to return to the copy screen.
16. Remove the SD card from the machine
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-196
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.13 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE C (B829)
Accessories
Description Q’ty
PCB IPU Option ...............................................................................1
Installation
If the present IPU board does not contain this application, it must be replaced with an IPU board that does.
B246 Series: IPU
1. Disconnect ADF cable
2. Remove:
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
3. Remove:
Screws ( x4) and swing open the controller box [B]
Left connector shield [B] ( x2).
Right connector [C] shield ( x4).
[A]
[C]
IPU board unit [D] ( x7, x2).
4. Slowly slide the IPU board and bracket out of the controller box.
5. Remove the [E] IPU ( x8
B829I101.WMF
SM
[D] [E]
B829I102.WMF
1-197
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
After Replacing the IPU Board
1. Switch the machine on.
2. Login in as the System Administrator.
3. Press [User Tools].
4. Select "System Settings".
5. Select "Administrator Tools".
6. Select next 2 or 3 times until you see "Data Security for Copying".
7. Select "ON".
8. Select "OK" to enable the setting.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-198
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 03/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
1.24.14 VM CARD TYPE C (B861)
Accessories
Description Q’ty
1. VM Card B861 SD Card.............................................................1
2. Decal.......................................................................................... 1
CAUTION: Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
IMPORTANT : Do not remove the SD card from slot 3 after installing the platform.
Installation
1. With the power OFF and the machine unplugged, remove the slot cover [A] from SD card slot 3 ( x 1).
2. Insert the VM-Card Type C [B] label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 3 until you hear a click.
[A]
3. Replace the sixth key-slot cover with the “Other function” key (part number
B2381576).
4. Plug in and turn ON the main power switch. The installation of the Java VM
[B]
B828I101.WMF platform will start automatically.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT turn the main power OFF. Also, do not open any of the covers or do any machine operations. This will damage the SD card. A damaged SD card cannot be repaired.
5. Wait five minutes, and then press the “Other function” key. You will hear two beeps.
If the screen does not change, this means the installation is not finished yet. Wait a few more minutes and then press the “Other function” key again.
When the installation is finished, the following will be displayed:
6. Set the heap size and stack size for the application. (In User Tools/Extended
Features setting, see the Administrator Tools tab.)
7. Install the application using the installation procedure provided with the application.
SM 1-199
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.15 IEEE1284 B679
Accessories
Description Q’ty
IEEE 1284 Centronics Board ....................................................... 1
NOTE 1:
Only one PCI slot ( B2 ) is available for use with one of these options:
• Centronics 1284
• IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
• IEEE 801.11b (Wireless LAN)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit B826
• @Remote Network Interface B818
NOTE 2:
If another card is installed in B2 , you must remove it before installing this card.
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B2 ( x 2).
3. Insert the 1284 Centronics board [B] into
Slot B2 and fasten it with the screws.
[A]
[B]
B679I101.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-200
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
1.24.16 GIGABIT ETHERNET G381
Accessories
Description Q’ty
8. Gigabit Ethernet B381............................................................1
9. Ferrite Core (not used for B234/B235/B236) .........................1
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
2. If the Ethernet & USB 2.0 card
[A] is installed in B3 , remove it
( x 2).
3. Insert the Gigabit Ethernet
Board [B] into Slot B3 and fasten it with the screws.
[A]
[B]
G381I101.WMF
4. Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the board.
User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page
SM 1-201
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
1.24.17 FAX OPTION TYPE 7500 (B819)
Rev. 01/2007
Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1. FCU 1
1
1
6. Screws (Blue M3 x 6)
1
1
9
7. Fax Connector Bracket
8. Super G3 Decal
9. Instructions
10. Telephone Cable (NA only)
11. FCU Power Harness
12. FCU Power Relay Harness (insulated)
13. Speaker
14. FCC Decal (NA Only)
15. Serial Number Decal
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
15
14
13
12
11
3
4
5
6
8
7
10
9
B819R101A.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-202
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
Installation Procedure
FCU Installation
CAUTION
Before installing this fax unit:
1) Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2) Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B819R102.WMF
1. Disconnect the ADF connector [A].
2. Remove the rear upper cover [B] ( x 2)
Slide down to remove.
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
3. Remove the rear lower cover [C] ( x 2)
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
SM 1-203
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 01/2007
[A]
4. Remove the controller box cover [A] ( x13).
B819R103.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-204
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
[A]
[C]
5. Remove the option board cover [A] ( x2).
6. Remove the option faceplate [C] ( x3).
7. Remove the cover plate [D] ( x1).
[B]
B819R104A.WMF
SM 1-205
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 01/2007
[A]
8. Attach the interface board [A] ( x3).
B819R105.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-206
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
[C]
[A]
[B]
B819R106.WMF
9. Remove the jumper [A] on the MBU and set it to the ON position.
Important : If the jumper remains at the OFF position this will cause SC672
(Controller Startup Error) to appear.
10. Attach the FCU [B] to the interface board ( x4).
11. Press on the "RICOH" logo at [C] to confirm that the MBU is securely mounted on the FCU.
SM 1-207
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 01/2007
[A]
[B]
B819R107.WMF
12. Attach the speaker [A] to the side of the controller box ( x2).
13. Connect the speaker harness [B] to CN605 on the FCU ( x1, x2).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-208
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
[D]
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
B819R108A.WMF
14. Reattach the option board cover [A] removed in Step 5 ( x2).
15. Reattach the option faceplate [B] removed in Step 6 ( x3).
16. Attach the fax connector bracket [C] ( x1).
NOTE : Make sure that the protective sleeves [D] and [E] are attached properly.
SM 1-209
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 01/2007
[A]
[C]
[B]
B819R109.WMF
17. Connect the small end of the FCU power harness [A] to CN323 .
18. Set the large end of the harness [B] into the vertical cutout [C].
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-210
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
[A]
[B]
B819R110.WMF [C]
19. Remove the screws of the controller box [A] then open it ( x4).
20. Connect one end of the FCU power relay harness [B] to CN121 on the PSU
( x1).
21. Connect the other end of the FCU power relay harness [C] to the harness connector set in the vertical cutout at (the connector set in Step 18) ( x1,
x1).
SM 1-211
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
[A]
Rev. 01/2007
[B]
B819R111A.WMF
22. Remove the blank keytop [A] (5th from the top) and replace it with one of the keytops provided [B] (either the "Facsimile" keytop or the fax symbol keytop).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-212
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
B819R112A.WMF
23. Attach the "Super G3" decal to the front door.
24. Attach the FCC and serial number decals to the rear cover of the machine..
NOTE: The FCC decal is for the U.S. and Canada only.
SM 1-213
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
Line Connection and Check
[B]
Rev. 01/2007
[A]
B819R113.WMF
1. Loop one end of the telephone cable [A] once, then enclose it with the ferrite core [B] as shown.
NOTE : Attach the ferrite core at least 9 cm (3.5 in.) from the connector.
[A] TEL
LINE
B819R114.WMF
2. Insert the end of the telephone cable [A] with the ferrite core into the "LINE" RJ-
11 connector.
3. Reattach all covers and the ADF cable.
4. Connect the machine power cord to the power supply, then switch the main power switch.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-214
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
5. Go into the SP mode and confirm that the fax SP codes are enabled.
Push [Reset], enter "107", then hold down "Clear/Reset" for at least 3 sec.
At the initial screen, confirm that "Fax SP" is displayed. This indicates that the machine recognizes the fax unit.
6. Confirm that the date and time setting are correct.
Push [User Tools] then touch "System Settings"> "Timer Settings"> "Set Date" and "Set Time".
IMPORTANT: To enable Fax Option Type 7500, the following firmware must be installed:
System firmware (v2.04 or later)
Fax firmware (v3.00 or later) and
LCDC firmware (v1.19 or later).
SM 1-215
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
⇒
1.24.18 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 7500 (B820)
Rev. 01/2007
Component check
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1. G3 Interface Board (attached)
2. G3 Interface Unit *
1
1
3. CCU Drive Board 1
1
5. Screws (Blue M3 x 6)
6. G3 Connector Bracket
5
1
7. FFC (Flat Film Connector)
8. Telephone Cable (NA Only)
9. FCC Decal (NA Only)
1
1
1
* 1 One additional G3 interface unit (ordered separately) can be mounted in the open slot of the G3 interface board.
2
1
1
3
4
9
8
7
6
B820R101A.WMF
5
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-216
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
Installation Procedure
G3 Board Installation
CAUTION
Before installing this optional unit,
1) Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B820R102.WMF
1. Disconnect the ADF connector [A].
2. Remove the rear upper cover [B] ( x 2)
Slide down to remove.
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
3. Remove the rear lower cover [C] ( x 2)
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
SM 1-217
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 01/2007
[A]
4. Remove the controller box cover [A] ( x13).
B820R103.WMF
[A]
2
1 1
B820R106.WMF
5. If installing single-line G3, remove only one blind cover .
-or-
If installing dual-line G3, remove two blind covers and .
NOTE : Make sure the protective sleeve [A] is attached properly.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-218
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
[C]
[A]
[B]
B820R105.WMF
6. Connect the FFC [A] (Flat Film Connector) to the CCU drive board [B].
Important : Connect the FFC with the green, insulated side visible and the bare connector strip down so it touches the connector strip of the board.
7. Attach the CCU drive board [B] to the machine
Set the hook of the bracket into the slot in the frame.
Fasten the CCU drive board with the screws ( x2).
8. Connect the other end of the FFC [C] to the FCU.
Important : Connect the FFC with the green, insulated visble and the bare connector strip down so it touches the connector strip of the board.
SM 1-219
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES Rev. 01/2007
B820R106.WMF
9. Attach the connector bracket to the G3 expansion board ( x1).
10. If one G3 line is being installed, attach the connector bracket as shown on the left..
-or-
If two G3 lines are being installed, attach the connector brackets , as shown on the right.
B820R107.WMF
11. If only one G3 line is being installed, go to the next step.
-or-
If two lines are being installed, insert the 2nd G3 board [A] into the empty slot of the interface unit and fasten it ( x2).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-220
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
B820R108.WMF B820R109.WMF
12. Attach the G3 interface unit ( x3)
NOTE : The illustration on the left shows the single G3 board installation and the illustration on the right shows the dual G3 board installation.
B820R110.WMF B820R111.WMF
13. Connect the CCUIF harness to the CCU drive board and CCU I/F .
NOTE : The illustration on the left shows the single G3 board installation and the illustration on the right shows the dual G3 board installation.
14. Reinstall all covers and reconnect the ADF cable.
15. Attach the FCC decal to the rear cover of the machine.
SM 1-221
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
Line Connection and Settings
[B]
Rev. 01/2007
[A]
1. Loop one end of the telephone cable [A] once, then enclose it with the ferrite core [B] as shown.
NOTE:
Attach the ferrite core at least 9 cm (3.5 in.) from the connector.
Attach a ferrite core to the 2nd G3 line if two G3 boards are installed.
2. Connect the telephone cable to "LINE 2" jack.
-or-
If dual G3 boards are installed connect the cables to "LINE 2" and "LINE 3" jacks.
3. Connect the machine power cord to the power supply, then switch on the main power switch.
4. Enter the Service Mode.
Push [Reset], enter "107", then hold down "Clear/Reset" for at least 3 sec.
Touch "Fax SP"
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
1-222
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 01/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
MFP OPTIONS: B246/D052 SERIES
5. Do these communication switch settings:
SP1104-23 (Switch 16) Set Bit 1 "1".
Set Bit 3 "1" if two G3 boards are installed.
6. Exit the Service Mode and cycle the machine off/on with the main power switch.
7. Do SP5990-001 to print the system parameter list, then confirm that "G3" is listed as an option.
8. Enter the Service Mode and set the items required for PSTN communication.
If one G3 line is installed, use SP3103 (PSTN-1 Port Settings) to do the PSTN settings.
If two G3 lines are installed, use SP3103 (PSTN-1 Port Settings) and SP3104
(PSTN-2 Port Settings) to do the PSTN settings for the first and second G3 line.
SM 1-223
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
2.1 PM TABLES
The intervals noted here (K=1,000) as PM intervals indicate the number of prints or copies, unless stated otherwise. These numbers are based on the PM counter.
Symbol key: C : Clean, R : Replace, L : Lubricate, I : Inspect,
EM : Emergency Maintenance
WARNING
Turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
2.1.1 MAIN MACHINE
SCANNER OPTICS
1st, 2nd, 3rd Mirror
Exposure Glass
Scanner Guide Rails
C
C
C
L
C
C
L
C
C
L
Note
Optics cloth
Dry cloth or alcohol
After cleaning with alcohol, lubricate scanner guide rails with Launa Oil.
Shield C C C C cloth
Reflector C C C Optics
AROUND THE DRUM
Charge Corona Grid
Charge Corona Wire
Charge Wire Cleaning
Pad
Cleaning Blade
Cleaning Brush
Charge Corona Casing
C
R
R
450
450
Blower brush.
Note
R
R
R R 450
Alcohol, or clean damp cloth.
R
R
R
R
500
500
C C Alcohol, or clean damp cloth.
C C C Blower
ID Sensor
Pick-off Pawls
C C C
I I
Blower brush. Perform SP 3001
002 after cleaning.
Replace if necessary.
C C C Blower
Transfer Entrance Stay
Ozone Filter (Top)
C C C Dry
C
R
C C
R
Dry cloth.
Cleaning Filter
Cleaning Side Seal
Cleaning Entrance Seal
R
C
C
C
C
R
C
C
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth.
SM 2-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Development Roller
Shaft
Development Roller
Development Filter
Development Sleeve
Surface
Entrance Seal
Side Seals
Toner Bottle Holder
Paddle Roller Shaft
Used Toner Separation
Unit
PAPER FEED
Note
R 3.7.1) PM cycle is 350K.
C C
C
R I
C
R
Clean with blower brush and dry cloth every time the developer is replaced.
Blower brush.
C C C
Dry cloth.
C C C Blower
C
C
C
C
C
C
Blower brush, dry cloth.
Blower brush, dry cloth.
C
C
C
C
C
C
I R
Dry cloth.
Blower brush, dry cloth.
Registration Rollers
Relay Rollers
C
C
C
C
Dust C C C
Registration Sensor
Relay Sensor
By-pass Paper End
Sensor
Grip Rollers
Paper Feed Guide
Plate
Vertical Transport
Rollers
Paper Feed Sensors
Paper End Sensors
C
C
C
C
C
C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C C
Alcohol
Alcohol
Blower brush
Blower brush
Dry cloth, blower brush
Dry cloth, blower brush
Dry cloth
Alcohol
Blower brush
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
2-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008 PM TABLES
PAPER FEED B064 Series
Feed Rollers
Pick-up Rollers
Separation Rollers
By-pass Feed Rollers
By-pass Pick-up Rollers
By-pass Separation
Rollers
R R 450K
NOTE below this table.
R
R
R
R
450K
450K
See NOTE below this table.
R R 450K
PAPER FEED B140/B246 Series
R 1000K NOTE below this
Pick-up table.
By-pass Feed Rollers
By-pass Pick-up Rollers
By-pass Separation
Rollers
NOTES
R
R
R
1000K
1000K
1000K
See NOTE table.
below this
• Always replace pick-up, feed and separation rollers as a set.
• If the copier is a B064 Series machine, check the counter value for each paper tray station with
SP7204 (Copy Counter – Paper Trays). If the value has reached 300K, replace the rollers.
• The quality of the paper can have an effect on the service life of the rollers. Paper with a rough surface, for example, can increase abrasion on the rollers and decrease their service life. After replacing the rollers, reset the counter with SP7816 (Copy Counter Reset).
• If the feeding from the by-pass tray causes frequent jams, and the by-pass tray is not used regularly, check the by-pass tray rollers. If pick-up, feed, and separation rollers for the by-pass tray are of lighter color than those of more frequently used trays, replace them.
⇒
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
Transfer Belt
Transfer Roller Cleaning
Blade
Note
C R C 750
Use dry cloth to clean transfer belt. Always replace transfer belt and transfer roller cleaning blade together.
NOTE : The expected service
Transfer Entrance Guide
Plate
Transfer Drive Roller
Transfer Drum Roller
Transfer Bias Roller
Transfer Exit Guide Plate
Discharge Plate
C C
C
C
C
C
R
C
C
C
C
R
750K. However, replacement is recommended where more paper dust is present due to low quality paper.
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
SM 2-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
FUSING UNIT AND PAPER EXIT
Replace roller and bushings together.
Note
Cleaning Web
Cleaning Web Pressure
Roller
Cleaning Web Pressure
Roller Bearings
De-Curler Rollers
Exit Rollers
Exit Static Discharge
Brush
Fusing Entrance Guide
Plate
R
R
R
C
C
R
C
C
I I
C C
Alcohol
Alcohol
Dry cloth.
Fusing Exit Guide Plate
Hot Roller
Hot Roller Bearings
Hot Roller Strippers
Thermistors x2
C
R
R
R
R
C
R
600
1000
600
Dry cloth.
Pressure Cleaning Roller
Pressure Cleaning Roller
Bearings
R R
R I R
Pressure Cleaning Roller
Spring Plate
Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller Bearings
I I
Replace as a set.
R R 600 B140/B246/D052 Series : “R”
R R 600 at 300K
B064 Series : “R” at 500K
Always replace pressure roller and bearings together.
R I
B140/B246/D052 Series : “R” at 300K
B064 Series : “I” at 500K
Transport Rollers C C Alcohol
I I I
DUPLEX
Inverter Exit Rollers
Transport Rollers
Reverse Trigger Rollers
Inverter Entrance Roller
Entrance Anti-Static
Brush
Reverse Junction Gate
Note
C C C Blower
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C C
Alcohol
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Blower brush
C C C Dry cloth
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
2-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
ADF
The PM interval is for the number of originals that have been fed.
C R R R
C R R R
C R R R
Note
Water or alcohol, belt cleaner to clean paper feed belt.
Replace these items together.
Sensors
Platen Cover Sheet
C C C Dry
C C C Dry
C C C C Blower brush.
C C C C Water or alcohol
L L L Grease
C C C
C C C
Water or alcohol
C C C
Pre-Scanning C C C
C C C
C C C
2.1.2 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES
LCT (Large Capacity Tray) B473
ROLLRES
EM K Note
Pick-up Roller
Feed Roller
R
R
See NOTE below this table.
Separation Roller R
NOTE: Replace pick-up, feed and separation rollers as a set. If the copier is a machine of the B064 Series, check the counter value for each paper tray station with SP7204 (Copy Counter – Paper Trays). If the value has reached 300K, replace the rollers. After replacing the rollers, reset the counter with SP7816 (Copy Counter Reset).
Cover Interposer Tray B470
The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed.
Separation Roller
Bushings
Sensors
Feed Drive Gear
R R R
R R R
C C C
C C C
L Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
L Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
SM 2-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
3000-Sheet Finisher with 50-sheet stapler and Saddle-Stitching
B468/B469/B674
EM 300K 450K 600K Note
Bushings
Sensors
C C C
C C C
L Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
3000-Sheet Finisher B478/B706
Bushings
Sensors
Note
I I I
I I I
I I I Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
Staple waste hopper C
Z-Folding Unit Type 2105 (B660)
Drive Rollers
Idle Rollers
Anti-Static Brush
C
C
C
C C Empty staple waste.
Note
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth.
Dry cloth. Replace every 1000 K.
Note : The circuit breaker on the Z-Folding Unit B660 should be tested every
2,400K. However, since this interval exceeds the expected life of the machine, it is unlikely you will ever have to test this circuit breaker.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
2-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2000/3000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700/B701
3000K EM Note
FINISHER
Covers
Drive Rollers
Idle Rollers
Anti-Static Brush
Sensors
Corner Stapler R
I,C
C
C
C
Alcohol or water, dry cloth
Damp cloth, dry cloth
Damp cloth, dry cloth
Dry cloth
Booklet Stapler R
Print an SMC report with
SP5990 . Replace the unit if the staple count is 500K.
Print an SMC report with
SP5990 . Replace the unit if the staple count is 200K.
Punch B702
PUNCH
Punch Waste Hopper
Punch Unit
300K 2400K 3000K 4000K EM
Replace after 1000k punches.
2.2 RELATED SP CODES
This is a list of the PM related SP codes. For details, refer to Section “5 Service
Tables”.
7803* PM Counter Display
7804* PM Counter Reset
Displays the PM count since the last PM.
Resets the PM count.
Ensure that you reset the PM counter via SP7804 at the completion of each
PM
SM 2-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
Do not turn off either of the power switches while any of the electrical components are active. Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum, and development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the copier.
3.1.1 DRUM
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drum is more sensitive to light and ammonia gas than a selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a minute.
3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. If the drum surface is touched with bare hands or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton. Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; Alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
6. Take care not to scratch the drum, as the drum layer is thin and is easily damaged.
7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when the drum unit, or the drum itself is out of the copier. Doing so avoids exposing it to bright light or direct sunlight, and will protect it from light fatigue.
9. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.
10. When installing a new drum, execute SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
3.1.2 DRUM UNIT
1. Before pulling out the drum unit, place a sheet of paper under the drum unit to catch any spilt toner.
2. Make sure that the drum unit is set in position and the drum stay is secured with a screw before the main switch is turned on. If the drum unit is loose, poor contact of the drum connectors may cause electrical noise, resulting in unexpected malfunctions (RAM data change or corruption would be the worst case scenario).
3. To prevent drum scratches, remove the development unit before removing the drum unit.
SM 3-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
GENERAL CAUTIONS
3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged.
3. Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all of the rollers and the inner part of the transfer belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.
3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT
1. When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the white paint is at the rear left corner.
2. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or glass cleaner to reduce the amount of static electricity on the glass surface.
3. Use a cotton pad with water or a blower brush to clean the mirrors and lens.
4. Do not bend or crease the exposure lamp flat cable.
5. Do not disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and the copy image out of focus.
6. Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws. Doing so will throw the CCD out of position.
3.1.5 LASER UNIT
1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. Doing so will throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit. They are adjusted in the factory and cannot be accurately reset in the field.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open the optical housing unit.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, perform the laser beam pitch adjustment. Failure to do so will result in an SC code being generated.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.1.6 CHARGE CORONA
1. Clean the corona wires with a dry cloth. Do not use sandpaper or solvent.
2. Clean the charge corona casing with water first to remove NOx based compounds. Then clean it with alcohol if any toner still remains on the casing.
3. Clean the end block with a blower brush first to remove toner and paper dust.
Then clean with alcohol if any toner still remains.
4. Do not touch the corona wires with bare hands. Oil stains from fingers may cause uneven image density on copies.
5. Make sure that the wires are correctly positioned between the cleaner pads and that there is no foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing.
6. When installing new corona wires, do not bend or scratch the wire surface.
Doing so may cause uneven charge. Also be sure that the corona wires are correctly positioned in the end blocks.
7. Clean the grid plate with a blower brush only (not with a dry cloth).
8. Do not touch the charge grid plate with bare hands. Also, do not bend the charge grid plate or make any dent in it. Doing so may cause uneven charge.
3.1.7 DEVELOPMENT
1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller.
2. Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from the copier.
3. Never disassemble the development roller assembly. The position of the doctor plate is set with special tools and instruments at the factory to ensure the proper gap between the doctor blade and the development roller.
4. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
5. Dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations.
6. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than specified for this model. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner scattering.
7. Immediately after installing new developer, the TD sensor initial setting procedure should be performed with SP2801 (TD Sensor Initialization) to avoid damage to the copier. Do not perform the TD sensor initial setting with used developer. Do not make any copies before doing the TD sensor initial setting.
8. When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing, always ground the casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor with static electricity.
9. When replacing the TD sensor, replace the developer, then execute SP2801
(TD Sensor Initialization) and SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
SM 3-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
GENERAL CAUTIONS
3.1.8 CLEANING
1. When servicing the cleaning section, be careful not to damage the edge of the cleaning blade.
2. Do not touch the cleaning blade with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling the cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to catch any toner falling from it.
3.1.9 FUSING UNIT
1. After installing the fusing thermistor, make sure that it is in contact with the hot roller and that it is movable.
2. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their tension springs.
3. Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with bare hands.
4. Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch the inner surface of the hot roller.
3.1.10 PAPER FEED
1. Do not touch the surface of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fence of the paper tray must be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.
3.1.11 USED TONER
1. We recommend checking the amount of used toner at every EM.
2. Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations.
3. Never throw toner into an open flame. Toner dust is flammable and may ignite.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part No. Description
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs./set)
A2929500 Test Chart – S5S (10 pcs./set)
VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE 187
VSST9500 Test Chart – S5S – DF (10 Sheets/Set)
N8036701 Flash Memory Card – 4 MB (B064)
G0219350 Loop Back Connector
B6455090 SD (Secure Digital) Card – 64 MB (B140/B246/D052)
B6456700 PCMCIA Card Adapter
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part No. Description
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – JFE 5 5/2
52039502 Silicon Grease G-501
SM 3-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS
3.3 OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS
3.3.1 OPERATION PANEL
[A]
[B]
[A]: Shoulder screws ( x 2)
[B]: Operation panel ( x 1)
3.3.2 FRONT DOOR
B246R901.WMF
[A]
[B]
B246R902.WMF
While supporting the front door [A] with one hand, press down on the hinge bracket
[B] then raise the door slightly to remove it.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
3.3.3 RIGHT COVERS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS
[C]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[D]
B246R903.WMF
1. LCT entrance guide cover [A] ( x 2)
2. Right upper cover [B] ( x 2)
• To remove the right cover, remove the LCT entrance guide plate, open the by-pass tray, then slide the right upper cover down to remove it.
• When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that 1) the tabs
[C] on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine, and 2) the catches on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
3. Lower right cover [D] ( x 2)
• After removing the screws, slide the cover down to remove it.
• When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs [E] on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine.
SM 3-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS
3.3.4 LEFT COVERS
[A]
[B]
B246R904.WMF
[A]: Left upper cover ( x 2)
• Slide down to remove.
• When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that 1) the tabs on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine, and 2) the catches on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
[B]: Left lower cover ( x 2)
• Slide down to remove.
• When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
3.3.5 REAR COVERS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS
[A]
[B]
[C]
B246R905.WMF
[A]: Disconnect the ADF plug.
[B]: Rear upper cover ( x 2)
• Slide down to remove.
• When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
[C]: Rear lower cover ( x 2)
• When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws.
SM 3-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SCANNER
3.4 SCANNER
3.4.1 ADF AND TOP COVERS
ADF
[D]
[A]
B246R906.WMF
[C]
[B]
[E] [E]
B246R907.WMF
Rear upper cover. ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Cable bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Controller/IPU panel ( x 2)
• Swing open the panel so you can see the back.
[C]: Connector cover ( x 2)
[D]: Connector (2nd from the top) ( x 1)
[E]: ADF base left and right plates ( x 2)
• While holding the ADF firmly, slide the ADF back and lift the large end of the keyholes over the shoulder screws.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Top Covers
[D]
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
[C]
SCANNER
B246R908.WMF
ADF ( 3.4.1)
[A]: Top inside cover ( x 2)
[B]: Top left cover ( x 1)
[C]: Top right cover ( x 1)
[D]: Operation panel ( x 1) ( 3.3.1)
SM 3-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SCANNER
3.4.2 EXPOSURE GLASS
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
B246R909.WMF
[A]: Rear scale ( x 3)
[B]: Left cover ( x 3)
[C]: ADF exposure glass
[D]: Exposure glass
NOTE: Lift out the exposure glass and left scale together. The left scale is permanently attached to the exposure glass with double-sided tape. Do not remove the left scale from the exposure glass.
When re-installing the exposure glass:
• Position the exposure glass first. Make sure that the arrow (white) mark is in the upper left corner.
• When re-installing the left cover, make sure it is seated correctly.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.4.3 SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS
[A]
[B]
SCANNER
B246R910.WMF
Exposure glass ( 3.4.2)
[A]: Original length sensor ( x 1, x 1)
NOTE: In North America, two length sensors are provided.
[B]: Original width sensor ( x 1, x 1)
SM 3-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SCANNER
3.4.4 LENS BLOCK
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B246R911.WMF
B246R912.WMF
Exposure glass ( 3.4.2)
Operation panel ( x 1) ( 3.3.1)
[A]: Top right cover ( x 1)
[B]: Right upper stay ( x 2)
[C]: Lens cover ( x 2)
[D]: Lens block ( x 2, x 3)
NOTE: To avoid damaging the lens block, never set it down on the side with the PCB; turn it over with the PCB up.
Re-assemble the machine, then perform the scanner and printer adjustments.
( 3.14)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.4.5 EXPOSURE LAMP
[D]
[B]
SCANNER
[A]
[C]
B246R913.WMF
Exposure glass ( 3.4.2)
Operation panel ( 3.3.1)
Push the 1st scanner [A] to the cutout [B] in the scanner frame.
[C]: Exposure lamp cover ( x 2)
[D]: Exposure lamp ( x 3, x 1)
NOTE: Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers.
SM 3-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SCANNER
3.4.6 LAMP REGULATOR
[A]
[B]
[C]
B246R914.WMF
Operation panel ( 3.3.1)
Exposure glass ( 3.4.2)
Exposure lamp cover and exposure lamp ( 3.4.5)
[A]: Metal strip reflector
NOTE: Avoid touching the surface of the reflector and do not bend it.
[B]: Lamp regulator ribbon connector
[C]: Lamp regulator ( x 4, x 1)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.4.7 SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD (SDRB)
SCANNER
[A]
Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Scanner motor drive board ( x 3, x 3)
B246R915.WMF
SM 3-17
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SCANNER
3.4.8 SCANNER MOTOR
B246R916.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B246R917.WMF
[F]
B246R918.WMF
Right upper cover ( 3.3.3)
Controller/IPU panel door
Flywheel ( x 3)
[A]: Drum cooling fan ( x 1, x 1)
[B]: Charge power pack cooling fan ( x 2, x 1)
[C]: Exhaust fan ( x 1, x 1)
[D]: Development power pack ( x 2, x 3)
[E]: Vent ( x 2)
[F]: Scanner motor ( x 1, harnesses x 2, x 3, timing belt x 1)
Re-assemble the scanner, then do the scanner and printer adjustments. ( 3.14)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.4.9 SCANNER HP SENSOR
[B]
[A]
SCANNER
Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Sensor bracket and leaf ( x 1)
[B]: Scanner HP sensor ( x 1)
B246R919.WMF
SM 3-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SCANNER
3.4.10 SCANNER WIRE REPLACEMENT
Preparation for Removal
[B]
[C]
[A]
B246R920.WMF [D]
[E]
[F]
ADF and top covers ( 3.4.1)
Operation panel ( x 1) ( 3.3.1)
[A]: Scanner unit external cover ( x 4, x 1)
[B]: Left stay ( x 5)
[C]: Right stay ( x 5)
[D]: ADF upper support frame ( x 8)
[E]: Lower support frame ( x 6)
[F]: Scanner unit front panel ( x 6)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-20
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B246R921.WMF
SM
Wire Removal: Back
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[D]
[A]
SCANNER
[B]
[C]
[A]: Drive pulley ( x 1)
[B]: Timing belt
[C]: Tension bracket ( x 1, spring x 1)
[D]: Rear wire pulley ( x 1) and rear scanner wire
B246R922.WMF
SM 3-21
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SCANNER
Wire Removal: Front
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[B]
[C]
[A]
B246R923.WMF
[A]: Tension bracket ( x 1, spring x 1)
[B]: Front wire pulley ( x 1)
• Remove the screw. While pulling back on the drive shaft, remove the pulley shaft.
[C]: Scanner wire
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-22
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Attaching the New Wire
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[C]
[A]
[E]
SCANNER
[D]
B246R924.WMF
[B]
B246R925.WMF
1. While paying attention to the direction of the wire (the leading bead), thread the wire [A] through the pulley, wrap the wire on the pulley, then apply tape to hold it in place.
• Wind the wire on the bead side [B] clockwise 6 times, and the ring side 2 times as shown ( ).
2. Set the pulley with the taped wire on the scanner drive shaft.
3. Position the 1st scanner with the positioning pins, part number A0069104 ([A] on the next page).
4. Wind the end of the wire with the bead [C] as shown ( ).
5. Wind the ring-end of the wire around the pulley [D], install the tension bracket
[E] , then tighten the screw slightly to temporarily lock the wire to the bracket
( ).
SM 3-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SCANNER
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
[B]
B246R926.WMF
6. Attach the 1st scanner bracket [B].
7. Tighten the screw on the tension bracket ([E] previous page).
8. Remove the positioning pins. Hold the center of the 1st scanner then move it gently left and right to make sure that the wire is seated and positioned correctly.
9. Insert the positioning pins again, then loosen the following screws: 2nd scanner inner screws, 1st scanner bracket screws, tension bracket screw.
10. With the pulley facing directly up, tighten the screws again to fix the pulley in place.
11. Re-assemble the scanner, then perform the scanner and printer adjustments.
( 3.14)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.4.11 SCANNER HEATER
[B]
[C]
[A]
SCANNER
B246R928.WMF
[D]
B246R927.WMF
Exposure glass ( 3.4.2)
Operation panel ( 3.3.1)
[A]: Scanning glass plate ( x 4).
[B]: Scanner heater ( x 2).
[C]: Fasten the cable with the harness clamp.
[D]: Fasten the connector on the left side of the machine ( x 1).
SM 3-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.5 LASER UNIT
WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing any procedure in this section. Laser beams can cause serious damage to eyes.
WARNING
• This laser unit uses four laser beams produced by a Class III LDA with a wavelength of 788 nm and intensity of 10 mW (13.2 mW for the B246
Series). Direct exposure to the eyes could cause permanent blindness.
• Before performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit, press the main power switch to power the machine off. Then unplug the machine from the power source. Allow the machine to cool for a few minutes. The polygon motor continues to rotate for about one to three minutes.
• Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: 1)
LD unit, 2) polygon motor cover, 3) synchronization detector.
3.5.1 CAUTION DECALS
B246R929.WMF
B246R930.WMF
Two caution decals are provided for the laser section.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.5.2 LD UNIT AND POLYGON MOTOR
[A]: LD unit cover ( x 4)
[B]: Harness connector
[C]: Polygon motor cover ( x 4)
[A]
[C]
B246R931.WMF
[B]
CAUTION
• Any accidental static discharge could damage the LDB (Laser Diode
Board). Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
• The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after switching the machine off. To avoid damaging the motor, never remove the polygon motor within three minutes of switching off the main power and disconnecting the power plug.
[D]: LDB connectors ( x 6)
[E]: LD unit ( x 2)
[F]: Polygon motor ( x 3, x 2)
• Follow this procedure in reverse order to install the new LD unit or polygon motor.
[D]
[E]
[F]
B246R932.WMF
CAUTION
Before fastening the polygon motor in place ( x 3, x 2), make sure that the glass panel of the laser port is facing to the right (toward the mirrors in the optical path).
SM 3-27
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
SP Adjustments
1. Execute SP2962 (Automatic Adjustment of Drum Conditions) after replacing the LD unit, but only if SP3901 – Auto Process Control – is on.
2. Read the label [A] attached to the LD unit [B]. Execute SP2115 (Main Scan
Beam Pitch Adjustment) and enter the numbers printed on the label.
[A]
[B]
B246R933.WMF
• The first line on the label is the machine number.
• The second line on the label includes three numbers separated by slashes.
Reading from left to right, these are the correct settings for SP2115 (Main
Scan Beam Pitch Adjustment) 001, 002, and 003.
• Do not remove this label, and make sure it is flat against the side of the LD unit.
3. Perform the scanner and printer adjustments. ( 3.14)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-28
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.5.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B246R934.WMF
Remove the right side cover ( x 2)
NOTE: If the optional LCT is installed, disconnect it ( x 1).
[A]: Development unit fans ( x 4, x 1)
[B]: Synchronization detector ( x 1, x 1)
After replacement, set SP1002-001~007 (Side-to-Side Registration) to the defaults.
SM 3-29
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.5.4 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT
WARNING
If you have just disassembled the LD unit, to avoid serious damage to the eyes from accidental exposure to laser beams you must confirm that the machine has been re-assembled completely before operation.
This adjustment corrects the parallelogram pattern to the desired rectangular pattern for printing; It does not correct the skew of scanned images.
1. Execute SP2902-003 (Test Pattern – Printing Test Pattern) 018 to print the A4
LEF pattern. Check the printed patterns and estimate the angle of adjustment required.
2. Remove the exposure glass ( 3.4.2).
3. Remove the LD unit cover and polygon motor cover ( 3.5.2).
4. Remove the right cover ( 3.3.3).
5. Loosen the screws of the laser exposure unit ( x 3).
[B]
[A]
B246R935.WMF
6. While watching the scale [A], use a flathead screwdriver [B] to move the laser exposure unit left or right to adjust the position of the unit.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-30
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1 mm
[A]
LASER UNIT
[B]
B246R936.WMF
7. Adjust the position of the laser exposure unit.
• If the pattern is skewed at the corner of the leading edge [A], move the unit so it moves the pointer on the scale toward the back.
• If the pattern is skewed at the lower left corner of the trailing edge [B], move the unit so it moves the pointer on the scale toward the front.
NOTE: The scale is set for increments of 1 mm.
8. After adjustment, tighten the screws on the laser exposure unit, re-assemble the machine and print the pattern again with SP2902-003 No.18.
9. Check the pattern. Repeat the procedure if more adjustment is required.
SM 3-31
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
3.6 DRUM UNIT
3.6.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL
Removal
[E]
B246R938.WMF
[A]
[B]
[F]
[G]
[C]
[D]
B246R937.WMF
[H]
B246R939.WMF
[A]: Shutter cover ( x 1).
[B]: Lock screw
[C]: Toner bottle.
• Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the toner bottle holder to the right.
[D]: Face plate (knob x 1, x 2)
NOTE: After re-installation, the tab [E] should be behind the stay and its pin below should be in the open track below.
[F]: Close the supply pipe shutter
[G]: Development unit ( x 2 [H])
• Allow the unit to slip to the right, then slowly pull it out of the machine.
NOTE: If the LCT is installed, you may need to disconnect it so the front door can open far enough to allow removal of the development unit.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-32
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
Re-installation
When re-inserting the development unit, engage the plate on the front of the development unit with the silver pin [A] inside the machine, then slide it to the left the drum.
toward
If the unit is installed correctly, you should see the pin above the plate, and the plate should be flat against the front of the development unit.
If the development unit will not move past the pin, the couplings are not aligned correctly at the back of the machine. Turn the gear on the front of the developer unit until the couplings engage at the rear of the machine.
Before closing the front door, make sure that the pipe line shutter is rotated down to the open position.
[A]
B246R940.WMF
Replacement with a used Development Unit
When using a development unit from another machine for test purposes, execute the following procedure:
1. Check the value of SP2220 (Vref Manual Setting) in both the machine containing the test unit and the machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, then input the V
REF
for this unit into SP2220.
3. After the test, reinstall the old development unit, and change SP2220 back to the original value.
SM 3-33
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
3.6.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT
Development unit ( 3.6.1)
[A]: Charge corona unit ( x 1, x 1)
B246R941.WMF
[A]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-34
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND GRID
[A]
DRUM UNIT
[C]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B246R942.WMF
[B]
[D]
B246R943.WMF
Charge corona unit ( 3.6.1)
[A]: Grid ( x 1)
[B]: Front bracket
[C]: Rear bracket
[D]: Front block cover
[E]: Rear block cover
[F]: Corona wire
• Disconnect the wire behind the grid bracket.
NOTE: 1) Never touch the charge corona wire with bare hands. Always protect it from dust, oil, etc.
2) Never bend or knot the wire. Charge will not distribute evenly on a bent wire.
3) Make sure that the wire seam [G] is as close as possible to the wire hook at the rear.
4) At the front and back, make sure that the wire is threaded correctly into the grooves in the end blocks.
5) After replacing the charge corona wire, make sure that the wire cleaner pads are engaged correctly with the wires.
6) After replacing the wire, set SP2001-001 (Charge Roller Bias
Adjustment – Applied Voltage for Image Processing) to the default.
SM 3-35
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANING PADS
[A]
Charge corona unit ( 3.6.2)
Charge corona wire and grid ( 3.6.3)
[A]: Cleaning pad ( x 1)
B246R944.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-36
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.6.5 OPC DRUM REMOVAL
DRUM UNIT
[B]
[A]
B246R945.WMF
B246R946.WMF
Development unit ( 3.6.1)
Charge corona unit ( 3.6.2)
[A]: Drum unit ( x 1, x 1)
• Grasp the drum unit by the knob to remove it from the machine.
[B]: OPC drum
After replacing the drum, do the following SPs:
• Set SP2001-001 (Charge Corona Bias Adjustment – Applied Voltage for
Image Processing) to the default setting.
• SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions), only if SP3901 (Auto Process
Control) is on.
NOTE: 1) To avoid fingerprints on the surface of the OPC drum, never touch the surface of the drum with bare fingers.
2) Never use alcohol to clean the surface of the OPC drum. Blow dry the
OPC drum, then wipe clean with a clean, slightly damp cloth.
3) Before installing a new drum, dust the surface of the OPC drum carefully with setting powder. For more, see next page.
SM 3-37
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
Dusting the Drum Surface
The surface of the drum is less smooth, so you must apply Drum Setting Powder
(P/N: 54429101) to the drum surface before installation.
Important!: Failure to apply the drum powder before installation could damage the drum cleaning blade or scour the drum surface .
[A]
[C]
[B]
[F]
B246R947.WMF
[E]
[D]
B246R948.WMF
1. Apply the setting powder by tapping the powder bag [A] across the surface of the drum [B].
2. Cover the entire length of the drum over a 45-90 degree portion [C] (about 1/4 of the total drum surface). Apply enough powder so the area turns white.
NOTE: If setting powder is not available, use waste toner instead of drum setting powder. Be aware, however, that this could cause dirty background on the first few copies.
3. Install the new drum in the OPC unit so that the powdered surface [D] faces the cleaning blade [E].
4. Rotate the drum once clockwise [F] until it stops again at the same position.
Important: Never rotate the drum counter-clockwise .
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-38
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.6.6 PTL (B140/B246/D052 SERIES ONLY)
[A]
[B]
DRUM UNIT
[C]
B246R949.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)
[A]: PTL bracket ( x 2)
[B]: PTL ( x 1)
Reinstallation
• The shoulder screw [C] must be attached again at its initial location.
SM 3-39
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
3.6.7 QUENCHING LAMP
[A]
B246R950.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)
[A]: Quenching lamp ( x 1)
• At the center, push back the hook to release the quenching lamp.
NOTE: Use only a blower brush to clean the quenching lamp.
3.6.8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
[A]
B246R951.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)
[A]: Drum potential sensor ( x 2, x 1)
NOTE: If Auto Process Control is set to “on” (SP3901), perform SP2962
(Adjustment of Drum Conditions) after replacing the drum potential sensor.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-40
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.6.9 CLEANING FILTER
[A]
DRUM UNIT
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)
[A]: Cleaning filter
3.6.10 CLEANING BLADE
[A]
B246R952.WMF
B246R953.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)
[A]: Drum cleaning blade ( x 2)
NOTE: 1) Clean the blade edge carefully with only a soft, clean cloth.
2) Handle the blade carefully to avoid nicking its edge.
3) New blades are treated with special setting powder, so avoid touching the edge of a new cleaning blade. If the edge of a new blade is accidentally wiped clean, dust it lightly with some toner before installing it.
4) Before installing a new blade, make sure that the blade side seals are not pinched by the blade.
SM 3-41
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
3.6.11 CLEANING BRUSH
[C]
[A]
[B]
B246R954.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)
Drum cleaning blade ( 3.6.10)
[A]: Coupling ( x 1)
[B]: Inner bushing
[C]: Cleaning brush
• Pull the shaft toward the rear to disengage the front of the shaft, then pull out.
NOTE: 1) After replacing the cleaning brush, clean the ID sensor to make sure that it is clean and free of toner.
2) Avoid touching the cleaning brush with bare hands.
3) Check the entrance seals and confirm that they are not bent.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-42
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.6.12 PICK-OFF PAWLS
[A]
[B]
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)
[A]: Pick-off pawl bracket ( x 2)
[B]: Pick-off pawl (spring x 1)
3.6.13 ID SENSOR
B246R955.WMF
DRUM UNIT
[A]
B246R956.WMF
OPC drum ( 3.6.5)
Pick-off pawls ( 3.6.12)
[A]: ID sensor ( x 2, x 1)
After replacing the sensor, do the following SPs:
• SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions), only if SP3901 (Auto Process
Control) is on.
• SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization Setting).
SM 3-43
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
3.6.14 DRUM MOTOR
[A]
B246R957.WMF
B246R958.WMF
Rear covers ( 3.3.5)
Controller/IPU panel ( x 2) (not shown)
• The panel swings open like a door. You do not need to remove it.
Flywheel ( x 3) (not shown)
[A]: Three gears ( x 1, x 2, Timing belt x 1)
[B]: Spring
[C]: Timing belt
[D]: Drum motor ( x 1, x 5)
[B]
[D]
[C]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-44
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.6.15 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE
[A]
DRUM UNIT
[C]
[B]
[E]
[D]
B246R959.WMF
1. Open the front door [A].
2. Remove the lock pin [B], then pull out the toner collection bottle [C] and its base
[D].
3. Detach the bottle from the base clamp [E] and replace it.
3.6.16 TONER SEPARATION UNIT
[A]
B246R960.WMF
Development unit ( 3.6.1)
[A]: Toner separation unit ( x 3)
SM 3-45
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DRUM UNIT
3.6.17 OZONE FILTERS
[A]: Filter cover ( x 1)
• The filter cover is on the back of the machine.
[B]: Ozone filter (top)
[C]: Ozone filter (bottom)
3.6.18 OPTICS DUST FILTER
[A]: Filter cover
[B]: Optics dust filter
3.6.19 INTERNAL DUST FILTER
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the internal dust filter [A].
[B]
[C]
B246R961.WMF
[A]
[B]
B246R962.WMF
[A]
[A]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-46
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B246R963.WMF
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.7 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.7.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the development unit
( 3.6.1).
2. Remove the toner hopper [A] ( x 2).
• Rotate the toner hopper very slightly
(10 ° ~ 20 ° ) as you slide it up to remove it.
NOTE: To avoid toner spill, hold the hopper level as you remove it.
[A]
B246R964.WMF
3. Hold the development [B] unit over a large sheet of paper, then slowly turn it upside down to empty the developer.
4. Turn the knob [C] through several complete rotations to empty all the developer in the development unit.
5. Clean the development sleeve and its side seals.
6. Turn the unit over and set it on another sheet of clean paper.
[B]
[C]
B246R965.WMF
[E]
7. Note the developer lot number printed on the top edge of the bag.
You will need the lot number when you input SP2801 .
8. Clean the development roller shaft with a clean cloth and blower brush.
[D]
9. While turning the knob [D] slowly, pour in one pack of developer [E] from one end of the development unit to the other.
B246R966.WMF
• Make sure that the developer is evenly distributed.
NOTE: Continue to turn the knob several times to prevent clumping in the developer.
SM 3-47
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
10. Re-assemble the machine.
• Hold the hopper perfectly level when re-attaching it, to prevent toner from entering the rails of the development filter.
NOTE: Automatic process control starts automatically after the machine is switched on, so after replacing the developer, you should enter the SP mode and initialize the developer with SP2801 as soon as possible after switching the machine on.
11. Do SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting).
B064 Series
• Switch the machine on.
• Press Clear Modes
• On the operation panel keypad, press .
• Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
• Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel.
• Press .
• Read the lot number from the package, enter the number, then press .
• Press Execute.
B140/B246 Series
• Open the front door.
Important : If you open the front door, auto process control will not start.
SP2801 must be done before auto process control starts.
• Turn the machine on.
• Push Clear Modes
• On the operation panel keypad, push .
• Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
• Push “Copy SP” on the touch-panel.
• Push .
• Read the lot number from the pack of developer, input the number, then push
.
• Push Execute.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-48
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.7.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B246R967.WMF
Development unit ( 3.6.1)
[C]: Toner hopper
[D]: Filter bracket top
[E]: Filter bracket
[F]: Development filter
• Make sure that the rails where the development filter bracket [C] connects to the development unit are clean and free of toner. If there is any toner in the rails, wipe them clean.
• When installing a new filter, set the filter inside the filter case then place the case on top of the filter bracket [C]. The filter case closes any gaps at the edges of the filter to prevent toner scatter.
SM 3-49
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.7.3 ENTRANCE SEAL AND SIDE SEALS
[C]
[A]
B246R968.WMF
[B]
[D]
B246R969.WMF
Development unit ( 3.6.1)
[A]: Entrance seal bracket ( x 2)
• After removing the screws, press in the catches on either end [B] to release the entrance seal bracket, then remove it.
• Clean the entrance seal bracket before re-installing it.
• When re-installing, make sure the tabs [C] and notches are engaged at four locations.
[D]: Side seals
• Remove the side seals from both ends, clean the area, and replace with new seals.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-50
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
3.7.4 TD SENSOR
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[B]
[A]
B246R970.WMF
Development unit ( 3.6.1)
[A]: TD sensor ( x 1)
• Before installing a new TD sensor, clean the TD sensor port [B].
• After replacing the TD sensor, do the following SPs
SP2801 TD Sensor Initial Setting
SP2962 Auto Process Control (only if SP3901 – Auto Process Control – is on).
3.7.5 TONER END SENSOR
[B]
[A]
[C]
B246R971.WMF
Development unit ( 3.6.1)
[A]: Toner hopper ( x 2)
[B]: Toner end sensor ( x 2)
• Remove the screws carefully to avoid stripping the holes.
• Before installing a new toner end sensor, clean the toner end sensor port
[C].
SM 3-51
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.7.6 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR
[G]
[A]
B246R972.WMF
[B]
[F]
[C]
[E]
Open the front door.
[D] B246R973.WMF
Swing the toner unit out of the machine and remove the toner bottle.
[A]: Bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Lock plate ( x 1)
[C]: Toner bottle unit ( x 1, harness x 1, x 1)
• The c-clamp is under the toner unit.
• Lift the toner bottle unit off the pegs and lay it on a piece of newspaper to avoid toner spill.
[D]: Bottom plate ( x 3, harnesses x 2)
• 2 screws on the bottom, 1 screw on the side.
[E]: Toner supply motor bracket ( x 2)
[F]: Toner supply motor ( x 2)
NOTE: After re-installation the tab [G] should be behind the stay and its pin below should be in the open track below.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-52
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.7.7 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
[C]
[B]
[A]
B246R975.WMF
[E]
[D]
B246R974.WMF
[A]: Flywheel ( x 3)
[B]: Waste toner pump tube ( x 1, x 1)
[C]: Drive rod
• Lift the toner pump tube to disengage the drive rod, pull out the rod, and push the rubber tube aside.
[D]: Development motor bracket ( x 3, x 1)
[E]: Development motor ( x 4)
SM 3-53
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
3.8 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
3.8.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[B]
[C]
[A]
B246R976.WMF
NOTE: Before you begin, spread a mat or some clean paper on the floor where you intend to set the transfer belt unit.
1. Remove the OPC drum unit ( 3.6.5).
2. Disconnect the transfer belt unit [A] ( x 1).
3. Remove the transfer belt unit stay [B] ( x 1).
4. While supporting the transfer belt unit with your hand, turn the release lever [C] counter-clockwise to release it, then pull the transfer belt unit out of the machine.
NOTE: The transfer belt unit can be removed without removing the OPC drum unit.
However, the transfer belt unit must be removed carefully to avoid scratching the surface of the transfer belt on the OPC drum unit
[D] above. Avoid touching the belt with bare hands.
[D]
B246R977.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-54
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.8.2 TRANSFER BELT
[C]
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[D]
[B]
[F]
[A]
B246R978.WMF
[E]
B246R979.WMF
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. ( 3.8.1)
2. Disconnect the earth terminal [A] and transfer current terminal [B] ( x 2).
While doing this, hold the transfer belt unit [C] by its knobs [D].
3. Raise and stand the belt perpendicular to the unit and remove it.
NOTE: To avoid scratching the belt on the guide, never rotate the belt unit farther than 90 degrees.
4. Release the drive roller [E] ( x 2).
5. Press in on the drive roller to collapse the unit into a “U” shape [F].
6. Remove the belt and replace it.
SM 3-55
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
B246R980.WMF
Check the following points:
• Before re-assembling the transfer belt unit, use a clean cloth and alcohol to clean the contact points of the drive roller, idle roller, and transfer roller. Make sure these areas are clean and free from toner, paper dust, etc.
• Never touch the surface of the belt with bare hands and never apply alcohol to the surface of the belt. Clean it with a blower brush. Check the underside of the transfer belt and clean with the blower brush.
• When re-assembling the transfer belt unit, make sure that the transfer belt is centered between the triangular marks [A] on either side of the unit.
• After re-assembly, make sure that the transfer belt is inside the transfer current terminal. The belt could be cut if it is not positioned correctly.
• Confirm that both the ground and transfer current terminal are connected and that the harnesses are not touching the release lever.
• After re-installing the transfer belt unit, turn the belt and confirm that the toner collection coil turns.
• The transfer belt and transfer roller cleaning blade must always be replaced together ( 3.8.2).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-56
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.8.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING BLADE
[B]
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[D]
[A]
[C]
B246R981.WMF
Transfer belt unit ( 3.8.1)
Disassemble the transfer belt unit ( 3.8.1)
[A]: Transfer roller cleaning blade ( x 2, x 2)
NOTE: 1) Never remove the inner lock screws [B] of the transfer roller cleaning blade. When re-assembling, make sure that the clamps [C] and [D] are arranged as shown above to avoid contact with the release lever.
2) The transfer roller cleaning blade should always be replaced when the transfer belt is replaced.
3) Never touch the edge of a new transfer roller cleaning blade. The edge of the blade is dusted with setting powder. If the setting powder is removed accidentally, dust the edge of the blade with toner. This is especially important when only the transfer roller cleaning blade must be replaced without replacing the transfer roller.
4) Work carefully around the transfer power pack located inside the transfer belt unit, especially when cleaning with an vacuum cleaner, to avoid damaging the power pack with static electricity.
SM 3-57
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
3.8.4 DISCHARGE PLATE
[C] [B]
[D]
[A]
[E]
B246R982.WMF
1. Remove the transfer belt unit ( 3.8.1)
2. Remove the shoulder screw and spring [A].
3. Rotate the discharge unit up, then lift it straight up to remove it.
4. Disconnect the three large tabs [B].
5. Remove the bracket [C] ( x 1).
6. Disconnect the 6 small seal case tabs [D].
7. Remove the discharge plate [E].
NOTE: When you re-assemble the discharge unit, set the discharge plate and make sure that it is perfectly flat before re-connecting the tabs. Before re-attaching the bracket [C], make sure that all the tabs are connected.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-58
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.8.5 TRANSFER POWER PACK
[F]
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
B246R983.WMF
Transfer belt unit ( 3.8.1)
[A]: Wire ( x 1) (all wire guides)
[B]: Ground terminal wire (wire guide x 1)
• This terminal wire does not disconnect from the power pack.
• Loosen the two left screws of the transfer belt lift solenoid [C], and remove the top screw [D] to free the ground terminal wire.
[E]: Transfer current terminal wire (wire guides x 2)
[F]: Transfer power pack ( x 1)
• Disconnect the two standoffs on the right edge of the power pack and remove.
Re-installation
• Confirm that the left edge of the power pack is below the tabs on the left.
• Confirm that the transfer current terminal wire is below the wire guides on the right.
• Pass the ground terminal wire under the top connector of the solenoid bracket and tighten all the screws of the solenoid bracket.
• Make sure the wire is below all the wire guides at the top.
SM 3-59
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9 FUSING UNIT
CAUTION
Switch off the machine, remove the plug from the power source, then allow sufficient time for the fusing unit to cool before you remove it from the machine.
3.9.1 FUSING UNIT
NOTE: Before you begin, spread a mat or some clean paper on the floor where you intend to set the fusing unit.
[B]
[A]
B246R9984.WMF
Open the front door.
Pull out the transfer unit.
[A]: Knob ( x 1)
• Open D3 and D4 until you can see the hole in the shaft.
• Insert the tip of a screwdriver into the hole of the shaft to hold it in position as the knob is turned to remove or install it.
[B]: Inner cover ( x 3)
• Pull the fusing unit release lever, then pull the unit out on the rail supports.
• At reassembly, make sure that the harness of the web drive motor is not pinched by the inner cover.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-60
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[B]
B064 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[C]
[B]
B140/B246/D052 Series
[C]
FUSING UNIT
B246R985.WMF
[A]
[A]
[A]: Open the exit separation pawl assembly.
[B]: Stopper bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Fusing unit (B064 Series: x 2, B140 Series: x 3)
B246R9986.WMF
Important:
• Give support to the bottom of the fusing unit with your hand when you remove it.
SM 3-61
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9.2 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR (B140/B246/D052
SERIES)
[B]
[A]
B246R987.WMF
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Motor ( x 2, x 1, x 2)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-62
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.9.3 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE HP SENSOR
(B140/B246/D052 SERIES)
FUSING UNIT
[A]
[B]
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Bracket ( x 2)
[B]: HP sensor (pawls x 4)
B246R988.WMF
SM 3-63
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9.4 FUSING UNIT THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS
[A]
[B]
B246R989.WMF
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Upper cover ( x 1)
[B]: Press in to release the pawls inside, then remove.
Important : Make sure that the pawls [B] engage correctly when you install the unit again.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-64
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[D]
[A]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series
FUSING UNIT
[B]
B246R990.WMF
[C]
B064 Series
[A]: End thermistor ( x 1, x 1)
[B]: Bracket ( x 2)
[C]: Center thermistor ( x 1)
[D]: Two thermostats ( x 3)
B140 Series
B140 Series
B246R991.WMF
:
Rear end cover ( x 2)
:
End thermistor bracket and thermistor ( x 1, x 1, metal clamps)
:
Center thermistor bracket and thermistor ( x 1, x 1, metal clamps)
:
Three thermostats ( x 5)
SM 3-65
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
B246/D052 Series
The thermistor-thermostats are replaced as one unit. This disassembly procedure is not required.
Reinstallation
• To prevent damage to a thermostat, never touch its detection surface.
• Place the end of the thermostat harness that has the round lead [B] in between the two bracket ribs [C].
• Tighten the screw for the round lead [B] as tight as possible without damaging the screw or screw hole.
Important
• If the harness is not positioned between the between the bracket ribs (as shown under “Incorrect" below), this could cause a machine fault (SC542 or SC545).
Correct Incorrect
(B)
(A)
(C)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-66
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.9.5 WEB CLEANING ROLLER
Web Unit Disassembly
FUSING UNIT
[A]
[B]
B246R992.WMF
B246R993.WMF
[D]
[F]
[C]
[E]
B246R994.WMF
Open the front door and pull out the fusing unit on its support rails.
[A]: Web unit ( x 2, x 2)
• The web unit can be removed without removing the fusing unit from the machine.
[B]: Upper cover ( x 1)
• Rotate the cover down slightly to remove.
[C]: Web shafts ( x 2)
[D]: Remove the web cleaning rollers from the shaft driver pins.
[E]: Web bushing (spring x 1)
[F]: Cleaning roller
NOTE: 1) After replacing the web with a new one, you must execute SP1902-001
(Fusing Web Used Area Display/Setting) to reset the web consumption count to zero. This SP code must be executed to reset SC550.
2) Be sure to print an SMC report before executing Memory All Clear
(SP5801). After executing SP5801, be sure to re-enter the value recorded for SP1902-001 in the SMC report.
SM 3-67
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
FUSING UNIT
Web Unit Assembly
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[C]
[D]
[A]
B246R995.WMF
[E]
[F]
[G]
B246R996.WMF
1. Attach the cleaning roller [A]
• Insert the end of the web into the slot .
2. Insert the drive pins [B] into the web shaft ( ).
3. After installing bushing 1 [C], rotate the shaft right to lock it, then attach the lock screw ( ).
4. Set the web [D] under the feeler [E] of the web end sensor ( ).
5. Attach bushing 2 [F] ( ).
6. Attach the new web roll [G] and wind it tight so no slack remains ( ).
NOTE: Before reassembling the machine, confirm that 1) there is no slack in the web roll, 2) the web is below the feeler of the web end sensor.
7. Attach the upper cover.
8. After installing a new web roll, reset SP1902-001 to zero.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-68
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.9.6 WEB MOTOR AND WEB END SENSOR
[A]
FUSING UNIT
[B]
B246R997.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
B246R999.WMF
Web unit and end cover ( 3.9.5)
[A]: Bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Web motor positioning bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Web motor
[D]: Web motor/sensor mount ( x 3)
[E]: Web end sensor ( x 1, harness x 1)
NOTE: At reassembly, make sure that the harness of the web driver motor is not pinched by the fusing inner cover
SM 3-69
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9.7 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING UNIT
B064 Series
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
B246R1000.WMF
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Lower cover ( x 1)
[B]: Cleaning roller bracket ( x 2)
[C]: Cleaning roller ( x 1)
NOTE: 1) When attaching the lower cover of the pressure roller cleaning roller, make sure that the tab [D] engages with the groove [E].
2) If the bushings are noisy after replacement, lubricate them on both ends and the holes where the bushings are attached with Barietta Grease
L553R.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-70
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
B140/B246/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[B]
FUSING UNIT
[A]
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Cover ( x 1)
[B]: Pressure cleaning roller ( x 2)
B246R1001.WMF
SM 3-71
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9.8 FUSING LAMPS, HOT ROLLER, AND PRESSURE ROLLER
If you wish to remove the pressure roller only, without removing the hot roller and fusing lamps, please do not use this procedure. Use the procedure in the next section.
B064 Series: Fusing Lamps
Rear
[B] [D]
Front
[C]
[A]
B246R1003.WMF
[E]
[F]
[G]
B246R1004.WMF
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Rear terminal brackets ( x 3)
[B]: Upper connectors ( x 2)
[C]: Lower connector ( x 1)
[D]: Rear fusing lamp holder ( x 1)
[E]: Fusing lamp connectors ( x 2)
[F]: Front fusing lamp holder ( x 3)
[G]: Fusing lamps
NOTE: Handle the fusing lamps carefully to prevent breaking them; avoid touching them with bare hands.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-72
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008
B140/B246/D052* Series: Fusing Lamps
FUSING UNIT
B140/B246/D052 Series
[F] [G]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[D] [C]
B246R1005.WMF
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
⇒
[A]: Rear bracket ( x 2 at ,
[B]: White connector ( x 1)
x 1 at )
[C]: Lock bracket ( x 1)
[D]: Rear terminal connector bracket ( x 1 at
[E]: Connector ( x 1, x 1)
under metal clamp, x 1 at )
[F]: Blue, green connectors
[G]: Rear fusing lamp holder ( x 1)
NOTE: The D054 model (of the D052 Series) does not incorporate three fusing lamps. The fusing lamp used to provide side heat has been removed.
SM 3-73
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
B140/B246/D052 Series Front
[A]
[E]
Rev. 04/2008
[B]
[D]
B246R1006.WMF
[C]
[A]: Plate ( x 1)
[B]: White connector ( x 1)
[C]: Red connectors ( x 2)
[D]: Front fusing lamp holder ( x 1)
[E]: Fusing lamps (x 3)
NOTE: Be careful when you move the fusing lamps. Do not break them. Do not
⇒ touch them with bare hands.
NOTE: The D054 model only incorporates two fusing lamps.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-74
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Reinstallation: B140/B246/D052 Series Fusing Lamps
Front
Rear
W
FUSING UNIT
B
G
[B]
W
[A]
R
[C]
R
B246R1007.WMF
1. Attach the rear fusing holder first.
2. Put in the lamps from the front.
3. Use the color coding of the connectors to set the lamps in the correct opening in the rear fusing lamp holder.
NOTE: The openings in the rear holder have marks W (White), B (Blue), and G
(Green). These colors must agree with the letters on the holder: W, B, G.
4. At the front, see the colors of the connectors at the rear, and set the ends of the lamps:
White → [A]
Blue → [B]
Green → [C]
SM 3-75
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
FUSING UNIT
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
B246R1008.WMF [C]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[B]
Web unit ( 3.9.5)
[A]: Pressure arm
• Insert the tips of two screwdrivers and press down to release.
[B]: C-clamps (both ends)
[C]: Drive gear
[D]: Bushings (both ends)
[E]: Bearings
[F]: Hot roller
B246R1009.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-76
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
[A]
[C]
B246R1010.WMF
B246R1011.WMF
[A]: Entrance guide plate ( x 2)
[B]: Pressure roller ( x 2)
NOTE: The pressure roller and pressure roller bearing should always be replaced together.
[C]: Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the bushings with Barrierta S552R grease.
NOTE: If the bushings are warm, allow them to cool before applying the
Barrierta grease. Applying the grease while the bushings are hot could generate gas.
SM 3-77
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
Important Notes about Fusing Unit Assembly (B064 Series)
[A]
[C]
[B]
B246R1013.WMF
[D]
B246R1012.WMF
Follow these important guidelines when re-assembling the fusing unit:
• Use the external holes to fasten the screws when you fasten the lower guide plate. The inner screws are adjusted to correct wrinkling.
• Handle the fusing lamps carefully to prevent breaking them; avoid touching them with bare hands.
• Match colors of the bayonet connectors with the colors of the terminals when reconnecting them to the bracket at [A] and [B]. If either connection is incorrect, the machine cannot control the temperature of the hot roller and an SC is logged as soon as the machine is powered on.
• The discharge brush [C] on the fusing terminal bracket should contact the inner surface of the hot roller.
• Check that there is some play [D] (in the direction indicated by the arrows) in the positioning of the fusing lamps.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-78
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER
Use this procedure when you wish to remove only the pressure roller.
[A] [E]
FUSING UNIT
[D]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[B]
B246R1014.WMF
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
Turn the fusing unit upside down.
[A]: Lower cover ( x 1)
[B]: Pressure roller cleaning unit ( x 2)
[C]: Release the pressure arms
• Use screw driver to lower the pressure arms on both ends of the pressure roller ( 3.9.8) and remove the springs [D] (x 2) on both sides.
[D]: Pressure roller
NOTE: 1) The fusing lamps are fragile. Work carefully to avoid breaking them.
2) During assembly, handle the roller carefully to avoid scratching it on the bracket.
3) Make sure the tabs and grooves of the lower cover are engaged correctly before tightening the screw.
Spring Adjustment
Two holes [F] are provided on each pressure arm for the springs.
Normally the springs should be attached to the lower holes. Attaching the springs to the upper holes exerts less pressure on the hot roller. Attach the springs to the upper holes only for especially thin paper.
SM 3-79
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9.10 STRIPPER PAWLS
B064 Series
[A]
[B]
[C]
B246R1016.WMF
[D]
Remove the fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Top cover ( x 1)
[B]: Bracket ( x 1, spring x 1)
[C]: Inner cover ( x 2)
[D]: Stripper pawl ( x 1, spring x 3)
B246R1015.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-80
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
B140/B246/D052 Series
[B]
[A]
B246R1017.WMF
[C]
B246R1019.WMF
Remove the fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Top cover ( x 1)
[B]: Bracket ( x 1, spring x 1)
[C]: Inner cover
[D]: Stripper pawl (spring x 1). Open the arms to release the stripper pawl, and remove it.
[D]
SM 3-81
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9.11 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
B246R1030.WMF
1. After the machine is powered on with the main switch, make an A4/LT LEF copy, then stop the machine while the paper is still in the fusing unit by switching it off.
NOTE: This is easier with an OHP sheet. Use an OHP sheet if you have one available.(OHP= Over Head Projector or transparency
2. Open the front door, then turn the fusing knob to feed out the copy.
3. Measure the width of the band on the part of the image where it is particularly black. The band, called the nip band [A], should be 9.0
± 0.7 mm at the center.
NOTE: When the fusing is incorrect (wrinkles, offset, curl), measure the nip band width. The nip band width can be adjusted by changing the position of the springs [B] on either end of the pressure roller. The fusing temperature can also be adjusted with SP1105 (Fusing
Temperature Adjustment) for Normal, OHP, and Thick Paper.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-82
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.9.12 FUSING UNIT EXIT SENSOR
[B]
FUSING UNIT
[A]
[E]
[C]
[D]
Fusing unit ( 3.9.1)
[A]: Open the hot roller stripper pawl unit
[B]: Exit guide plate ( x 2)
[C]: Fusing exit sensor holder ( x 2)
[D]: Plate spring
[E]: Fusing exit sensor ( x 1)
B246R1031.WMF
SM 3-83
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9.13 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR
[A]
[C]
B246R1032.WMF
[B]
Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
Open the I/O board ( x 2)
[A]: CNB bracket ( x 4, x all)
[B]: Timing belt
[C]: Fusing/exit motor bracket ( x 1)
Fusing/exit motor ( x 2)
• The fusing/exit motor (not shown) is inside the bracket.
B246R1034.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-84
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
FUSING UNIT
3.9.14 FUSING EXIT AND EXIT UNIT ENTRANCE SENSORS
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
Open the front door and pull out the exit/inverter unit.
[A]: Fusing exit sensor bracket ( x 2)
[B]: Fusing exit sensor ( x 1)
[C]: Exit unit entrance sensor bracket ( x 2)
[D]: Exit unit entrance sensor ( x 1)
B246R1035.WMF
SM 3-85
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10 DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
[C]
B246R1036.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the duplex unit.
2. Remove the slide rail roller on the left [A] and on the right [B] ( x 1).
3. Lift out the duplex unit [C].
NOTE: To re-install the duplex unit, insert the duplex unit partially, only until it enters the black guide rail, then re-attach each slide rail roller. After that, push the duplex unit into the machine completely. This method prevents interference from the guide plate during installation.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-86
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.10.2 DUPLEX UNIT SIDE-TO-SIDE ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[C]
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
B246R1037.WMF
1. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 3).
2. Move the handle lock screw [B] from the right to the center.
3. Loosen the left lock screw [C], then adjust the position of the duplex unit.
3.10.3 JOGGER FENCE ADJUSTMENT
SP1008 Duplex Fence
Adjustment
Execute this SP to adjust the distance between the jogger fences, if required. A smaller value shortens the distance. If the fences are too far apart, skewing may occur in the duplex tray.
If the fences are too close, the paper may be creased in the duplex unit. For details, see “5. Service Tables”.
SM 3-87
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.4 DUPLEX MOTORS
Duplex Inverter Motor
[A]
B246R1038.WMF
[B]
[A]: Remove the cover ( x 3).
[B]: Inverter motor bracket ( x 3).
[C]: Inverter motor (harness x 1, x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1).
B246R1039.WMF
[C]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-88
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Duplex Jogger and Transport Motors
[A]
DUPLEX UNIT
B246R1040.WMF
[B]
B246R1041.WMF
[A]: Jogger motor ( x 1, x 2)
[B]: Transport motor bracket (harness x 1, x 1, x 3, timing belt x 1)
[C]: Transport motor ( x 2)
[C]
SM 3-89
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.5 DUPLEX TRANSPORT CLUTCH/JOGGER HP SENSOR
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[A]
B246R1042.WMF
[A]: Duplex unit release lever ( x 2)
[B]: Jogger motor bracket (harnesses x 4, x 3)
[C]: Transport clutch (harness x 1, x 1)
• To release the clutch, push in the catch pawl on the side of the shaft.
[D]: Jogger HP sensor (spring x 1, x 2, x 1)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-90
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.10.6 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR
[B]
[A]
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]: Bracket ( x 2)
[B]: Duplex entrance sensor ( x 1)
B246R1043.WMF
SM 3-91
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.7 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSOR 3
[B]
[A]
[C]
B246R1045.WMF
[A]: Right half of table ( x 2, x 1)
• The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes when re-attaching.
[B]: Remove the screw in the center of the table to release the sensor bracket below.
[C]: Transport sensor 3 ( x 1)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-92
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.8 INVERTER EXIT SENSOR, TRANSPORT SENSORS 1 & 2
[B]
[A]
B246R1046.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B246R1047.WMF
[A]: Cross-stay ( x 4)
[B]: Reverse trigger roller shaft
[C]: Jogger fences ( x 1 each)
[D]: Left half of table ( x 2)
• The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes when re-attaching.
• To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to the right to disengage the tabs and then remove.
[E]: Inverter exit sensor ( x 1, harness x 1, x 1)
[F]: Transport sensor 1 (harness x 1, x 1)
[G]: Transport sensor 2 (harness x 1, x 1)
SM 3-93
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.9 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
B246R1049.WMF
1. Cross stay ( 3.10.8)
2. Reverse trigger roller shaft ( 3.10.8)
3. Left half of the table ( 3.10.8)
4. Jogger motor bracket ( 3.10.5)
• Slip the one end of the belt around the gear below the jogger motor.
• Slip the other end of the belt around the gear at the other side of the duplex unit.
5. If you are replacing the belt, set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the belt and tighten the screw [A].
If you are adjusting the belt, loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece [B] on the belt to the left or right to adjust the position of the front fence, then tighten the screw.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-94
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.11 PAPER FEED
3.11.1 PAPER TRAY REMOVAL
[C]
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
B246R1050.WMF
[D]
B246R1051.WMF
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the tandem tray drawer [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right
[C] sides of the tandem tray.
3. Remove the left tandem tray [D] ( x 5).
SM 3-95
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
PAPER FEED
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
[B]
[D]
B246R1052.WMF
[C]
[E]
B246R1053.WMF
[A]: Right tandem tray ( x 2).
NOTE: 1) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [B] ride on the slide rail [C].
2) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray stopper [D] is set behind the stopper [E] on the frame.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-96
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
Turn off the main switch.
Pull out the tandem feed tray.
[B]: Rear bottom plate ( x 1)
[C]: Return sensor ( x 1).
B246R1054.WMF
SM 3-97
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[D]
[C]
Turn off the main switch.
Pull out the tandem feed tray.
[A]: Rear bottom plate ( x 1).
[B]: Back fence transport gear ( x 1)
[C]: Move the back fence to the right.
[D]: Rear HP sensor ( x 1)
B246R1055.WMF
[B]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-98
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
B246R1056.WMF
[D]
[E]
B246R1057.WMF
Turn off the main switch.
Remove the right tandem tray ( 3.11.1).
[A]: Inner cover ( x 2)
[B]: Side fences ( x 1 each)
[C]: Bottom plate ( x 4)
[D]: Connector ( x 1)
[E]: Sensor ( x 1)
SM 3-99
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift wire. It is necessary to remove the shaft for replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire.
[A]
B246R1058.WMF
[D]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[C]
Remove the right tandem tray. (Refer to Paper Tray Removal.)
[A]: Remove the inner cover ( x 2)
[B]: Remove the left stay.
[C]: Wire stoppers
• Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook.
[D]: Wire covers ( x 1 each)
[E]: Bracket ( x 1, x 1, bushing x 1)
[F]: Gear
[G]: Bottom plate lift wire
B246R1059.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-100
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B246R1060.WMF
NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:
1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B], and set the projection [C] in the hole [D].
2) Position the wire as shown [E].
3) Do not cross the wires.
SM 3-101
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE
NOTE: At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT LEF. Only A4 or LT LEF paper can be used for tandem feed.
[B]
[D]
B246R1062.WMF
[A]
[C]
B246R1061.WMF
1. Open the front cover.
2. Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] to separate the right tandem tray
[B] from the left tandem tray.
3. Remove the right tandem inner cover [C] ( x 2).
4. Re-position the side fences [D] ( x 1 each).
A4: Outer slot position
LT: Inner slot position
5. Re-install the right tandem inner cover.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-102
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
B246R1063.WMF
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
[A]
[C]
[D]
[C]
[E]
B246R1065.WMF
B246R1064.WMF
6. Remove the tray cover [A] ( x 2).
7. Remove the DC motor cover [B] ( x 4).
8. Remove the rear side fence [C] ( x 4) and re-position the rear cover [D] ( x
2).
9. Re-position the side fences [C] [E] ( x 4).
A4: Outer slot position
LT: Inner slot position
10. Re-install the DC motor cover and the tray cover.
SM 3-103
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
PAPER FEED
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
[B]
B246R1066.WMF
11. Remove the rear bottom plate [A] ( x 1).
12. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [B] ( x 1).
To use the paper tray for A4 size, set the screw in the left hole as shown. (For
LT size, the screw should be placed on the right.)
13. Reinstall the rear bottom plate.
14. Input the new paper size into SP5959-001 (Paper Size – Tray 1). For details, see SP5959 in section “4. Service Tables”.
15. Do the scanner and printer adjustments. ( 3.14)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-104
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.7 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[C] [B]
[D]
B246R1067.WMF
[A]: Remove the tray.
[B]: Feed roller ( x 1)
[C]: Pick-up roller ( x 1)
[D]: Separation roller ( x 1)
NOTE: 1) The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1), universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), by-pass tray, and ADF are similar.
However, the only rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and universal tray rollers (Trays 1, 2, 3).
2) Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement.
SM 3-105
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
PAPER FEED
3.11.8 FEED UNIT
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[B]
B246R1069.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
[E]
B246R1068.WMF
Front door ( 3.3.2)
LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover ( 3.3.3)
• If the LCT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
Pull out all three trays (do not remove).
[A]: Nylon peg
[B]: Toner collection bottle
[C]: Vertical transport guide
[D]: Inner cover ( x 2)
NOTE: When re-installing the vertical transport guide, remove the lower right cover then insert from [E]. ( 3.3.3)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-106
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
B246R1070.WMF
B246R1078.WMF
[A]: Guide plate ( x 1)
• 1st feed unit only.
[B]: Feed unit ( x 1, x 3)
• Insert your hand from the right and pull the feed unit forward.
NOTE: To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine, remove it carefully and slowly.
SM 3-107
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.9 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment can be done:
• When feeding special paper, especially thick paper.
• When the customer is experiencing feed problems.
[A]
[B]
B246R1079.WMF
1. Remove the feed unit ( 3.11.8).
2. Loosen the hex screw [A].
NOTE: The separation roller gear [B] is positioned at the groove before shipping.
3. To adjust for thick paper, move the separation roller gear [B] to the left to decrease the pressure.
–or-
To correct misfeeds, move the separation roller gear to the right to increase the pressure.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-108
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.11.10 RELAY SENSOR
PAPER FEED
[A]
[C]
[A]: Remove the LCT entrance guide cover.
[B]: Relay sensor bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Relay sensor ( x 1)
B246R1080.WMF
[B]
SM 3-109
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.11 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
B246R1091.WMF
[D]
B246R1090.WMF
Registration inner cover ( x 2)
• Not shown. This cover is directly below the by-pass tray.
[A]: Connector ( x 1)
[B]: Ground wire ( x 1)
[C]: By-pass tray
• Disconnect the by-pass tray from the pins on both sides.
[D]: By-pass table ( x 2)
[E]: By-pass paper size detection board ( x 2)
After installation, execute SP1904 to calibrate the maximum and minimum paper sizes for the side fences:
• SP1904-001 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection – Minimum Size
Move the side fences to the minimum size, then execute this SP.
• SP1904-002 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection – Maximum Size
Move the side fences to the maximum size, then execute this SP.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-110
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.11.12 BY-PASS TRAY ROLLERS
[A]
PAPER FEED
[D]
[B]
[C]
B246R1092.WMF
Right covers ( 3.3.3)
By-pass tray ( 3.11.11)
[A]: By-pass cover ( x 2)
[B]: Feed roller ( x 1)
[C]: Pick-up roller ( x 1)
[D]: Separation roller ( x 1)
NOTE: 1) Even though the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1), universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) by-pass tray and ADF are similar, the only rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and universal trays
(Trays 1, 2, 3).
2) Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement.
SM 3-111
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.13 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B246R1093.WMF
1. Loosen the separation roller gear [A].
The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment can be done:
• When feeding special paper, especially thick paper.
• When the customer experiences feed problems.
NOTE: The separation roller gear is positioned at the groove before shipping.
2. Move the separation roller gear right to increase the pressure to correct misfeeds.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-112
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.11.14 REGISTRATION SENSOR
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[C]
B246R1094.WMF
[A]: Inner cover ( x 4)
Development unit ( 3.6.1)
Charge corona unit ( 3.6.2)
OPC drum unit ( 3.6.5)
[B]: Paper dust removal unit ( x 1, x 1)
[C]: Registration sensor
B246R1095.WMF
SM 3-113
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.11.15 REGISTRATION AND BY-PASS UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[F]
B246R1096.WMF
1. Remove the development unit. ( 3.6.1)
2. Remove the inner cover. ( x 4)
3. Disconnect the toner bottle holder connector [A] and counter connector [B].
4. Pull out the duplex unit about 10 cm.
• Confirm that the registration roller is separated from the positioning pin.
5. Remove the right upper cover. ( 3.3.3)
6. Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
7. Disconnect the following connectors:
• Relay clutch connector [C]
• Guide plate solenoid connector [D]
• Guide plate sensor connector [E]
• By-pass tray unit connectors [F]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-114
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[B]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
[C]
[A]
B246R1097.WMF
[D]
B246R1098.WMF
8. Remove the by-pass feed motor [A] ( x 3, x 1).
• At re-installation, if the tension of the belt [B] is slack, loosen the screw on the tension bracket [C], move the screw to put more tension on the belt, then tighten the screw at the new position.
9. Remove the by-pass unit [D] ( x 4).
When removing and installing the by-pass unit:
• Make sure that the unit does not catch on any harnesses.
• On re-installation, make sure that no harnesses are pinched between the unit and the machine frame.
• You must re-install the by-pass unit with the duplex unit open.
SM 3-115
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
3.12 PCBS AND HDD
3.12.1 BCU BOARD (BASE ENGINE CONTROL UNIT)
BCU: B064, B140 Series
Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
[A]: BCU board bracket ( x 4)
[B]: BCU board ( x 4, x 17)
1. Remove IC31 (EEPROM) from the old
BCU board.
2. Attach the EEPROM to the new board.
3. Make sure that the DIP switch settings on the new board and identical to the
DIP switch settings of the old board.
4. After replacing this board, execute
SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization).
[A]
B246R1099.WMF
[B]
B246R1023.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-116
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
BCU, IOB: B246/D052 Series
PCBS AND HDD
|
{
[A]
• Disconnect ADF cable.
Remove:
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
[A] BCU screws, connectors ( x1, x4, x4)
[B] IOB screws, connectors ( x6, x16, x8)
• Separate the BCU { , IOB | at the edge connector.
B246R109A.WMF
[B]
SM 3-117
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.2 CONTROLLER BOARD
B064 Series: Controller Board
Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Swing-out the PCB unit ( x 2).
[B]: Controller cover ( x 9)
[C]: Controller board ( x 2, x 2)
• Pull the controller board out in the direction of the arrow.
Important :
Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board and install it on the new board.
[C]
[A]
[B]
B246R1022.WMF
B246R1021.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-118
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
[A]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140 Series: Controller Board
[C]
PCBS AND HDD
B246R1020.WMF
[B]
[E]
B246R1024.WMF
Rear covers ( 3.3.5)
Controller box cover ( x 12)
[A]: Controller board plate ( x 2)
[B]: Lower covers
[C]: Controller board ( x 2)
[D]: Remove the DIMM from the old controller board, and connect it to the new board.
[E]: Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board, and connect it to the new board.
[D]
SM 3-119
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
B246/D052 Series: Controller Board
• Disconnect ADF cable
Remove:
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Controller box cover ( x13)
• All SD cards and SD card slot cover
( x1)
Remove:
[A] Network interface board and all other installed boards (Knob x2 ea.)
[B] Controller box faceplate ( x5)
[C] Memory DIMM
[D] NVRAM
[E] Controller board ( x4)
Reinstallation
• Make sure the system SD card is reinstalled in SD card slot C1 (top slot).
• The machine will not operate if the system SD card is missing from SD card slot C1 .
• Reinstall all the option boards in their proper slots if any were removed.
⇒
Important:
• Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board and install it on the new board.
[A]
[E]
[B]
Rev. 04/2008
B246R103A.WMF
[C]
[D]
B246R104A.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-120
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
3.12.3 IPU BOARD
B064 Series: IPU Board
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
[A]
Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
Swing-out the PCB unit ( 3.12.2).
[A]: PCB unit cover ( x 7)
[B]: IPU board ( x 3, x 7)
[B]
B246R1025.WMF
SM 3-121
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
B140 Series: IPU, Mother Board
B246R1026.WMF
[A]
Rear covers ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Controller box cover ( x 12)
[B]: BCU cover plate ( x 6)
[C]: Controller box door ( x 5)
B246R1027.WMF
[B]
[C]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-122
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B246R1028.WMF
SM
[A]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
[B]
[D]
[C]
B246R1100.WMF
[A]: Connector cover ( x 2)
[B]: Harness ( x 1, x 1)
[C]: IPU cover ( x 5)
[D]: IPU board ( x 3, x 8)
NOTE: Record the positions of the IPU board screws. Attach them at the same positions when you install the board again.
SM 3-123
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
PCBS AND HDD
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[B]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[A]: A1, A2 connector slots assembly ( x 1)
[B]: Connector cover ( x 2)
[C]: Mother board support plate ( x 5)
[D]: Mother board ( x 1)
[E]: Mother board DIMM
[D]
B246R1101.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-124
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B246/D052 Series: IPU
• Disconnect ADF cable
Remove:
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
Remove:
[A] Screws and swing open the controller box ( x4). [B]
[B] Left connector shield ( x2)
[C] Right connector shield ( x4)
[D] IPU board unit ( x7, x2)
• Slowly slide the IPU board and bracket out of the controller box.
[E] IPU ( x8
[D]
PCBS AND HDD
[A]
[C]
B246R1102.WMF
[E]
B246R91103.WMF
SM 3-125
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
B246/D052 Series Motherboard
{
|
}
~
B246R105A.WMF
• Disconnect ADF cable
1. Remove:
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Controller box cover ( x13)
• Controller board ( See page 3-120)
2. Remove screws to ~ and swing open the controller box ( x4).
B246R106A.WMF
3. Remove the left IPU connector shield ( x2).
4. Disconnect connectors and ( x2).
5. Remove brackets , , ( x2 ea.).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-126
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
[A]
[B]
[D]
B246R107A.WMF
[C]
B246R108A.WMF
6. Remove the controller board mounting bracket [A] ( x13, x6).
7. Remove the controller board [B] from the side of the mounting bracket ( x9).
8. Remove DIMMs [C] and [D].
SM 3-127
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.4 DEVELOPMENT POWER PACK
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
B246R861.WMF
• Remove rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Flywheel ( x 3)
[B]: Development power pack ( x 2, x 3)
NOTE: Mark the bayonet connectors [C], [D] with a felt pen to ensure that they are not connected incorrectly when the power pack is re-connected.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-128
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.12.5 PSU, PFC BOARDS
B064 Series
Rear lower cover ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Harness clamps ( x 3)
[B]: PSU ( x 6, x 13)
• The PSU consists of two PCB’s.
[C]: PFC ( x 4, x 14)
B140 Series PSU
Rear covers ( 3.3.5)
Controller box cover ( x 12)
[A]: PSU ( x 5, x 7)
[C]
[A]
[A]
PCBS AND HDD
[B]
B246R862.WMF
B246R703.WMF
SM 3-129
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
B246/D052 Series PSU
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Controller box cover ( x13)
Remove:
[A] PSU ( x4, x7)
[A]
B246R101A.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-130
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.6 HDD
Replacing the NVRAM or the HDD erases documents stored in the document server. Before replacing either of these items, consult with the customer to determine the best time to perform the replacement.
B064 Series HDD
[A]
[B]
[C]
B246R863.WMF
Rear upper cover ( 3.3.5)
[A]: Controller cover ( x 10)
[B]: HDD bracket ( x 8, x 4)
[C]: HDD ( x 8)
• Format the HDD with SP5832 001. Formatting is not necessary but is strongly recommended.
• Download the stamp data with SP5853.
SM 3-131
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
B140 Series HDD
[A]
B140R701.WMF
[B]
Rear covers ( 3.3.5) [C]
B140R702.WMF
Controller box cover ( x 12)
[A]: HDD assembly ( x 3, x 2)
[B]: HDD bracket ( x 4)
[C]: HDD ( x 4)
• Format the HDD with SP5832 001. Formatting is not necessary but is strongly recommended.
• Down load the stamp data with SP5853.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-132
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B246/D052 Series HDD
• Disconnect ADF cable
Remove:
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Controller box cover ( x13)
[A] HDD unit ( x2, x2)
[B] HDD ( x4)
• Format the HDD with SP5832 001.
Formatting is not necessary but is strongly recommended.
• Down load the stamp data with SP5853.
[A]
PCBS AND HDD
[B]
B246R102A.WMF
SM 3-133
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.7 NVRAM
This machine has an electronic counting device that uses software to monitor the number of copies. In addition to the electronic counter of the NVRAM on the controller board, the machine is also equipped with a mechanical counter.
NVRAM: B064 Series, B140 Series
B064 Series B140 Series
[A]
[A]
B140R705.WMF
B140R864.WMF
1. Enter the SP mode and print the SMC report.
• Press Clear Modes
• On the operation panel keypad, press .
• Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
• Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel.
2. Execute SP5990-001 (All SP Groups) to print an SMC report.
3. Insert the IC card or SD card.
If the machine is a B064 Series machine, remove the slot cover and connect the flash memory card to the controller board.
-or-
If the machine is a B140 Series machine, put the SD card in Slot C3.
4. Execute SP5824 (NVRAM Data Upload) to upload the data to the flash memory card or SD card.
5. Switch the machine off and disconnect the power cord.
6. Remove the NVRAM [A].
• Touch a metal surface to discharge any static build up on your hands or tools before you touch the controller board.
• Work carefully when removing the NVRAM to avoid damaging other components on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-134
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
7. Install the new NVRAM. Make sure that the NVRAM is installed the correct way around.
8. Connect the power cord and switch the machine on.
9. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5801 (Memory All Clear).
10. Execute SP5825 (NVRAM Download) to download the data uploaded from the old NVRAM.
11. Switch the machine off then on.
12. Execute SP5990 to print another SMC report. Confirm that all the SP settings have been initialized.
13. Execute SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization) to initialize the ID sensor.
14. Execute SP5907 (Plug & Play) and enter the brand and model name of the machine for Windows Plug & Play capability.
15. For details about SP initial settings, see “Section 5 Service Tables”.
SM 3-135
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
NVRAM: B246/D052 Series
Before Removing the NVRAM
1. Enter the SP mode and print the SMC report.
• Press Clear Modes
• On the operation panel keypad, press .
• Hold down Clear/Stop for more than 3 seconds.
• Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel.
2. Execute SP5990-001 (All SP Groups) to print an SMC report.
3. Insert the SD card in Slot C3 .
4. Execute SP5824 (NVRAM Data Upload) to upload the data to the SD card.
5. Switch the machine off and disconnect the power cord.
Removing the NVRAM
Important
• Touch a metal surface to discharge any static build up on your hands or tools before you touch the controller board.
• Work carefully when removing the NVRAM to avoid damaging other components on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips.
• Disconnect ADF cable.
Remove:
[A]
• Rear upper cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Rear lower cover ( x2) ( 3.3.5)
• Controller box cover
Remove:
[A] Controller box cover ( x13)
[B] NVRAM
• Push in the sides of the NVRAM unit to release the tabs and pull straight out.
• Install the new NVRAM.
[B]
B246R110A.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-136
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2008 PCBS AND HDD
After Installing the New NVRAM
1. Connect the power cord and switch the machine on.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5801 (Memory All Clear).
3. Execute SP5825 (NVRAM Download) to download the data uploaded onto the
SD card in SD card slot C3 .
4. Switch the machine off and on.
5. Execute SP5990 to print another SMC report. Confirm that all the SP settings have been initialized.
6. Execute SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization) to initialize the ID sensor.
⇒
7. Execute SP5907 (Plug & Play) and enter the brand and model name of the machine for Windows Plug & Play capability.
8. Also set SP1902 001 (Amount of Fusing Unit Web used so far) to the most recent setting (See the SMC List).
9. For details about SP initial settings, see “Section 5 Service Tables”.
SM 3-137
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
PCBS AND HDD
3.12.8 DIMMS
Read this section carefully before installation so you know how to insert the DIMMs correctly.
CAUTION
Follow the procedure below to connect the DIMMs to the controller board.
Incorrect insertion can damage the controller board or cause a bad connection between the DIMM and controller contacts. If the upper contact is pressed in and bent, the resulting poor connection could cause the entire system to not operate.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B140R865.WMF
1. Hold the ROM DIMM with the edge connector [A] pointing toward the slot and the notch [B] on the DIMM in the upper right corner.
2. Insert the edge connector [C] into the slot at a 30-degree angle from the surface of the board.
NOTE: If the angle is too low, the upper contact could bend.
3. Move the outside edge of the ROM DIMM up and down slightly until it works into the connector, then gently press it down level with the controller board.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-138
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
3.13 ADF
3.13.1 ADF COVERS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[A]
[C]
ADF
[B]
Open the feed cover [A] ( x 1, x 2, ground wire x 1).
[B]: Front cover ( x 2)
• Press down on the tabs to remove.
[C]: Rear cover ( x 2)
• Press down on the tabs to remove.
B140R866.WMF
SM 3-139
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
ADF
3.13.2 FEED UNIT
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
[C]
[B]
[A]
B140R867.WMF
1. Open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove the snap fitting [B].
3. Push the feed unit slowly to the left to disengage the shaft [C] on the right, then lift it out.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-140
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.13.3 FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER
[C]
[A]
[B]
B140R868.WMF
[D]
[E]
ADF
[F]
B140R869.WMF
1. Remove the feed unit ( 3.11.8).
2. Remove the pick-up roller unit [A].
3. Remove the bushings [B].
4. Remove the pick-up roller [C].
NOTE: At re-assembly, make sure that the tab on the front guide plate is above the pick-up roller.
5. Hold the feed belt holder [D] by the left and right sides, then carefully pull it off the bushing. Do not let the springs [E] fall.
6. Remove the feed belt [F].
NOTE: When re-assembling, set the pick-up roller springs first, then follow this procedure in reverse.
SM 3-141
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ADF
3.13.4 SEPARATION ROLLER
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
Open the feed cover.
Feed unit ( 3.11.8)
[A]: Separation roller cover
• Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the cover.
[B]: C-Clamp ( x 1)
[C]: Separation roller
[D]: Torque limiter clutch
B140R870.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-142
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.13.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR
[A]
ADF
[C]
[B]
B140R872.WMF
B140R871.WMF
Open the feed cover.
Feed unit ( 3.11.8)
[A]: Guide plate ( x 3)
[B]: Registration sensor bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Registration sensor ( x 1)
SM 3-143
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ADF
3.13.6 ADF CONTROL BOARD
[A]
ADF rear cover ( 3.13.1)
[A]: ADF board ( x 2, x 14)
B140R873.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-144
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ADF
3.13.7 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, AND SKEW CORRECTION
SENSORS
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
B140R874.WMF
[F]
[D]
[A]: Open the feed cover.
[B]: Guide plate ( x 3)
[C]: Width sensor guide plate ( x 1)
[D]: Original width sensors (x 4)
[E]: Interval sensor ( x 1)
[F]: Skew correction sensor ( x 1)
B140R875.WMF
SM 3-145
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ADF
3.13.8 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]: Open the original tray.
[B]: Lower cover ( x 4)
[C]: Original length sensor 1 – B5 ( x 1)
[D]: Original length sensor 2 – A4 ( x 1)
[E]: Original length sensor 3 – LG ( x 1)
B140R876.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-146
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.13.9 DF POSITION AND APS SENSOR
[B]
[C]
[A]
Open the ADF.
ADF rear cover. ( 3.13.1)
[A]: Bracket ( x 1)
[B]: ADF position sensor ( x 1)
[C]: APS sensor ( x 1)
B140R877.WMF
ADF
SM 3-147
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ADF
3.13.10 OTHER ADF SENSORS
[B]
[A]
[C]
B140R879.WMF
[F]
[H]
[G]
[E] [D]
Open the feed cover.
Front/rear covers ( x 4) ( 3.13.1)
[A]: C-Clamps ( x 2)
[B]: Original tray ( x 1)
[C]: Bottom plate ( x 1)
[D]: Original set sensor ( x 1)
[E]: Feed cover sensor ( x 1)
[F]: Bottom plate HP sensor ( x 1)
[G]: Pick-up roller HP sensor ( ( x 1)
[H]: Bottom plate position sensor ( x 1)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-148
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140R878.WMF
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.13.11 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR
[A]
ADF
[B]
B140R880.WMF
Open the feed cover.
Rear cover ( 3.13.1)
[A]: Bottom plate lift motor bracket (harness x 1, x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1)
[B]: Bottom plate lift motor ( x 2)
3.13.12 FEED MOTOR
[A]
[B] B140R881.WMF
Rear cover ( 3.13.1)
[A]: Feed motor bracket ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1, belt x 1)
[B]: Feed motor ( x 2)
SM 3-149
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ADF
3.13.13 EXIT MOTOR AND TRANSPORT MOTOR
[A]
[B]
[D] [C]
Open the feed cover.
ADF rear cover ( 3.13.1)
Bottom plate lift motor ( 3.13.11)
[A]: Timing belt
[B]: Exit/transport motor unit ( x 3, x 2)
[C]: Transport motor ( x 2)
[D]: Exit motor ( x 2)
B140R882.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-150
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.13.14 PICK-UP ROLLER MOTOR AND HP SENSOR
[A]
[B]
ADF
Open the feed cover.
ADF rear cover ( 3.13.1)
[A]: Pick-up roller lift motor ( x 2, x 1)
[B]: Pick-up roller HP sensor ( x 1)
B140R883.WMF
SM 3-151
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
ADF
3.13.15 CIS POWER SUPPLY BOARD AND CIS UNIT
[A]
[B]
[E]
[D]
B140R885.WMF
[F]
[C]
[G]
B140R884.WMF
WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this procedure.
Open the feed cover.
Feed unit ( 3.11.8)
Guide plate ( 3.11.15)
NOTE: To avoid an accidental static discharge which could damage the circuits of the CIS power supply board, touch a metal surface before touching the board.
[A]: Guide plate mylar ( x 1)
[B]: CIS power supply board ( x 2, x 2)
[C]: Timing belt
[D]: CIS unit ( x 2, x 3)
• Remove the CIS unit carefully to avoid scratching the glass.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty re-installing the CIS unit, you can remove the two drive gears [E] ( x 1), the separation roller shaft [F] ( x 2), and cross-stay [G] ( x 4).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-152
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.13.16 ADF EXIT SENSOR
[A]
[B]
ADF
CIS Power Supply Board ( 3.13.15)
[A]: Exit sensor bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Exit sensor ( x 1)
B140R886.WMF
SM 3-153
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
3.14 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
These adjustments must be performed after replacing any of the following parts:
• Scanner wires
• Lens block
• Scanner motor
• Polygon motor
• Tandem tray side fences
• Memory All Clear
3.14.1 PRINTING
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3) No. 18 to print the test pattern for the following procedures.
3. After completing these printing adjustments, be sure to set SP 2-902-3 to 0 again.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
1. Check the leading edge registration, and adjust it using SP1-001.
Specification: 3 ± 2mm.
2. Check side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following SP modes.
Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)
SP mode Specification
SP1002-001
Tray 2 (Universal Tray) SP1002-002 0 ± 1.5
Tray 3 (Universal Tray) SP1002-003
Tray 4 SP1002-004 Japan Only
By-pass Tray SP1002-005 0 ± 1.5
A
B
Duplex Tray SP1002-007 0 ± 1.5
B140R887.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-154
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins, and adjust them with the following SP modes:
SP2101 Print Erase Margin
Leading Edge
Trailing Edge
Left edge
Right edge
SP mode Specification
SP2101-001
SP2101-002
2.5
± 2 mm
SP2101-003
SP2101-004
2 ± 1.5 mm
C
D
A: Trailing edge blank margin
B: Right edge blank margin
C: Leading edge blank margin
D: Left edge blank margin
A
B
B140R888.WMF
Registration Buckle Adjustment
When the customer is using special paper, buckle adjustment may be required if paper feed problems arise.
• If the buckle is too large , this can cause wrinkling, creasing, or Z-fold jams caused by sheets overtaking the sheets ahead of them in the paper path.
• If the buckle is too small , this can cause jams at the registration roller or skew during paper feed.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Open SP1003.
• To prevent wrinkling, creasing, or Z-fold jams, set a smaller value.
• To prevent jams at the registration roller or to eliminate skew, set a larger value.
SP1003-001
SP1003-002
SP1003-003
Registration Buckle Adjustment – Tray, LCT
Registration Buckle Adjustment – Duplex Tray
Registration Buckle Adjustment – By-pass Tray
Adjustment range
Initial value
-9 mm ~ +9 mm (small ~ large buckle)
0 mm (Buckle = 10 mm)
SM 3-155
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
3.14.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use an S-5-S test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them with the following SP modes if necessary.
A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration
SP No. Name
SP4010 Scanner
Leading Edge
Registration
SP4011 Scanner Sideto-Side
Registration
B
A
B140R889.WMF
Initial Comment
0
A positive value shifts the image away from the leading edge, a negative value shifts it toward the leading edge.
0
A positive value shifts the image toward the right edge, a negative value shifts it toward the left edge.
Magnification
Use an S-5-S test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Main Scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check magnification, and then SP2909-001 (Main
Scan Magnification - Copy) to adjust magnification if required. Specification: ± 2%.
Sub Scan Magnification
A
B140R890.WMF
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4008 (Scanner
Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if necessary.
Specification: ± 0.9%.
A: Main scan magnification
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-156
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
3.14.3 ADF SCANNING ADJUSTMENTS
Vertical Black Lines
Vertical black lines in scanned images may be caused by dust or scratches on the
ADF exposure glass. If the problem cannot be solved by cleaning the ADF exposure glass, execute SP4018 (Scanner Optical Axis Adjustment).
1. Adjust the scanner stopping position with SP4018-003 (just input a new value).
2. Store this value in the machine with SP4018-004.
3. Adjust the ADF registration for the front side scan with SP6006-003.
4. Make a test copy to check that the problem has been solved.
DIP Switch Settings (ADF Main Board)
SW 101
1 2 3 4
Operation Mode
OFF ON OFF OFF Free run (Simplex: continuous scanning)
ON ON OFF OFF Free run (Duplex: no registration) SP6009 (ADF Free Run)
ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
ON OFF OFF ON Free run (Entrance mode
*1 run
OFF ON ON ON Motor
, simplex, no registration)
*1
: The entrance mode disregards paper size. Skew correction is performed at the scanning roller.
ADF Skew Correction
[A]
B140R891.WMF
If the skew with A4 SEF paper is more than 0.5/200 mm in the main scan direction, you can adjust the position of the ADF hinge [A] or adjust the appropriate SP codes below.
SM 3-157
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
6006* ADF Registration Adjustment
001 ADF Horizontal Registration (Front)
002
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front in ADF mode.
[–3~+3/0.1 mm]
ADF Horizontal Registration (Back)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the back in ADF mode.
[–3~+3/0.1 mm]
003
004
ADF Vertical Registration (Front)
Adjusts the vertical registration for the front in ADF mode.
[–30 ~+24/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+24 = +4.1 mm
ADF Vertical Registration (Back)
Adjusts the vertical registration for the back in ADF mode.
[–30 ~+30/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+30 = +5.1 mm
005
006
007
008
ADF Buckle Adjustment 1
Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction sensor/entrance roller. A larger setting causes more buckling.
[–12.0~+12/1 mm]
-12 = -3.0 mm
+12 = +3.0 mm
ADF Buckle Adjustment 2
Adjusts the roller timing at the interval sensor/scanning roller. A larger setting causes more buckling.
[–8.0~+8/1 mm]
-8 = -2 mm
+8 = +2 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Front)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the front.
[–20~+20/1 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Back)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the back.
[–20~+20/1 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
NOTE: Normally, the interval sensor detects the leading edge of small originals
(B6, A5, HLT), or originals for duplex copying, and delays the start of the scanning roller for the prescribed number of pulses to buckle the paper and correct skew. This feature can be switched on for all paper sizes with SP6020 (ADF Contact Mode In/Out). However, switching this feature on for all sizes reduces scanning speed slightly.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
3-158
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
After clearing the memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu.
These items are for design use only. To avoid causing an error, do not touch the Reset key while doing this procedure.
1. Press , press , and then press 5 times to open the Self-
Diagnostics menu.
B140R892.WMF
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press ).
B140R893.WMF
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker ( + ) appears exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the calibration settings.
SM 3-159
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 OVERVIEW
This section contains the troubleshooting procedures for the B064 Series, B140
Series, and B246 Series machines.
A full list of SC codes is given for each series. When you do troubleshooting on a machine, refer to the correct table:
• B064 Series SC Code Table: Section 4.2
• B140/B246/D052 Series SC Code Table: Section 4.3
Important:
The general information in this “Overview” section applies to the B064 Series,
B140 Series, and B246 Series machines.
• “Other Problems (B064/B140/B246/D052 Series)” also applies to all the machines of these three Series.
SM 4-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
4.1.1 RECOVERY METHODS
When an error occurs during downloading, an error code is displayed on the operation panel.
• If the download procedure can be re-started, re-start the download procedure.
• If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for other than the GW controller, replace the board where the downloaded program is stored.
• If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for the GW controller, set DIP
SW 1 to ON. Power the machine off and on to start the downloading program.
After downloading has completed, set the DIP SW to OFF then power the machine off and on again.
4.1.2 IMPORTANT SP CODES
SP5802
SP7801
SP7832
SP7911 (B064)
SP7801 (B140/B246)
SP7990 (B064)
SP7403 (B140/B246)
Free Run Mode Execute this SP to force base engine to run in the free run mode for testing.
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. Refer to the detailed tables in Section "5. Service
Tables”.
Switches electrical components one by one for testing. Refer to the detailed tables in Section "5. Service Tables”.
Prints the SMC Report. Some SC codes (logged SPs) are shown only in the SMC Report and do not show on the operation panel display.
ROM Version Display.
Self-Diagnostic Result
Display
Displays the version number of the main machine and connected peripherals.
Execute this SP to display a list of error codes. No errors have occurred if nothing is displayed.
Firmware Version
Status of Issued SC
Displays the current numbers of all versions of the firmware in the system.
Execute to display the following information about the most recently issued SC: 1) Source file name, 2) SC number, 3) Result
NOTE: For more information about these and other SP codes, see “4. Service
Tables”.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES
Display
01 Reboot after card insert E01
Details
Controller ROM update error 1
↕
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
When the update break data is stored in NVRAM, the break module information and the decompression module capable of writing do not match.
02 Download Error E02
Power off/on
03 Download Error E03
Power off/on
Controller ROM update error 2.
Error occurs during ROM update program initialization.
Controller ROM update error 3
The ROM for the write operation does not exist.
04 Download Error E04
Power off/on
Controller ROM update error 4
GZIP data confirmation fails. (CRC value check)
05 Download Error E05
Power off/on
Controller ROM update error 5
Error occurs when writing to the device.
06 Download Error E06
Power off/on
Controller ROM update error 6
CPU clock error.
19
20
Download Error E19
Power off/on
Down Error E20
Power Off/On
21 Download Error E21
Power Off/On
Controller ROM update error 7
Schedule data is unclear.
System error 1 (+SC991)
The physical address cannot be mapped. Software/hardware is defective
System error 2 (+SC991)
There is not sufficient memory to download.
Recovery
• Use the correct card
• Cycle the machine off/on to rewrite
• Cycle the machine off/on
• Install the missing
ROM DIMM
• Cycle the machine off/on
• Set DIP SW 1 to ON and retry
• Replace RAM DIMM
• Replace controller board
• Cycle the machine off/on
• Set DIP SW 1 to ON and retry
• Replace RAM DIMM
• Replace controller board
• Turn the machine power off/on.
• Set controller DIPSW-
1 to ON to force the machine to write to
ROM.
• If you cannot force the machine to write, replace the controller board.
• Software defective
• Cycle the machine off/on and re-try
• Replace controller board
• Cycle the machine off/on and re-try.
• Replace RAM
• Replace the controller board
SM 4-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Display
22
23
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
40
Download Error E22
Module ID
Card No xx/xx
SC991
Download Error E24
Power Off/On
No Valid Data E30
Reboot After Card
Insert E31
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
32 Reboot After Card
Insert E32
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
No Valid Data E33
No Valid Data E34
No Valid Data E35
No Valid Data E36
No Valid Data E37
Download Error E40
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
41 Download Error E41
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx defective.
System error 4
System error 5 defective.
Details
System error 3 (+SC991)
Data fails to decompress. Card
“Selfupdate” does not execute.
Software defective.
Card read/write error. Software or card
Download dysfunction 1
Print download is not possible. Cannot download to HDD because HDD not installed or defective.
Download dysfunction 2
Download continuity error with more than one card. The second or later card is not compatible.
Download dysfunction 3
Download interrupted because card is not correct, or power failure interrupted download.
Download dysfunction 4
Card version error. Attempted to download program using a card with the wrong version number.
Download dysfunction 5
Specification error. DOM card set in
EXP machine, or vice versa.
Download dysfunction 6
Wrong model. The inserted card is for another model.
Download dysfunction 7
Module error. The program that you are attempting to download does not exist on the machine, or the contact points at the card and the machine slot are not connected.
Download dysfunction 8
Edit option card error. You attempted to employ a used card.
Download result failure 1
Engine download failure.
Download result failure 2
Fax download failure.
Recovery
• Cycle the machine off/on and re-try.
• Replace card
• Replace controller board
• Cycle the machine off/on and re-try
• Set DIP SW 1 to ON and re-try
• Replace the controller board
• Cycle the machine off/on and re-try
• Replace the card
• Replace the controller board
• HDD defective
• HDD harness disconnected, defective
• Set the correct cards in the correct order
• Use the correct card
• If power failure caused the failure, remove the card and insert another.
• Use the correct card
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use the correct card
Use the correct card
Use the correct card, inserted correctly
Install a ROM DIMM if none is installed
Use an unused card
Cycle the machine off/on and re-try
Cycle the machine off/on and re-try
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Display
42 Download Error E42
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Details
Download result failure 3
Operation panel or language download failed. For this error, sometimes the message may not be displayed.
43 Download Error E43
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download result failure 4
Print download failed.
44 Download Error E44 Download result failure 5
Module ID Card No.
The data targeted for the write operation could not be accessed.
50 No Valid Data E50
•
Recovery
• Cycle the machine off/on and re-try
Cycle the machine off/on and re-try
Download invalid
The source data for the update could not be authenticated.
Remote ROM update failure 1
The source data for the ROM update is corrupted because the machine is operating and an SC code has been issued.
Remote ROM update failure 2
The source data received for the ROM update is corrupted; it failed a SUM check due to its abnormal length.
Download result failure 6
The previous download in progress was cancelled.
• Turn the machine power off/on.
• Set controller DIPSW-
1 to ON to force the machine to write
• If you cannot force the machine to write, replace the controller board.
• Use the correct SD card.
• Turn the machine power off/on and try again.
• Try again with the correct data.
• Do the download procedure again.
SM 4-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
4.1.4 JAM DETECTION
SENSOR LOCATIONS
The flashing portion of the jam position display on the operation panel indicates the location of the paper jam, then lights if any paper remains after jam removal.
However, paper may remain in the paper path at locations other than where the jam was removed.
The illustration below shows the locations of the jam sensors.
Paper exit sensor
Exit unit entrance sensor
Fusing unit paper exit sensor
Hot roller
Transfer belt
OPC
Duplex entrance sensor
Duplex inverter exit sensor
Reverse trigger roller
Registration sensor
Relay sensor
Transport sensor 1 Duplex transport sensors 1, 2, 3
Paper feed sensor 1
Tray 1
Paper feed sensor 2
Tray 2
Paper feed sensor 3
Tray 3
Transport sensor 2
Transport sensor 3
B246T901.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
4.1.5 TIMING CHARTS
Feed, Transport, Feed Out: Face-up
Paper feed motor
(1) (3)
Paper feed sensor
(2)
Vertical transport sensor
(4)
Lower Relay motor
(5) (6)
Relay sensor
(7)
Registration sensor
(8)
OVERVIEW
Registration motor
(9)
Fusing unit paper exit sensor
(10) (12)
Exit unit entrance sensor
(11)
Paper exit sensor
B246T902.WMF
(1): Paper feed motor ON → Paper feed sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(2): Paper feed motor ON → Vertical transport sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(3): Vertical transport sensor ON → Paper feed sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(4): Vertical transport sensor ON → Vertical transport sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(5): Lower relay motor ON → Relay sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(6): Vertical transport sensor OFF → Relay sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(7): Relay sensor ON → Registration sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(8): Relay sensor OFF → Registration sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(9): Registration motor ON → Fusing unit paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(10): Fusing unit paper exit sensor ON → Exit unit entrance sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(11): Exit unit entrance sensor ON → Paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(12): Registration motor OFF → Paper exit sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
SM 4-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Transport, Inverter, Feed Out: Face-down
Registration sensor
Fusing unit paper exit sensor (1) (3)
Exit unit entrance sensor
(2)
Duplex entrance sensor
(4)
Inverter exit sensor
(5) (6)
Paper exit sensor
B246T903.WMF
(1): From the registration sensor to the fusing unit exit, jam detection is the same as face-up feed out.
(2): Exit unit entrance sensor ON → Duplex entrance sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(3): Registration sensor OFF → Duplex entrance sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(4): Duplex entrance sensor ON → Inverter exit sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(5): Inverter exit sensor ON → Paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(6): Duplex entrance sensor OFF → Paper exit sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time. (Paper remains at the duplex unit exit.)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Duplex Transport
OVERVIEW
Duplex entrance sensor
(1)
Inverter Exit sensor
(2)
Duplex transport sensor 1
(4)
(3)
Duplex transport sensor 2
(5)
(6)
Duplex transport sensor 3
(7)
Relay sensor
B246T904.WMF
(1): Duplex entrance sensor ON → Inverter exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(2): Inverter exit sensor ON → Duplex transport sensor 1 does not switch on at the correct time.
(3): Duplex transport sensor 1 ON → Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch on at the correct time.
(4): Duplex entrance sensor ON → Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(5): Duplex transport sensor 2 ON → Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch ON at the correct time.
(6): Duplex transport sensor 2 OFF → Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch OFF at the correct time.
(7): Duplex transport sensor 3 ON → Relay sensor does not switch on at the correct time.
SM 4-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
4.1.6 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software:
• If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally with the program software only partially downloaded.
• When download processing execution starts, “Downloading…” is displayed and when downloading has completed successfully, the message is cleared.
• If the download is interrupted when the “Downloading …” message is displayed, the machine does not attempt a re-try.
• The program that downloads firmware from an IC card is part of the GW controller software. If downloading this software is interrupted, the program stored in the machine may be corrupted. Because of this, it may not be possible to restart the downloading program. (In addition, if the GW controller software cannot be downloaded, other software on other IC cards cannot be downloaded.)
However, it may be possible to restart the program without replacing the board by setting DIP SW 1 on the controller to ON, and re-starting.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.2 B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.2.1 B064 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition
A
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation panel.
The machine is disabled. The user cannot reset the
SC.
Enter SP mode, then turn the main power switch off and on.
B
SCs that disable only the features that use the defective item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
C
D
SCs that are not shown on the operation panel.
They are internally logged.
Turning the operation switch or main power switch off then on resets SCs Displayed on the operation panel. These are re-displayed if the error occurs again.
Logging only
Turn the operation switch or main power switch off and on.
NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before replacing motors or sensors.
3) When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode, the display does not indicate the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the
SP mode.
SM 4-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.2.2 B064 SERIES SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
SC100: Scanning System
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
At trigger on, the lamp was not detected on.
The scanner HP sensor does not detect the on condition during initialization or copying.
• Exposure lamp defective
• Lamp regulator defective
• Exposure lamp connector defective
• Dirty standard white plate
• Dirty scanner mirror or scanner mirror out of position
• SBU board defective
• SBU connector defective
• IPU defective
• BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) defective.
• Scanner motor defective
• Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner motor disconnected.
• Scanner HP sensor defective.
• Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected.
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage installation incorrect.
The scanner HP sensor does not detect the off condition during initialization or copying.
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition during original scanning.
• BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) defective.
• Scanner motor defective.
• Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner motor disconnected.
• Scanner HP sensor defective.
• Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected.
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage installation incorrect.
• BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) defective.
• Scanner motor defective.
• Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner motor disconnected.
• Scanner HP sensor defective.
• Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected.
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage installation incorrect.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
SC No.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
Symptom Possible Cause
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition during original scanning.
• BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) defective.
• Scanner motor defective.
• Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner motor disconnected.
• Scanner HP sensor defective.
• Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected.
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage installation incorrect.
Automatic adjustment of the SBU fails when the machine is switched on.
• Exposure lamp defective.
• Exposure lamp regulator defective.
• Harness between exposure lamp and lamp regulator is disconnected.
• White plate installed incorrectly or is dirty.
• Scanning mirrors of the exposure unit are dirty or out of position.
• SBU board defective.
• VIB board defective.
• Harness between SBU, VIB disconnected.
• Harness between VIB, BCU disconnected.
• IPU defective
• BCU defective
After the SBU switches on, the
BCU detects one of the following conditions on the SBU:
• 1 s after power on, the SYDI signal does not go high, even after 1 retry.
• 1 s after power on, the SYDI signal goes high, but the SBU ID could not be read after 3 attempts.
• SBU defective.
• VIB defective
• Harness (40-pin shielded) between the
SBU, VIB is disconnected.
• Harness (shielded cable) between the
VIB, BCU is disconnected.
• IPU defective
SM 4-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
After the CIS lamp trigger goes on, the CIS lamp is not detected on.
Detecting the lamp on or off determines the peak white level value for shading correction. (If the peak level is determined to be below a certain level, the CIS lamp is judged to be off.)
• CIS lamp defective.
• CIS power supply board defective.
• Harness between lamp and power supply board is disconnected.
• Harness between CIS, ADF is disconnected.
• CIS exposure glass dirty.
• White roller dirty or installed incorrectly.
• CIS unit defective.
• PSU defective
Automatic adjustment of the CIS unit failed.
• CIS unit defective.
• CIS exposure glass dirty.
• White roller dirty or installed incorrectly.
• PSU power supply (+5V, –12V) is abnormal.
• IPU defective
When the CIS is powered on, the
ADF detects one of the following abnormal conditions on the CIS unit:
• The SOUT signal does not go high within 1 s after power on.
• The SOUT signal goes high within 1 s after power on, but the
SBU ID cannot be read after 3 attempts.
• CIS unit defective.
• Harness between the CIS, ADF is disconnected.
• PSU power (5V) is abnormal.
• BCU, IPU defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC300:
Image Development System (1)
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
The feedback voltage from the charge corona unit is detected too high 9 times.
When the high voltage is output to the corona grid, feedback voltage exceeds the prescribed value 9 times.
• Charge corona power pack defective
• Charge corona harness disconnected
• Poor charge corona unit connection
•
•
•
Charge corona power pack defective
Charge corona harness disconnected
Poor charge corona unit connection
The charge corona wire cleaner motor is detected:
• Motor locks within 4 s after switching on, or does not lock within 30 s.
• Motor locks within 10 s after reversing, or does not lock within
30 s.
• Charge corona wire cleaner motor defective
• BCU board defective
The current at the charge corona motor is detected less than 83 mA.
• Charge corona wire cleaner motor connector is defective or not connected.
When SC310~SC317 are logged, the machine halts without displaying the SC number. These SC codes log an abnormal condition at the potential sensor only when SP3901 (Auto Process Control) is set to on.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
During drum potential sensor calibration, the drum potential sensor output voltage does not meet specification when test voltages (–100V, –800V) are applied to the drum.
During drum potential sensor calibration, the drum potential sensor output voltage does not meet specification when test voltages (–100V, –800V) are applied to the drum.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• BCU defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• BCU defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
SM 4-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
During drum potential sensor calibration when adjusting the drum potential (VD), the drum potential sensor detects VD higher than VG
(grid voltage).
-or-
When adjusting VD (drum surface potential of black areas after exposure), even after 5 adjustments of VG (charge corona grid potential), VD could not be set in the target range (–800 ± 10 + VL +
130V)
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• BCU defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
• Charge corona unit worn out, dirty
During drum potential sensor calibration when adjusting the drum potential (VH) for LD power adjustment, the first time the VH pattern is made, the drum potential sensor detects that VH is more than
500V:
VH > |–500 + VL + 130| V
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• BCU defective
• OPC connector defective
• LD defective
During drum potential sensor calibration, when –100V is applied to the drum, the output value is out of the prescribed range.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• BCU defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
During drum potential sensor calibration, when –800V is applied to the drum, the output value is out of the prescribed range.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• BCU defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
During drum potential sensor calibration, when VL is adjusted, the pattern surface potential VL pattern is not within range 0V ~ –400V. (VL is the potential after exposing a white pattern.)
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• BCU defective
• OPC connector defective
• Charge corona power pack defective
• Development power pack defective
The laser writing signal (F-GATE) for the IPU does not go LOW within
60 s.
• IPU board defective
• PCI bus between controller board, IPU board defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
After the polygon motor reaches standard rotation speed and the LD unit fires for 500 ms, the laser synchronization detector does not generate a signal.
• Harness between detector and I/F disconnected or damaged
• Detector is installed incorrectly.
• Detector board is defective
• Controller board defective
• IPU board defective
• LDB defective
The ready signal does not go low within 20 s after the polygonal mirror motor turns on or changes speed of rotation.
• Harness between I/F and polygon motor disconnected or defective
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• IPU board defective
The ready signal does not go high within 20 s after the polygonal mirror motor turns off.
• Harness between I/F and polygon motor disconnected or defective
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• IPU board defective
The XSCRDY signal goes high while the polygonal mirror motor turns on, even though there was no demand for either turning off the motor or changing the motor speed.
• Harness between the polygon motor and
I/F disconnected or defective.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• IPU board defective
During exposure, while the polygon motor is rotating, the XSCRDY signal goes high.
• Harness between the polygon motor and
I/F disconnected or defective.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• IPU board defective
TD sensor output voltage (Vt), measured during each copy cycle, is detected 10 times at one of the following levels:
Vt = 0.5 volts or lower
Vt = 4.0 volts or higher
• TD sensor defective
• TD sensor harness disconnected
• TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
• BCU defective
• Toner bottle motor defective
Note: When the TD sensor is defective, the toner supply is controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor.
SM 4-17
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) is 2.5 volts or higher even though the control voltage is set to the minimum value (PWM =
0)
When this error occurs, SP2-906-1 reads 0.00V.
Note: This SC is released only after correct adjustment of the TD sensor has been achieved. Switching the machine off and on will cancel the
SC display, but does not release ID sensor toner supply.
• TD sensor defective
• TD sensor harness disconnected
• TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
• BCU defective
• Toner bottle motor defective
Note : When the TD sensor is defective, the toner supply is controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor.
During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) does not enter the target range (3.0 ± 0.1V) within 20 s.
When this error occurs, the indication of SP2-906-1 reads
0.00V.
Note : This SC is released only after correct adjustment of the TD sensor has been achieved.
Switching the machine off and on will cancel the SC display, but does not release
ID sensor toner supply.
• TD sensor defective
• TD sensor harness disconnected
• TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
• BCU defective
The high voltage applied to the development unit is detected 10 times higher than the upper limit
(45%) of PWM.
• Development power pack defective
• Development bias connection defective
• Development bias connector disconnected or defective
One of the following ID sensor output voltages was detected twice consecutively when checking the ID sensor pattern.
Vsp ≥ 2.5V
Vsg < 2.5
Vsp = 0V
Vsg = 0
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• BCU defective
• Defect at ID sensor pattern writing
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
The ID sensor output voltage is
5.0V and the PWM signal input to the ID sensor is 0 when checking the ID sensor pattern.
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• BCU defective
• Defect during ID sensor pattern writing
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
For 2 s during the ID sensor pattern check, the ID sensor pattern edge voltage is not 2.5V or the pattern edge is not detected within 800 ms.
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• BCU defective
• Defect during ID sensor pattern writing
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
One of the following ID sensor output voltages is detected at ID sensor initialization.
• Vsg < 4.0V when the maximum
PWM input (255) is applied to the
•
ID sensor.
Vsg 4.0V when the minimum
PWM input (0) is applied to the
ID sensor.
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• BCU defective
• Defect during ID sensor pattern writing
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
20 s after the start of automatic adjustment, Vsg cannot be adjusted to target (4.0 ± 0.2V).
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• BCU defective
• Defect during ID sensor pattern writing
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
Drum potential sensor output is out of the target range (-100 - -400V) when reading the drum voltage for the ID sensor pattern.
• Drum potential sensor defective
• Drum potential sensor harness disconnected
• Drum potential sensor connector defective
• IOB defective
• Defect during ID sensor pattern writing
• Charge power pack defective
• Charge corona wire dirty
SM 4-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC400: Image Development System (2)
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
402 D
430 D
440 D
441 D
490 D
495 D
496 D
497 D
When the transfer is output, the feedback voltage remains higher than 4V for 60 ms.
• Transfer power pack defective
• Poor connection between the transfer current terminal and the transfer power pack
Transfer output abnormal release detection
When the transfer is output, there is hardly any feedback voltage within
60 ms even with application of 24%
PWM.
•
•
•
Transfer power pack defective
Transfer unit harness disconnected
Transfer connector disconnected, defective
Quenching lamp error
At the completion of auto process control initialization, the potential of the drum surface detected by the potential sensor is more than –
400V, the prescribed value.
Main motor lock
The main motor lock signal remains low for 2 seconds while the main motor is on.
Development motor lock
• Quenching lamp defective
• Quenching lamp harness disconnected
• Quenching lamp connector disconnected or defective
•
•
Too much load on the drive mechanism
Main motor defective
• Too much load on the drive mechanism
• Development motor defective
The development motor lock signal remains high for 2 seconds while the development motor is on.
Main fan abnormal
The main fan motor lock signal goes high for 5 s while the fan is on.
Toner recycling unit error
•
•
Too much load on the motor, motor is blocked by something
Fan connector disconnected
Encoder pulse does not change for
3 s after the main motor switches on.
Toner collection bottle error
The toner collection bottle set switch remains off when the front door is closed.
Toner collection motor error
The toner collection motor connector set signal remains off for
1 s.
• Too much load on the drive mechanism
• Toner end sensor detective, disconnected
•
•
•
•
No toner collection bottle set
Poor connection on the switch connector
Toner collection motor defective
Motor connector disconnected
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-20
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
• The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate.
• Paper height sensor actuator does not move away from the sensor for 4 counts.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle
• The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate.
• Paper height sensor actuator does not move away from the sensor for 4 counts.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle
• The lift sensor is not activated within 13 s after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate.
• At power on, or when the tray set sensor goes on after tray inserted, the tray continues to lower for 5 s.
The motor stops but restarts when the tray is re-inserted.
• Tray lift motor defective or poor connection
• Lift sensor defective or poor connection
Japan only.
510 B
One of the following conditions is detected:
• The LD signal from the feed motor is detected abnormal for
50 ms after the motor switches on.
• At power on, the motor is detected loose or disconnected.
LCT tray malfunction
One of the following conditions is detected:
• When the bottom plate is lifted, the upper limit sensor does not come on for 18 s.
• When the bottom plate is lowered, the lower limit sensor does not come on for 18 s.
• After lift begins, the upper limit sensor does not switch on before the pick-up solenoid switches on.
• The paper end sensor switches on during lift and the upper limit sensor does not switch on for 2.5 s, and a message prompts user to reset paper.
• Feed motor defective
• Feed motor connector disconnected
• Obstacle interfering with operation of motor
• Tray lift motor defective or connector disconnected
• Lift sensor defective or disconnected
• Pick-up solenoid defective or disconnected
• Paper end sensor defective
SM 4-21
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
One of the conditions is detected:
• The rear fence does not reach the return position within 10 s after the rear fence motor switches on, or does not return to the HP.
• The HP sensor and return sensor switch on at the same time.
516 B Tandem side fence motor error
The side fences do not reach the fully open or closed position within
2 seconds after the side fence motor switches on.
• Rear fence motor defective or poor connection
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
• Motor mechanical overload
• Return sensor or HP sensor defective or dirty
• Side fence motor defective or poor connection
• Motor mechanical overload
• Side fence positioning sensor defective or dirty
When the jogger fence moves to the home position, the jogger HP sensor does not turn on even if the jogger fence motor has moved the jogger fence 153.5 mm.
• Paper or other obstacle has jammed mechanism
• Sensor connector disconnected or defective
• Sensor defective
When the jogger fence moves from the home position, the jogger fence
HP sensor does not turn off even if the jogger motor has moved the jogger fence 153.5 mm.
• Paper or other obstacle has jammed mechanism
• Sensor connector disconnected or defective
• Sensor defective
• The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor is below 7 ° C for
35 seconds.
• The center thermistor (noncontact) abnormal.
• Thermistor open
• Thermistor connector defective
• Thermistor damaged or warped
• Fusing temperature –15% less than the standard input voltage
• After power on, or after closing the front door, the hot roller does not reach the 80 ° C control temperature within 360 s.
• After the fusing lamp temperature exceeds 80 ° C, temperature does not change 2 degrees within 20 s.
• Fusing lamp disconnected
• Thermistor warped or installed incorrectly
• Thermostat operating
• Central thermistor detected a temperature of 230 ° C at the center of the hot roller.
• End thermistor detected 220 ° C x
100 ms 5 times at the end of the hot roller.
• PSU defective
• BCU defective
The BCU detects an overheat error even if the protection in the software does not work.
• PSU defective
• BCU defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-22
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
After hot roller reaches the warmup temperature, the fusing lamps continued full capacity output for 55 s without the hot roller rotating (for a total of 45s).
• Fusing thermistor out of position
One of the following conditions is detected 10 times:
• When the main switch is on, the frequency measured by the number of zero cross signals for
500 ms is larger than 66Hz or smaller than 45 Hz.
• The interval between one zero cross signal and the next is 7.5 ms or shorter 3 times consecutively for 500 ms.
• Noise on the ac power line
Web end detected 5 times within
500 ms and web motor continues to rotate 40 s. If web end is detected for another 400 ms, then the SC is logged.
• Web end (requires replacement)
• Web end sensor defective
Note: After replacing the web with a new one, reset SP1902 001 to 0 to release SC550.
The toner collection motor sensor output does not change for 3 seconds while the toner collection motor is on.
• Toner collection motor defective
• Motor drive defective
• Toner collection motor sensor connector defective
599 D
• Motor overload
1-bin Exit Motor Error ( should only occur in Japanese models )
The transport lock sensor output does not change within 300 ms after the motor switches on.
•
•
Motor overload
Motor drive defective
SM 4-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC600: Data Communication
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
621 D
623 D
624 D
626 D
627 D
630 D
• BCU does not communicate with scanner unit within 0.8 s after power on.
• BCU does not detect a break signal after connecting to scanner unit.
• Communication error detected 3 times.
•
•
Serial line connection unstable
External noise on the line
BCU ↔ ADF communication/timeout abnormal
After 1 data frame is sent to the
ADF, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
BCU ↔ ADF communication/break reception abnormal
During communication a break
(Low) signal was received from the
ADF.
•
•
Serial line connection unstable
Harness disconnected or defective
BCU ↔ ADF communication/command abnormal
An command that cannot be executed was sent from the main machine to the ADF.
• A software error, result of an abnormal procedure.
BCU ↔ ADF communication/timeout error
After 1 data frame is sent to the finisher MBX, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
•
•
Serial line connection unstable
External noise on the line
BCU ↔ Finisher communication/break error
During communication with the finisher MBX, the BCU received a break (Low) signal from the finisher.
•
•
Serial line connection unstable
External noise on the line
BCU ↔ Tray 1~3 communication/timeout error
After 1 data frame is sent to the trays, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
•
•
Serial line connection unstable
External noise on the line
BCU ↔ Tray 1~3 communication/break reception error
During communication with the finisher trays, the BCU received a break (Low) signal.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
BCU ↔ LCT communication/timeout error
After 1 data frame is sent to the
LCT, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
BCU ↔ LCT communication/break reception error
During communication with the
LCT, the BCU received a break
(Low) signal.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
CSS (RSS) communication error between line adapter and CSS center
Japan only
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom
After 1 data frame is sent to the device, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
Possible Cause
• The serial line from the device to the copier is unstable, disconnected, or defective.
During communication with the device, the BCU received a break
(Low) signal.
After installation of the device, a message alerts user to a backup
RAM error.
• The serial line from the device to the copier is unstable, disconnected, or defective.
• Device control board defective
• Device control board backup battery defective
670 D
672 D
690 D
691 D
692 D
After installation of the device a message alerts user to a battery voltage abnormal error.
• Device control board defective
• Device control board backup battery defective
BCU ↔ Controller data transfer error 1
Data is sent from the BCU to the controller, but the transmission causes a checksum error.
• The error is logged but the machine can continue to operate.
BCU ↔ Controller data transfer error 2
Data is sent from the BCU to the controller, but the transmission causes a frame error.
• The error is logged but the machine can continue to operate.
Engine startup error
•
•
Engine does not respond within
30 s after power on.
Engine down detected suddenly during power on and warmup.
Controller startup error
• After power on the line between the controller and the operation panel does not open for normal operation.
• After normal startup, communication with the controller ceases.
GAVD Block 12 bus error
• BCU installation incorrect
• BCU defective
• Sudden communication reset occurred between the BCU and the controller.
•
•
•
•
Controller stalled
Controller installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
Operation panel harness disconnected or defective
The register for this block is set for an error.
GAVD FCI Block I2 bus error
The register for this block is set for an error.
CDIC GAVD Block I2 bus error
The register for this block is set for an error.
• IPU defective
•
•
IPU defective
IPU defective
SM 4-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Symptom
701 D
720 D
Pick-up roller HP sensor signal does not change after the pick-up motor has turned on.
ADF bottom plate motor error
• Bottom plate position sensor does not detect the plate after the bottom plate lift motor switches on to lift the plate.
• Bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the plate after the bottom plate motor reverses to lower the plate.
Finisher transport motor error
The encoder pulse of the transport motor does not change state
(high/low) within 600 ms and does not change after 2 retries.
• Pick-up roller HP sensor defective
• Pick-up motor defective
• Timing belt slipping, out of position
• ADF main board defective
• Bottom plate position sensor defective
• Bottom plate HP sensor defective
• Bottom plate motor defective
• ADF main board defective
• Finisher transport motor defective
• Transport motor harness disconnected, or defective
• Finisher main board defective
• The finisher jogger HP sensor remains de-activated for more
1,000 pulses when returning to home position.
• The finisher jogger HP sensor remains activated for more than
1,000 pulses when moving away from home position.
• Jogger HP sensor defective
• Jogger mechanism overload
• Jogger motor defective (not rotating)
• Finisher main board defective
• Harness disconnected or defective
Stapling does not finish within 450 ms after the staple hammer motor switches on and the stapler jams.
Stapler is released from the reverse lock status. If the stapler does not operate within 450 ms, even in the reverse lock position, then the SC is logged.
• Staple jam
• Stapler operation overload
• Staple hammer motor defective
• Motor connector disconnected, or defective
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not activate within the prescribed number of pulses after the stack feed-out motor turns on and does not activate after 2 retries.
The paper height sensor does not activate within the prescribed time after the upper tray lift motor turns on, or the sensor remains on after the motor reverses to lower the tray.
Possible Cause
• Stack feed-out HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected or defective
• Stack feed-out motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Motor overload
• Upper tray paper height sensor defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Tray lift motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Tray lift motor overload
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
The stapler motor switches on but the motor does not return to the home position within the prescribed number of pulses. After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Stapler rotation motor defective
• Poor stapler rotation motor connection
• Stapler rotation sensor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Rotation motor overload
The punch HP sensor does not activate within the prescribed time the punch motor turns on.
• Punch HP sensor defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Punch motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
730 B
• Poor punch motor overload
The stapler HP sensor does activate within the prescribed time after the stapler motor turns on and moves the stapler away from home position. After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
•
•
•
•
•
Stapler HP sensor defective
Sensor harness disconnected, defective
Stapler movement motor defective
Finisher main board defective
Stapler movement motor overload
The shift roller HP sensor does not activate within the prescribed time after the shift roller motor turns on.
After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Shift roller HP sensor defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Shift roller motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Shift roller motor overload
After the lift motor switches on to lift the tray, paper height sensor 2 does not detect the top of the paper stack, or after the motor reverses to lower the stack the top of the stack remains detected (the status of paper height sensor 1 does not change). After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Paper height sensor 1 or 2 defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Tray lift motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Tray lift motor overload
• The pre-stack motor starts but does not return to the home position within 400 pulses. After
2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Motor does not return to the home position within 280 pulses immediately before or after prestacking. After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
•
•
•
•
•
Jogger HP sensor defective
Sensor harnesses disconnected, defective
Pre-stack motor defective
Finisher main board defective
Pre-stack motor overload
The paper exit guide plate motor starts but the paper exit guide plate
HP sensor does not activate within
750 ms. After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Guide plate HP sensor defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Paper exit guide plate motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Guide plate motor overload.
SM 4-27
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
The hopper that holds the waste from staple trimming is full.
The pressure plate motor switches on but does not return to the home position within the prescribed time after 2 counts.
• Staple waste hopper full
• Staple waste sensor defective
• HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Motor overload
The folder plate motor turns on but the plate does not return to the home position within the prescribed time for 2 counts.
• Plate HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Folder plate motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
740 B
• Folder plate motor overload
Finisher front saddle-stitch stapler motor error
Saddle-stitch stapler motor fails to operate within 450 ms within 2 counts..
• HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Stapler motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
741 B
• Stapler motor overload
Finisher rear saddle-stitch stapler motor error
Saddle-stitch stapler motor fails to operate within 450 ms within 2 counts..
• HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Stapler motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Stapler motor overload
The jogger motor turns on but the side fences to not return to the home position within 340 pulses for
2 counts.
• HP sensors defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Motor overload
The jogger fences did not return to their horizontal home positions on both ends of the unit, or to their down home positions within the prescribed number of pulses. Only staple mode is disabled. Shift output, or output to the proof tray can still be used.
•
•
•
Jogger lift sensor or jogger fence sensor connectors disconnected, loose, or damaged.
• Jogger lift sensor or jogger fence sensor is defective.
Main harness connection loose or broken.
Shift jogger motor or shift jogger lift motor defective.
Finisher main board defective.
• The bottom plate motor turns on to raise the bottom plate but the plate position sensor does not detect the plate within 3 s.
• The bottom plate motor reverses to lower the bottom plate but the bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the plate within 3 s.
• Bottom plate position sensor defective
• Bottom plate HP sensor defective
• Bottom plate motor defective
• Cover sheet feeder main board defective
• Harnesses disconnected, defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-28
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC800: Overall System
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
Video signal is sent to the engine but no command is received within the prescribed time from the engine to signal the end of transfer – output all black.
• Controller board defective
Video transfer is requested from the scanner, but no command is received within the prescribed time from the scanner to signal a response – output all black.
• Controller board defective
819 C
820 C
821 C
822 C
823 C
Control error
Fatal kernel error
Software defective
Self-diagnostic error: CPU
Unexpected external error or interrupt occurred.
Self-diagnostic error: ASIC
ASIC timer interrupt and CPU timer interrupt are compared and found to be out of range.
Self-diagnostic error: HDD
Check performed when HDD is installed:
• HDD device busy for over 31 s.
• After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for over 6 s.
• A diagnostic command is issued to the HDD device but the result is an error.
Self-diagnostic error: NIB
• The SUM of the MAC address written in the SEEP ROM for the
MAC address is calculated and compared with the stored SUM and judged NG.
• There is a format error in the
MAC address stored in the SEEP
ROM for the MAC address.
• A loopback error occurs on the
PHY chip of the NIB.
• System program defective
• Controller board defective
• Optional board defective
• Software defective
• Controller board defective
• Software defective
• Controller board defective
• HDD defective
• HDD harness disconnected, defective
• Controller board defective
• NIB board defective
• Controller board defective
NVRAM device does not exist, or
NVRAM device is damaged.
Optional NVRAM is installed, but a write/verify error occurred.
• NVRAM defective
• Controller board defective
• Incorrect NVRAM installed.
SM 4-29
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
827 C
828 C
829 C
835 C
836 C
837 C
838 C
The difference between the 1 s measured for RTC in the NVRAM and the 1 s timeout of the CPU is out of range, or the NVRAM is not detected.
Self-diagnostic error: RAM
The write/verify check for the RAM mounted on the board resulted in an error.
Self-diagnostic error: ROM
•
•
•
•
NVRAM defective
NVRAM installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
RAM defective
• Measuring the CRC for the boot monitor and operating system program results in an error.
• A check of the CRC value for
ROMFS of the entire ROM area results in an error.
Self-diagnostic error: RAM (option)
• A write/verify check of the RAM mounted on the board results in a error.
• The SPD value of the entire RAM
DIM is incorrect, or cannot be read.
Note : RAM is not in use so the result is not displayed on the operation panel.
Self-diagnostic error: Centronic device
• Controller board defective
• RAM defective
• Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
• Loopback connector is connected but DMA data error detected.
• Centronic loopback connector is not connected for detailed selfdiagnostic test.
Self-diagnostic error: Font ROM
A device exists in the font area but it contains corrupted data.
•
•
•
• Controller board defective
• Centronic loopback connector not connected correctly
• Centronic loopback connector defective
•
Software defective
Controller board defective
ROM defective
Font device defective
Self-diagnostic error: Font ROM (option)
A device exists in the font area but it contains corrupted data.
• Font device defective
Self-diagnostic error: Clock Generator
Setup data is read from the clock generator via the I2C bus but differs from the prescribed value.
• Controller board defective
• Duplicate IP addresses.
• Illegal IP address.
• Driver unstable and cannot be used on the network.
• IP address setting incorrect
• NIB (PHY) board defective
• Controller board defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-30
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 04/2008
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom
Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F.
USB driver is corrupted or has become unstable and cannot be used by the USB I/F.
Possible Cause
• 1394 I/F connection incorrect
• 1394 I/F board defective
• Controller board defective
• USB connection incorrect
• Controller board defective
⇒
• HDD is connected but a driver error is detected.
• The driver does not respond with the status of the HDD within 30 s.
• HDD is not initialized
• Level data is corrupted
• HDD is defective
At power on with the HDD detected, power supply to the HDD is
• Harness between HDD and board disconnected, defective interrupted, after the HDD is awakened from the sleep mode, the
HDD is not ready within 30 s.
• HDD power connector disconnected
• HDD defective
862 A
• Controller board defective
Number of bad sectors exceeds allowed maximum
The number of bad sectors on the
HDD in the area for storing images exceeds 101.
• Execute 5832 001 to format the HDD and replace the bad sectors. HDD replacement is recommended because an HDD unit that generates bad sectors is probably of poor quality and performs poorly.
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad sectors generated during operation.
• HDD defective
• Note : If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad sector information is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is accessed, these bad sectors will not be accessed for read/write operation.
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to an CRC error query.
• Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD.
876 D
876-
1
HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those for SC863, 864.
Log Data Error
• HDD defective.
The log data has been corrupted at power on, while the machine was operating, or when the machine was powered off during a print or copy cycle. The machine should never be switched off while it is printing or copying.
Log data file was corrupted at power on or while the machine was operating.
Format the HDD with SP5832-004.
SM 4-31
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
⇒
SC No.
876-
2
876-
3
876-
4
876-
5
876-
99
Symptom
The log was set for encryption without the encryption module installed:
At power on
While the machine was operating
When the log encryption setting was changed.
At power on the log encryption key was disabled, causing an NVRAM malfunction.
At power on the machine attempted log data encryption with the log encryption setting disabled
(NVRAM malfunction).
-or-
At power on log encryption was attempted with the log encryption setting disabled (NVRAM malfunction).
Error occurred at power on.
Only the NVRAM was replaced with an NVRAM from another machine.
-or-
Only the HDD was replaced with an
HDD unit from another machine.
Cause unknown. The error occurred at power on or while the machine was operating.
SC900: Miscellaneous
SC No. Symptom
Rev. 04/2008
Possible Cause
Install or replace and set the encryption module.
Enable the log encryption setting.
Format the disk with SP5832-004.
Format the disk with SP5832-004.
Replace NVRAM with original NVRAM.
Replace HDD with original HDD.
If the error persists, format the HDD with
SP5832-004.
Contact Ricoh design section.
Possible Cause
The total counter contains something that is not a number.
• NVRAM defective
The mechanical counter is not connected.
• Mechanical total counter defective
• Mechanical total counter connector not connected
953 D
954 D
When the IPU has already received the F-GATE signal (laser writing start trigger signal), the IPU receives another F-GATE signal.
Scanner image setting error
The settings required for image processing using the scanner are not sent from the IPU.
Printer image setting error
The settings required for image processing using the printer controller are not sent from the IPU.
• Software defective
• BCU defective
• Software defective
• Software defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-32
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No.
955 D
964 D
984 D
985 D
986 D
990 D
Symptom
Memory setting error
The settings that are required for image processing using the memory are not sent from the IPU.
Printer ready error
•
Possible Cause
Software defective
The print ready signal is not generated for more than 17 seconds after the IPU received the print start signal.
Print image data transfer error
• Software defective
After a data transfer begins from the controller to the engine via the
PCI bus, the transfer does not end within 15 s.
Scanned image data transmission error
• Controller board defective
• BICU defective
• BICU, controller disconnected
After a data transfer begins from the engine to the controller via the
PCI bus, the transfer does not end within 3 s.
•
•
•
Controller board defective
BICU defective
BICU, controller disconnected
Value of setting for software write parameter incorrect
The write parameter received by the write module at the beginning of the setting table is NULL.
• Controller board defective
• BICU defective
• BICU, controller disconnected
Software performance error
The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue.
• Software defective, re-boot *1
The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue. However, unlike SC990, recovery processing allows the program to continue.
• Software defective, re-boot *1
*1
: In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:
1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent logged errors.
2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the software file name, line number, and so on. 1) is the recommended method, because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
Software encountered an unexpected operation. This error is issued if the error cannot be covered by SC990.
• Software defective
• An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
Application does not start after pressing the appropriate key on the operation panel.
• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option required by the application is not installed or not installed correctly.
SM 4-33
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No.
998 D
999 D
Symptom
Application cannot start
Register processing does not execute for any application within
60 s after the machine is powered on. All applications do not start correctly, and all end abnormally.
Program download error
The program download from the IC card does not execute normally.
This SC is not logged.
Possible Cause
• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option required by the application is not installed or not installed correctly.
• Card installed incorrectly
• BICU defective
• IC card defective
• NVRAM defective
• Power down during program downloading
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-34
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.2.3 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT
Here is a list of SC codes that are printed in the SMC report but may not appear in the operation panel display. Note that the codes that have the same number are identified by an additional 4-digit hexadecimal number.
SC No. Symptom error
820 0002 TLB miss (load) exception error
820 0003 TLB miss (store) exception error
820 0004 Read address exception error
820 0005 Write address exception error
820 0006 Command bus exception error
820 0007 Data bus exception error
820 0008 System call exception error
820 0009 Break exception error
820 000A Illegal command exception error
Possible Cause
Unexpected error in CPU device:
• Controller board defective
• Boot monitor or self-diagnostic program corrupted
820 000C Overflow exception error
820 000D UTLB miss exception error
820 0010 Allocation error
820 0011 Allocation error
820 0012 Allocation error
820 0013 Allocation error
820 0014 Allocation error
820 0015 Allocation error
820 00FF Non-initialization allocation error • CPU defective
• Local bus defective
820
820
0601 Read address exception error
0602 Write address exception error
820 0605 System call exception error
• Controller board defective
• CPU device error
• Controller board defective
820 0606 Break point exception error
820 0607 Illegal command exception error
820 060A Allocation 0 mask exception error
820 060B Allocation 1 mask exception error
820 060C Allocation 2 mask exception error
820 060D Allocation 3 mask exception error
• CPU device error
• ASIC device error
• Controller board defective
820 060E Allocation 4 mask exception error
820 0610 CPU timer 2 allocation set error
820 0612 ASIC allocation error
820 06FF CPU master clock error
• CPU device error
• Controller board defective
• ASIC device error
• Controller board defective
• Peripheral device defective
• CPU device error
• Error in CPU initialization data (ASIC error)
• Controller board defective
SM 4-35
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No.
820
820
Symptom
0702 Command cache error
0709 Data cache error
820 070A Data cache clear error
820 0801 TLB virtual address error
820 0804 TLB global error
820 0807 UTLB miss error
820 0808 TLB read miss error
820 0809 TLB write miss error
820 080A TLB mode file error calculation error
820 4003 Double-precision calculation error
Possible Cause
• CPU cache defective
• Controller board defective
• Memory error (insufficient speed)
• CPU device error
• Boot mode setting for CPU error
• Controller defective
• Insufficient memory
• CPU device defective (controller board defective)
• CPU error (controller board defective)
820 4005 Exception mask error
823 6101 MAC address SUM error
823 command • HDD defective
6104 PHY chip ID illegal
823 6105 PHY loopback error
• NIB (PHY) board defective
• Controller board defective
824 1401 NVRAM verify error
• HDD defective
• HDD connector disconnected, defective
• ASIC device error (controller board defective)
826 15FF RTC non-detection error
826
828
828
828
0201 Resident memory verify error
0101 Boost trap code (CODE) error
0104 ROM FS error
0105 Forgery prevention error
• NVRAM defective
• Optional NVRAM defective
• Incompatible NVRAM installed
• NVRAM battery defective
• Memory on controller board defective
• RAM DIMM defective
• Software storage error (re-install software)
• Controller board defective
• ROM device error
• Forgery prevention chip defective
• Forgery prevention chip error
• Replace the controller, ROM, or RAM
DIMM
829 0301 Option memory 0 verify error
829 0302 Option memory 0 configuration information error
• Controller board internal memory error
• RAM DIMM defective
835 110C DMA verify error
835
836
1120 Loopback connector nondetection
1601 Font ROM 0 error
837 1602 Font ROM 1 error
• Loopback connector error (controller board defective)
• Loopback connector error
• Controller board defective
• Loopback connector not set
• Loopback connector error
• Controller board defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-36
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No.
853 D
854 D
855 D
856 D
870 B
920 D
925 D
992 C
993 D
Symptom
IEEE802 11b card startup error
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card access error
Not used.
Possible Cause
IEEE802 11b card error
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card connection board error
Not used.
Address book data error
The address book in the hard disk is accessed. → An error is detected in the address book data; address book data is not read; or data is not written into the address book.
NOTE: To recover from the error, do any of the following countermeasures:
Format the address book by using
SP5-832-008 (all data in the address book–including the user codes and counters–is initialized)
Initialize the user data by using SP5-
832-006 and -007 (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on).
Replace the hard disk (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on).
Printer error
The printer program cannot be continued.
• Data corruption
• Defective hard disk
• Defective software
•
•
Defective hardware
Data corruption
• Defective software
Net file error
The management file for net files is corrupted; net files are not normally read.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
•
•
•
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Other system SCs
The controller received an unknown
SC code from the engine.
Network error
The ASIC program of GW controller cannot be continued.
•
•
•
Contact your product specialist.
Defective ASIC
Defective GW controller
SM 4-37
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.3 B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
NOTE: This function is not used on B064 series machines.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF. After he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on.
It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to “1”.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP 5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-38
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.3.2 B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition
A
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation panel. The machine is disabled. The user cannot reset the SC.
Enter SP mode, then turn the main power switch off and on.
B
SCs that disable only the features that use the defective item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
C
D
SCs that are not shown on the operation panel.
They are internally logged.
Turning the operation switch or main power switch off then on resets SCs Displayed on the operation panel. These are re-displayed if the error occurs again.
Logging only
Turn the operation switch or main power switch off and on.
SM 4-39
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.3.3 B140/B246/D052 SERIES SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
Important
• If a problem concerns electrical circuit boards, always disconnect then reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
• If a motor lock error occurs, first check the mechanical load before replacing motors or sensors.
• When a Level “A” or “B” SC occurs while in an SP mode, the display does not display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode.
How to Read These Tables
Most of the SC codes in these tables apply to both the B140 Series and
B246/D052 Series machines. However, there are some differences. These differences are annotated:
• If an SC code applies to the B140 Series machine only, this SC will be marked
"B140" to the right of the number.
• If an SC code applies to the B246/D052 Series machine only, this SC will be marked "B246/D052".
• If there is neither a " B140 " nor " B246 " notation, the SC code applies to both machines.
• Pay special attention to the " B140/B246 Duplicated Number" notation. The same number SC codes exist in both machines but the meaning is different.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-40
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC100: Scanning System
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
At trigger on, the lamp was not detected on.
The scanner HP sensor does not detect the on condition during initialization or copying.
The scanner HP sensor does not detect the off condition during initialization or copying.
• Exposure lamp defective
• Lamp regulator defective
• Lamp regulator harness damaged, disconnected
• Dirty standard white plate
• Scanner mirror dirty or out of position
• Lens dirty, out of position
• SBU board defective
• BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner motor disconnected.
• Scanner HP sensor defective.
• Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected.
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage installed incorrectly.
• BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner motor disconnected
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage installed incorrectly.
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition during original scanning.
• BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner motor disconnected
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage installed incorrectly
SM 4-41
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
165
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition during original scanning.
• BCU, SDRB (Scanner Driver Board) defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Harness between BCU, SDRB, scanner motor disconnected
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, carriage installed incorrectly.
Automatic adjustment of the SBU fails when the machine is switched on.
• Exposure lamp defective
• Exposure lamp regulator defective
• Harness between exposure lamp and lamp regulator is disconnected
• White plate installed incorrectly or is dirty
• Scanning mirrors of the exposure unit are dirty or out of position
• SBU board defective
• VIB board defective.
• Harness between SBU, VIB disconnected
• Harness between VIB, BCU disconnected
After the SBU switches on, the
BCU detects one of the following conditions on the SBU:
• SBU defective
• VIB defective
• Harness (40-pin shielded) between the
SBU, VIB is disconnected • 1 s after power on, the SYDI signal does not go high, even after 1 retry.
• 1 s after power on, the SYDI signal goes high, but the SBU ID could not be read after 3 attempts.
• Harness (shielded cable) between the
VIB, BCU is disconnected
Copy data security unit error B828 B246/D052
The copy data security option is installed by not operating correctly.
•
•
Copy data security card corrupted
The board is not installed or the board is defective
• IPU board defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-42
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
After the CIS lamp trigger goes on, the CIS lamp is not detected on.
Detecting the lamp on or off determines the peak white level value for shading correction. (If the peak level is determined to be below a certain level, the CIS lamp is judged to be off.)
Automatic adjustment of the CIS unit failed.
• CIS lamp defective
• CIS power supply board defective
• CIS lamp regulator defective
• Harness between lamp and lamp regulator is disconnected.
• Harness between CIS, ADF is disconnected
• CIS exposure glass dirty.
• White roller dirty or installed incorrectly
• CIS unit defective
• CIS unit defective
• CIS exposure glass dirty
• White roller dirty or installed incorrectly
When the CIS is powered on, the
ADF detects one of the following abnormal conditions on the CIS unit:
• The SOUT signal does not go high within 1 s after power on.
• The SOUT signal goes high within 1 s after power on, but the
SBU ID cannot be read after 3 attempts.
• CIS unit defective
• Harness between the CIS, ADF is disconnected
SM 4-43
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC200: Exposure
B246/D052
The polygon mirror motor unit did not enter "Ready" status within 20
• The polygon mirror motor PCB connector is loose, broken, or defective sec. after the motor was turned on, or within 20 sec. after the speed of rotation was changed.
• Polygon mirror motor PCB defective
• Polygon mirror motor defective
203
• IPU defective
Polygon mirror motor error 2: Timeout at OFF B246/D052
The polygon mirror motor did not leave "Ready" within 3 sec. after the motor was switched off. (The
XSCRDY signal did not go HIGH
• The polygon mirror motor PCB connector is loose, broken, or defective
• Polygon mirror motor PCB defective
• Polygon mirror motor defective
(inactive) within 3 sec.)
204
• IPU defective
Polygon mirror motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error B246/D052
The polygon mirror motor "Ready" signal went inactive (HIGH) while the motor was operating at normal speed, even though the motor was neither switched off nor was there a request for a change in speed.
•
•
•
•
Electrical oise interference on the line with the motor signals
Polygon mirror motor PCB connector loose, broken, defective
Polygon mirror motor PCB defective
Polygon mirror motor defective
B246/D052
The "Ready" signal (XSCRDY) was detected as unstable for more than
20 sec. while the polygon mirror motor was operating at normal speed.
The 1st laser synchronization detection unit could not detect the line synchronization signal (DETP0) within
500 ms while the polygon mirror motor was operating at normal speed.
NOTE : The unit polls for the signal every 50 ms. This SC is issued after the
10th attempt fails to detect the signal.
• Electrical noise on the line with the motor signals
• Polygon mirror motor PCB connector loose, broken, defective
• Polygon mirror motor PCB defective
• IPU defective
B246/D052
•
•
•
Laser synchronization board connector loose, broken, defective
• Laser synchronization detection board is not installed correctly (out of alignment)
Laser synchronization board defective
IPU defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-44
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC300:
Image Development System (1)
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
The feedback voltage from the charge corona unit is detected too high 9 times.
When the high voltage is output to the corona grid, feedback voltage exceeds the prescribed value 9 times.
When high voltage goes to the corona grid, feedback voltage is more than the set value 9 times.
This feedback voltage is used to update PWM for output control.
• Charge corona power pack defective
• Charge corona harness disconnected
• Poor charge corona unit connection
• Charge corona power pack defective
• Charge corona harness disconnected
• Poor charge corona unit connection
• Charge corona unit defective or disconnected
• Charge corona harness defective
• Charge corona power pack is defective.
The charge cleaner pad does not arrive at the home position:
• Motor locked within 4 s after switching on, or does not lock within 30 s.
• Motor locked within 10 s after reversing, or does not lock within
30 s.
• Charge corona wire cleaner motor defective
• Motor driver defective
Charge coronal motor is disconnected. (The current at the charge corona motor is detected less than 83 mA.)
• Charge corona wire cleaner motor connector is defective, connected.
NOTE: When SC310~SC317 are logged, the machine halts without displaying the SC number. These SC codes log an abnormal condition at the potential sensor only when SP3901 (Auto Process Control) is set to on.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
During drum potential sensor calibration, the drum potential sensor output voltage does not meet specification when test voltages (–
100V, –800V) are applied to the drum.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• IOB defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
SM 4-45
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
During drum potential sensor calibration, the drum potential sensor output voltage does not meet specification when test voltages (–
100V, –800V) are applied to the drum.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• IOB defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
During drum potential sensor calibration when adjusting the drum potential (VD), the drum potential sensor detects VD higher than VG
(grid voltage).
-or-
When adjusting VD (drum surface potential of black areas after exposure), even after 5 adjustments of
VG (charge corona grid potential), VD could not be set in the target range (–
800 ± 10 + VL + 130V)
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• IOB defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
• Charge corona unit worn out, dirty
During drum potential sensor calibration when adjusting the drum potential (VH) for LD power adjustment, the first time the VH pattern is made, the drum potential sensor detects that VH is more than
500V:
VH > |–500 + VL + 130| V
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• IOB defective
• OPC connector defective
• LD defective
During drum potential sensor calibration, when –100V is applied to the drum, the output value is out of the prescribed range.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• IOB defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
During drum potential sensor calibration, when –800V is applied to the drum, the output value is out of the prescribed range.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• IOB defective
• OPC connector defective
• Development power pack defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-46
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
During drum potential sensor calibration, when VL is adjusted, the pattern surface potential VL pattern is not within range 0V ~ –400V. (VL is the potential after exposing a white pattern.)
The laser writing signal (F-GATE) for the IPU does not go LOW within 60 s.
After the polygon motor reaches standard rotation speed and the LD unit fires for 500 ms, the laser synchronization detector does not generate a signal.
The ready signal does not go low within 20 s after the polygon mirror motor turns on or changes speed.
The ready signal does not go high within 20 s after the polygonal mirror motor turns off.
The XSCRDY signal goes high while the polygon mirror motor turns on, even though there was no request to either turn off the motor or change the motor speed.
While the polygon motor is rotating, the XSCRDY signal goes high during exposure.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness disconnected
• Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
• IOB defective
• OPC connector defective
• Charge corona power pack defective
• Development power pack defective
B140 Only
• BICU board defective
• PCI bus between controller board,
BICU board defective
B140 Only
• Harness between detector and I/F disconnected or damaged
• Detector is installed incorrectly
• Detector board is defective
• IPU board defective
B140 Only
• Harness between I/F and polygon motor disconnected or defective
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• IPU board defective
B140 Only
• Harness between I/F and polygon motor disconnected or defective
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• IPU board defective
B140 Only
• Noise on the line where the polygon ready signal (XSCRDY) is transmitted.
• Harness between the polygon motor and I/F disconnected or defective.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
B140 Only
• Noise on the linef where the polygon ready signal (XSCRDY) is transmitted.
• Harness between the polygon motor and I/F disconnected or defective.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• IPU board defective
SM 4-47
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
TD sensor output voltage (Vt), measured during each copy cycle, is detected 10 times at one of the following levels:
Vt = 0.5 volts or lower
Vt = 4.0 volts or higher
• TD sensor defective
• TD sensor harness disconnected
• TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
• IOB defective
• Toner bottle motor defective
NOTE : When the TD sensor is defective, the toner supply is controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor.
During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) is
2.5 volts or higher even though the control voltage is set to the minimum value (PWM = 0). When this error occurs, SP2-906-1 reads 0.00V.
Note : This SC is released only after correct adjustment of the TD sensor has been achieved. Switching the machine off and on will cancel the SC display, but does not release ID sensor toner supply.
• TD sensor defective
• TD sensor harness disconnected
• TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
• IOB defective
• Toner bottle motor defective
NOTE : When the TD sensor is defective, the toner supply is controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor.
During the TD sensor auto adjustment, the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) does not enter the target range (3.0 ± 0.1V) within 20 s. When this error occurs, the display of SP2-906-1 reads 0.00V.
Note : This SC is released only after correct adjustment of the TD sensor has been achieved. Switching the machine off and on will cancel the SC display, but does not release ID sensor toner supply.
• TD sensor defective
• TD sensor harness disconnected
• TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
• IOB defective
The high voltage applied to the development unit is detected 10 times higher than the upper limit (45%) of
PWM.
• Development power pack defective
• Development bias leak due to poor connection, defective connector
One of the following ID sensor output voltages was detected twice consecutively when checking the ID sensor pattern.
Vsp ≥ 2.5V
Vsg < 2.5
Vsp = 0V
Vsg = 0
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• IOB defective
• ID sensor pattern not written correctly
• Incorrect image density
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-48
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
352
The ID sensor output voltage is 5.0V and the PWM signal input to the ID sensor is 0 when checking the ID sensor pattern.
C ID sensor error 3
For 2 s during the ID sensor pattern check, the ID sensor pattern edge voltage is not 2.5V or the pattern edge is not detected within 800 ms.
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• IOB defective
• ID sensor pattern not written correctly
• Incorrect image density
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• IOB defective
• ID sensor pattern not written correctly
• Incorrect image density
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
One of the following ID sensor output voltages is detected at ID sensor initialization.
• Vsg < 4.0V when the maximum
PWM input (255) is applied to the ID
• sensor.
Vsg 4.0V when the minimum
PWM input (0) is applied to the ID sensor.
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• IOB defective
• ID sensor pattern not written correctly
• Incorrect image density
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
Vsg falls out of the adjustment target
(4.0 ± 0.2V) during Vsg checking.
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor harness disconnected
• ID sensor connector defective
• IOB defective
• ID sensor pattern not written correctly
• Incorrect image density
• Charge power pack defective
• ID sensor dirty
The Vp value, which measures the reflectivity of the ID sensor pattern, was not in the range of –70V to –400V.
• Potential sensor defective
• Potential sensor harness defective
• Potential sensor disconnected
• IOB defective
• OPC unit connector defective
• Charge corona power pack defective
• Charge corona wire dirty, broken
SM 4-49
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC400: Image Development System (2)
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
When the transfer is output, the feedback voltage remains higher than 4V for 60 ms.
• Transfer power pack defective
• Transfer current terminal, transfer power pack disconnected, damaged connector
When the transfer is output, there is hardly any feedback voltage within
60 ms even with application of 24%
PWM.
• Transfer power pack defective
• Transfer unit harness disconnected
• Transfer connector loose, defective
At the completion of auto process control initialization, the potential of the drum surface detected by the potential sensor is more than
–400V, the prescribed value.
• Quenching lamp defective
• Quenching lamp harness disconnected
• Quenching lamp connector loose, defective
The main motor lock signal remains low for 2 seconds while the main motor is on.
• Drive mechanism overloaded
• Motor driver board defective
The development motor lock signal remains high for 2 seconds while the development motor is on.
• Drive mechanism overloaded due to toner clumping in the wasted toner path
• Motor driver board defective
If this SC is returned on a machine in the field, inspect the toner supply unit coil. If the gear is not damaged replace the coil. If the gear is damaged, the gear shaft is probably deformed, so replace the entire unit.
The main fan motor lock signal goes high for 5 s while the fan is on.
•
•
Fan motor overloaded due to obstruction
Fan connector disconnected
Encoder pulse does not change for
3 s after the main motor switches on.
• Waste toner transport has stopped due to motor overload
• Toner end sensor detective, disconnected
The toner collection bottle set switch remains off when the front door is closed.
• No toner collection bottle set
• Poor connection of the switch connector
The toner collection motor connector set signal remains off for
1 s.
• Toner pump motor defective
• Motor connector loose, disconnected
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-50
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplexing, and Fusing Systems
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
• The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate.
• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
• Tray overload detected when the tray is set.
• The lower limit sensor of the LCT does not detect the lower limit within 10 sec.
• Tray lift motor defective, disconnected
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected, blocked by an obstacle
• Too much paper loaded in tray
NOTE (B246/D052)
• At first, the machine displays a message asking the operator to reset the tray.
• This SC will not display until the operator has pulled the tray out and pushed it in 3 times.
• If the operator cycles the machine off/on before the 3rd opening and closing of the tray, the 3-count is reset.
• The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate.
• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
• Tray overload detected when the tray is set.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle
• Too much paper loaded in tray
NOTE (B246/D052)
• At first, the machine displays a message asking the operator to reset the tray.
• This SC will not display until the operator has pulled the tray out and pushed it in 3 times.
• If the operator cycles the machine off/on before the 3rd opening and closing of the tray, the 3-count is reset.
• The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate.
• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
• Tray overload detected when the tray is set.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle
• Too much paper loaded in tray
NOTE (B246/D052)
• At first, the machine displays a message asking the operator to reset the tray.
• This SC will not display until the operator has pulled the tray out and pushed it in 3 times.
• If the operator cycles the machine off/on before the 3rd opening and closing of the tray, the 3-count is reset.
SM 4-51
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
• The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate.
• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
• Tray overload detected when the tray is set.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
• Pick-up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle
• Too much paper loaded in tray
NOTE (B246/D052)
• At first, the machine displays a message asking the operator to reset the tray.
• This SC will not display until the operator has pulled the tray out and pushed it in 3 times.
• If the operator cycles the machine off/on before the 3rd opening and closing of the tray, the 3-count is reset.
One of the following conditions is detected:
• The LD signal from the feed motor is detected abnormal for
50 ms after the motor switches on.
• At power on, the motor is detected loose or disconnected.
•
•
•
Feed motor defective
Feed motor connector disconnected
Obstacle interfering with mechanical movement of motor.
One of the following conditions is detected:
• When the bottom plate is lifted, the upper limit sensor does not come on for 18 s.
• When the bottom plate is lowered, the lower limit sensor does not come on for 18 s.
• After lift begins, the upper limit sensor does not switch on before the pick-up solenoid switches on.
• The paper end sensor switches on during lift and the upper limit sensor does not switch on for 2.5 s, and a message prompts user to reset paper.
• Tray lift motor defective or connector disconnected
• Lift sensor defective or disconnected
• Pick-up solenoid defective or disconnected
• Paper end sensor defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-52
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
One of the conditions is detected:
• The return sensor does not switch on within 10 sec. after the rear fence motor switches on.
• The HP sensor does not switch on 10 sec. after the rear fence motor switches on.
• The HP sensor and return sensor switch on at the same time.
• Rear fence motor defective or poor connection
• Paper or other obstacle interfering with operation of the sensors
• Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
• Motor mechanical overload due to obstruction
• Return sensor or HP sensor defective or dirty
NOTE (B246/D052)
• This problem will not issue the SC code on the operation panel.
• The machine will prompt the operator to reset tray by opening and closing it.
• If the problem persists, the machine will display again and the tray cannot be used.
When the jogger fence moves to the home position, the jogger HP sensor does not turn on even if the jogger fence motor has moved the jogger fence 153.5 mm.
• Paper or other obstacle has jammed mechanism
• Sensor connector disconnected or defective
• Sensor defective
When the jogger fence moves from the home position, the jogger fence
HP sensor does not turn off even if the jogger motor has moved the jogger fence 153.5 mm.
• Paper or other obstacle has jammed mechanism
• Sensor connector disconnected or defective
• Sensor defective
The PLL lock signal was low for 2 seconds during motor operation.
• Motor lock caused by physical overload
• Motor drive PCB defective
The fusing temperature detected by the center thermistor was below
0 ° C for 7 sec.
• Thermistor open
• Thermistor connector defective
• Thermistor damaged, or out of position
• Fusing temperature –15% less than the standard input voltage
One of the following occurred:
• After power on, or after closing the front door, the hot roller does not reach the 100 ° C control temperature within 25 s.
• 5 sec. after temperature rise started, temperature remained below 21 ° C after 5 samplings.
• Fusing unit did not attain reload temperature within 48 sec. of the start of fusing temperature control.
• Fusing lamp disconnected
• Thermistor warped, out of position
• Thermostat not operating
4-53
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
Central thermistor detected a temperature of 240 ° C at the center of the hot roller. Fusing temperature control software error
• PSU defective
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
The central thermistor or an end thermistor detected a temperature of 250 ° C on the hot roller.
After hot roller reaches warmup temperature, the fusing lamps remained on at full capacity for 11 samplings (1.8 sec. duration) while the hot roller was not rotating.
• PSU defective
• IOB defective
• BICU defective
• Thermistor damaged, or out of position
• Fusing lamp disconnected
One of the following conditions is detected 10 times:
• When the main switch is on, the frequency measured by the number of zero cross signals for
500 ms is larger than 66Hz or smaller than 45 Hz.
• The interval between one zero cross signal and the next is 7.5 ms or shorter 3 times consecutively for 500 ms.
• Noise on the ac power line
Web end detected 5 times within
500 ms and web motor continues to rotate 40 s. If web end is detected for another 500 ms, then the SC is logged.
• Web end (requires replacement)
• Web end sensor defective
NOTE: After replacing the web with a new one, reset SP1902 001 to "0" to release
SC550.
The end thermistor (contact type) was less than 0C (32F) for more than 7 seconds.
•
•
Thermistor disconnected
Thermistor connector defective
The end thermistor (contact type) could not detect:
• 100 ° C 25 seconds after the start of the warmup cycle.
• A change in temperature more than than 16 degrees for 5 seconds.
• The reload temperature with 56 seconds after the start of the fusing temperature control cycle.
• Fusing lamp disconnected
• Thermistor bent, damaged
• Thermistor position incorrect
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-54
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
The end thermistor (contact type) was at 240 ° C (464 ° F) for more than
1 second. The temperature is read
10 times every sec. (at 0.1 sec. intervals).
• PSU defective
• IOB control board defective
• BICU control board defective
After the start of the warmup cycle, a fusing lamp was at full power for
1.8 seconds but the hot roller did not turn.
•
•
•
Thermistor bent, out of position
Fusing lamp disconnected
Circuit breaker opened
High frequency noise was detected on the power line.
At the fusing exit sensor the paper was detected late for three pulse counts (lag error), and SP1159 was on.
B246/D052
• No action required. The SC code is logged and the operation of the machine is not affected.
B246/D052
• ?????????? NIA Query!
During copying, the HP sensor could not detect the actuator, tried again 3 times and could not detect.
• Motor lock because of too much load
• Motor driver defective
• HP sensor defective, disconnected, connector defective, harness damaged
The toner collection motor sensor output does not change for 3 seconds while the toner collection motor is on.
• Motor lock due to obstruction
• Motor driver board defective
• Motor connection loose, defective
• Toner collection motor sensor disconnected, sensor defective
• Rotational transmission shaft ( φ 6 x 30) missing
1-bin Exit Motor Error ( Japan Only )
The transport lock sensor output does not change within 300 ms after the motor switches on.
• Motor overload
• Motor driver defective
SM 4-55
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC600: Data Communication
SC No. Symptom
BICU Ù ADF communication/timeout abnormal
After 1 data frame is sent to the
ADF, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
Possible Cause
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
BICU Ù ADF communication/break reception abnormal
During communication a break
(Low) signal was received from the
ADF.
• Serial line connection unstable
• Harness disconnected or defective
BICU Ù ADF communication/command abnormal
A command that cannot be executed was sent from the main machine to the ADF.
• A software error, result of an abnormal procedure.
BICU Ù ADF communication/timeout error
After 1 data frame is sent to the finisher MBX, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
BICU Ù Finisher communication/break error
During communication with the finisher MBX, the BICU received a break (Low) signal from the finisher.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
BICU Ù Tray 1~4 communication/timeout error
After 1 data frame is sent to the trays, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
•
•
Serial line connection unstable
External noise on the line
BICU Ù Tray 1~4 communication/break reception error
During communication with the finisher trays, the BICU received a break (Low) signal.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
BICU Ù LCT communication/timeout error
After 1 data frame is sent to the
LCT, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
•
•
Serial line connection unstable
External noise on the line
BICU Ù LCT communication/break reception error
During communication with the
LCT, the BICU received a break
(Low) signal.
•
•
Serial line connection unstable
External noise on the line
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-56
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
One of the following factors could be the cause of this error:
• In the User Tools, check the settings for the dial-up user name and dial up password.
• Modem has been disconnected.
• Modem board disconnected.
Check the following for a machine that is using Cumin (NRS modem):
• An error was returned during the dialup connection
• A network was detected at startup
• At startup the machine detected that the
NIB was disabled, or did not detect a modem board
NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. Here is a list of error codes:
Error Problem
1 Failure to certify dial-up
4
5
11
12
Illegal modem setting
Poor connection due to low power supply on the line.
Data in the NVRAM became corrupted when the network enable switch and Cumin-M were enabled at the same time.
The modem board could not enable the NIB.
Solution
In the User Tools, check the dial-up user and dialup password settings
Check the setting of SP5816 160 to determine whether the setting for the AT command is correct.
If this SP setting is correct, then the problem is a bug in the software.
The problem is on the external power supply line, so there is no corrective action on the machine.
Use SP5985 1 and set the NIC to "0" (Disable) to disable the network board.
Replace the modem board.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
An expected error occurred when
Cumin-M dialed up the NRS
Center.
• Software bug
• No action is required because only the count is logged
The machine engine, controlled by the BICU (Base Image Control
Unit), was operating incorrectly when the machine was switched on or returned to normal operation from the energy save mode.
• Check the connections between BICU and controller
• BICU defective
• Controller board defective
• PSU defective
• After power on, the line between the controller and the operation panel did not open for normal operation.
• After normal startup, communication with the controller stopped.
• Controller stalled
• Controller installed incorrectly
• Controller board defective
• Operation panel harness disconnected or defective
SM 4-57
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
701 D
720 D
Pick-up roller HP sensor signal does not change after the pick-up motor has turned on.
ADF bottom plate motor error
• Bottom plate position sensor does not detect the plate after the bottom plate lift motor switches on to lift the plate.
• Bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the plate after the bottom plate motor reverses to lower the plate.
Finisher transport motor error
The encoder pulse of the finisher transport motor does not change state (high/low) within 600 ms and does not change after 2 retries.
• Pick-up roller HP sensor defective
• Pick-up motor defective
• Timing belt slipping, out of position
• ADF main board defective
• Bottom plate position sensor defective
• Bottom plate HP sensor defective
• Bottom plate motor defective
• ADF main board defective
• Finisher transport motor defective
• Transport motor harness disconnected, or defective
• Finisher main board defective
• The finisher jogger HP sensor remains de-activated for more
1,000 pulses when returning to home position.
• The finisher jogger HP sensor remains activated for more than
1,000 pulses when moving away from home position.
• Jogger HP sensor defective
• Jogger mechanism overload
• Jogger motor defective (not rotating)
• Finisher main board defective
• Harness disconnected or defective
The pawl of the feed-out belt did not return to the home position during the prescribed time after 2 attempts to detect.
B246/D052
• Stack feed-out belt HP sensor loose, broken, defective
• Feed-out belt motor defective
• Finisher control board defective
The staple hammer motor did not return to the home position within the prescribed time (340 ms).
• Staple hammer HP sensor loose, broken, defective
• Electrical overload on the stapler drive
PCB elect
• Staple hammer motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-58
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
B140
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not activate within the prescribed number of pulses after the stack feed-out motor turns on and does not activate after 2 retries.
• Stack feed-out HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected or defective
• Stack feed-out motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Motor overload
B246/D052
The status of the exit guide sensor did not change at the prescribed time during operation of the exit guide.
• Exit guide open sensor loose, broken, defective.
• Exit guide motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
B140
The paper height sensor does not activate within the prescribed time after the upper tray lift motor turns on, or the sensor remains on after the motor reverses to lower the tray.
•
•
Upper tray paper height sensor defective
Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Tray lift motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
726
• Tray lift motor overload
Front shift jogger motor error (B703) B246/D052
The sides fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the shift jogger motor switches on. The
1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
• Shift jogger motor disconnected, defective
• Shift jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Shift jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective
B140/B246 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
Finisher stapler rotation motor error B140
The stapler motor switches on but the motor does not return to the home position within the prescribed number of pulses. After 2 counts, the
SC is logged as a jam.
The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the shift jogger motor switches on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
•
•
•
•
•
Stapler rotation motor defective
Poor stapler rotation motor connection
Stapler rotation sensor defective
Finisher main board defective
Rotation motor overload
B246
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Motor defective
• Motor overload
• HP defective
SM 4-59
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
Shift jogger retraction motor error (B703) B246/D052
The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the retraction motor switches on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Motor defective
• Motor overload
• HP defective
B140
The punch HP sensor does not activate within the prescribed time after the punch motor turns on.
• Punch HP sensor defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Punch motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Poor punch motor overload
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
The stapler HP sensor does activate within the prescribed time after the stapler motor turns on and moves the stapler away from home position. After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
The shift roller HP sensor of the upper tray does not activate within the prescribed time after the shift tray starts to move toward or away from the home position. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
B140
• Stapler HP sensor defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Stapler movement motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Stapler movement motor overload
B246/D052
• Shift tray HP sensor of the upper tray disconnected, defective
• Shift tray motor of the upper tray is disconnected, defective
• Shift tray motor of the upper tray overloaded due to obstruction
The shift roller HP sensor does not activate within the prescribed time after the shift roller motor turns on.
After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Shift roller HP sensor defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Shift roller motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Shift roller motor overload
After the lift motor switches on to lift the tray, paper height sensor 2 does not detect the top of the paper stack, or after the motor reverses to lower the stack the top of the stack remains detected (the status of paper height sensor 1 does not change). After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Paper height sensor 1 or 2 defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Tray lift motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Tray lift motor overload
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-60
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
• The pre-stack motor starts but does not return to the home position within 400 pulses. After
2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Motor does not return to the home position within 280 pulses immediately before or after prestacking. After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Jogger HP sensor defective
• Sensor harnesses disconnected, defective
• Pre-stack motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Pre-stack motor overload
The paper exit guide plate motor starts but the paper exit guide plate
HP sensor does not activate within
750 ms. After 2 counts, the SC is logged as a jam.
• Guide plate HP sensor defective
• Sensor harness disconnected, defective
• Paper exit guide plate motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Guide plate motor overload.
The hopper that holds the waste from staple trimming is full.
•
•
Staple waste hopper full
Staple waste sensor defective
The pressure plate motor switches on but does not return to the home position within the prescribed time after 2 counts.
•
•
•
•
HP sensor defective
Harness disconnected, defective
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
• Motor overload
The folder plate motor turns on but the plate does not return to the home position within the prescribed time for 2 counts.
• Plate HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Folder plate motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Folder plate motor overload
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
Saddle-stitch stapler motor fails to operate within 450 ms within 2 counts..
The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after operating. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
B140
• HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Stapler motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
• Stapler motor overload
B246/D052
• Staple jam
• Number of sheets in the stack exceeds the limit for stapling
• Stapler motor disconnected, defective
SM 4-61
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
B140
Saddle-stitch stapler motor fails to operate within 450 ms within 2 counts..
• HP sensor defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Stapler motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
741 B
• Stapler motor overload
Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error B246/D052
The stapler does not return to its home position within the specified time after stapling. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Stapler rotation motor disconnected, defective
• Stapler rotation motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Stapler rotation HP sensor disconnected, defective
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
B140
The jogger motor turns on but the side fences to not return to the home position within 340 pulses for
2 counts.
• HP sensors defective
• Harness disconnected, defective
• Motor defective
• Finisher main board defective
742 B
• Motor overload
B246/D052
The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the stapler motor turned on.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Stapler movement motor disconnected, defective
• Stapler movement motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
For the optional jogger unit for the
B706 finisher: During the return operation, the shift jogger motor or shift jogger fence lift motor did not return to the home position within the set number of pulses.
The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
B140
• HP sensor of shift jogger motor, harness, connector defective, or motor disconnected
• HP sensor, harness, connector of retraction motor defective, or motor disconnected
• Shift jogger motor defective
• Shift jogger fence lift motor defective
• Finisher main control board defective
B246/D052
• Front motor disconnected, defective
• Front motor overloaded due to obstruction
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-62
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
The rear stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
B246/D052
• Rear motor disconnected, defective
• Rear motor overloaded due to obstruction
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
• The bottom plate motor turns on to raise the bottom plate but the plate position sensor does not detect the plate within 3 s.
• The bottom plate motor reverses to lower the bottom plate but the bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the plate within 3 s.
B140
• Bottom plate position sensor defective
• Bottom plate HP sensor defective
• Bottom plate motor defective
• Cover sheet feeder main board defective
• Harnesses disconnected, defective
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified time after the tray raises or lowers. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
B246/D052
• Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
• Upper tray paper height sensor disconnected, defective
• Finisher main board connection to motor loose
• Finisher main board defective
B140/B246 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
The HP sensor of the upper stopper motor does not go off after the stopper moved 128.7 mm.
Occurs during the operation of the lower tray pressure motor.
B140
• Upper stopper motor defective
• Upper stopper motor disconnected, connector defective
• Upper stopper motor HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Z-Fold main control board defective
B246/D052
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Motor overloaded
• Home position sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Home position defective
SM 4-63
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
B140/B246/D052 Duplicated Number (See last bullet on page 4.3.3 for explanation)
2000 ms after the fan motor switched on, the lock signal did not release.
The motor lock signal failed to release within 2 sec. after the Z-fold unit fan motor turned on.
B140
• Fan motor defective
• Fan motor disconnected
• Fan motor locked because of too much load
• Z-Fold main control board defective
B246/D052
• Fan motor connected loose, broken, defective
• Fan motor defective
• Fan blocked by an obstruction
The fold timing sensor does not operate correctly.
The leading edge sensor does not operate correctly.
B140
• Paper dust on the sensor
• Sensor disconnected, defective
• Reflector plate dirty, or out of position
• Z-Fold main control board defective
B140
• Paper dust on the sensor
• Sensor disconnected, defective
• Reflector plate dirty, or out of position
• Z-Fold main control board defective
B140
• EEPROM defective, replace Z-Fold main control board
The machine could not write to the
EEPROM two times (one after the other).
The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the punch motor turned on.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
B246/D052
•
•
•
Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective
Punch motor disconnected, defective
Punch motor overload due to obstruction
B246/D052
The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
•
•
Folder plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
Folder plate motor disconnected, defective code.
• Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction.
Finisher pressure plate motor error B246/D052
Pressure plate motor operating but the plate is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
•
•
•
Pressure plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
Pressure plate motor disconnected, defective
Pressure plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-64
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
B246/D052
Occurs during operation of the punch unit. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
•
•
Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
Motor defective
Paper position sensor slide motor error B246/D052
Occurs during operation of the punch unit. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
•
•
Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
Motor defective
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
B246/D052
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Motor defective
B246/D052
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Motor defective
B246/D052
Occurs during operation of the punch unit. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Motor overload
• Motor defective
Cover interposer tray bottom plate motor error B246/D052
• After the motor starts to raise the bottom plate, the bottom plate position sensor does not detect the plate at the specified time (3 s).
• After the motor starts to lower the bottom plate, the bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the bottom plate.
• Bottom plate position sensor, disconnected, defective
• Bottom plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
The feed motor does not attain the prescribed speed within the specified time.
B246/D052
• Feed motor disconnected, defective
• Feed motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Feed motor lock
B246/D052
The lower stopper motor does not attain the prescribed speed within the specified time.
The upper stopper was not detected at the home position after the motor remained on long enough to move it
128.7 mm.
• Lower stopper motor disconnected, defective
• Lower stopper motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Lower stopper HP sensor disconnected, defective
B246/D052
• Upper stopper motor disconnected, defective
• Upper stopper motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Upper stopper HP sensor disconnected, defective
4-65
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
•
•
Leading edge sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Leading edge sensor defective
• Leading edge sensor, mylar covered with paper dust
• Mylar disconnected.
B246/D052
B246/D052
The A/D (Digital/Analog) input value did not change even after the
D/A (Digital/Analog) output value
• Fold timing sensor connector loose, broken, defective changed.
• Fold timing sensor defective
• Fold timing sensor, mylar covered with paper dust
• Mylar disconnected.
Z-fold leading edge sensor adjustment error B246/D052
The A/D input value did not change even after the D/A output value changed.
The write operation to the Z-folding
EEPROM failed after 2 attempts
• EEPROM defective
The staple waste hopper is full of cut staples.
B246/D052
• If the hopper is full, empty the hopper
• If the hopper is not full, the hopper full sensor is disconnected, defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-66
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC800: Overall System
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader attempts to read the selfdiagnostic module, system kernel, or root system files from the OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted.
• OS Flash ROM data defective; change the controller firmware
• SD card data defective; use another SD card
Error Codes
Code Meaning
0x0000 0000 BIOS boot error
0x0000 0001 Primary boot start load error
0x0000 0002 Secondary boot load error (Boot3.Elf)
0x0000 0003 Self-diagnostic module error (Diag.Elf
0x0000 0004 Kernel start error (Netbsd)
0x0000 0005 Root file system file read error (Rootfs)
0xffff ffff Other error
Example : Data in the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system files are corrupted or do not exist in OS flash ROM or on the SD card
Files in the self-diagnostic module, kernel, or root file system on the SD card have been falsified or altered
• Before discarding the SD card, try to update the data on the card. If the error occurs again, the card may be defective.
• Be sure to use an SD card that contains the correct electronic signature.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
While the system program is running, a bus hold or interrupt program goes into an endless loop, preventing any other programs from executing.
• System program defective; switch off/on, or change the controller firmware if the problem cannot be solved
• Controller board defective
• Controller option malfunction
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel.
•
•
•
•
System program defective
Controller board defective
Optional board defective
Replace controller firmware
0x766d vm_pageout: VM is full
Other
NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
SM 4-67
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for CPU access, for option bus and SDRAM access, for SDRAM refresh, and for management of the internal bus gate.
0B0
0
Error code 0xffff ffff is returned when the register
Write & Verify check is executed on the ASIC mounted on the controller board. The ASIC controls the ROM and buses for other devices.
• ASIC (controller board defective)
0B0
6
0B1
0
ASIC not detected
Failed to initialize or could not read connection bus.
Data in SHM register incorrect.
• ASIC defective
• Poor connection between North Bridge and PCI I/F
• Replace controller board
• Connection bus defective
• SHM defective
• Replace controller board
NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
Possible Cause SC No. Symptom
822 B Self-diagnostic error 3: HDD
3003 Check performed when
HDD is installed:
• HDD device busy for over 31 s.
• After a diagnostic command is set for Sthe
HDD, but the device remains busy for over 6 s.
A diagnostic command is issued to the HDD device but the result is an erro
3004 No response to the selfdiagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDDs
3013 Mandolin does not respond, the HDD device remains BUSY for more than 31 s, or the BUSY signal does not drop within
6 s after the diagnostic command is issued to the
HDDs.
• HDD defective
• HDD harness disconnected, defective
• Controller board defective
• HDD defective
• HDD defective
• HDD connector loose or defective
• Controller defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-68
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom
3014 Error returned from HDD in response to the selfdiagnostic command,
Mandolin could not be located due to a read/write error at the HDD register.
Possible Cause
• HDD defective
NVRAM device does not exist,
NVRAM device is damaged, NVRAM socket damaged
• NVRAM defective
• Controller board defective
• NVRAM backup battery exhausted
• NVRAM socket damaged
1501 The difference between the 1 s measured for RTC in the
NVRAM and the 1 s timeout of the CPU is out of range, or the NVRAM is not detected.
15FE Backup battery error. Battery is exhausted or not within rated specification.
• NVRAM defective
• NVRAM installed incorrectly
• The battery is attached permanently to the controller board. Replace the controller board.
• Measuring the CRC for the boot monitor and operating system program results in an error.
• A check of the CRC value for
ROMFS of the entire ROM area results in an error.
• Software defective
• Controller board defective
• ROM defective
NOTE: For more details about this SC 833, SC834 error, execute SP5990 to print an
SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. The additional error codes (0F30, 0F31, etc. are listed in the
SMC report.
SC No.
833 D
Symptom
Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
0F30
0F31
0F41
50B1
50B2
834
5101
850
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected.
After the PCI configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
The read/write check done for resident RAM on the mother board could not be done correctly.
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
• Bus connection defective, loose
• SSCG defective
• Replace the mother board
• Bus connection loose, defective Value of the SSCG register is incorrect. • SSCG defective
• Replace the mother board
D Self-diagnostic error 9: Optional Memory RAM DIMM
The write/verify check for the optional RAM chip on the engine mother board gave an error.
B Net I/F error
Possible Cause
• ASCI (Mandolin) for system control is defective
• Interface between North Bridge and
AGPI is defective
• Replace the mother board
• Memory device defective
• Replace the mother board
• Controller defective
• Mother board defective
SM 4-69
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom
• Duplicate IP addresses.
• Illegal IP address.
• Driver unstable and cannot be used on the network.
Possible Cause
• IP address setting incorrect
• NIB (PHY) board defective
• Controller board defective
Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F.
• NIB (PHY), LINK module defective; change the Interface Board
• Controller board defective
During machine start-up, the machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless LAN, but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
• Wireless LAN card missing (was removed)
During machine operation, the machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless LAN, but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
• Wireless LAN card missing (was removed)
An error was detected on the wireless LAN card (802.11b or
Bluetooth).
•
•
Wireless LAN card defective
Wireless LAN card connection incorrect
An error was detected on the wireless LAN card (802.11b or
Bluetooth).
• Wireless LAN card defective
• PCI connector (to the mother board) loose
The USB driver is not stable and caused an error.
• HDD is connected but a driver error is detected.
• The driver does not respond with the status of the HDD within 30 s.
• Bad USB card connection
• Replace the controller board
•
•
•
HDD is not initialized
Level data is corrupted
HDD is defective
At power on with the HDD detected, power supply to the
HDD is interrupted, after the HDD is awakened from the sleep mode, the HDD is not ready within 30 s.
• Harness between HDD and board disconnected, defective
• HDD power connector disconnected
• HDD defective
• Controller board defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-70
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
SC No.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
Symptom
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad sectors generated during operation.
Possible Cause
• HDD defective
NOTE : If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad sector information is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is accessed, these bad sectors will not be accessed for read/write operation.
• HDD defective During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to an CRC error query. Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD.
HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those for SC863, 864.
• HDD defective.
The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD card in the controller slot immediately after the machine is turned on.
The program on the SD card contains electronic confirmation license data. If the program does not contain this license data, or if the result of the check shows that the license data in the program on the SD card is incorrect, then the checked program cannot execute and this SC code is displayed.
• Program missing from the SD card
• Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card
The SD card in the boot slot when the machine was turned on was removed while the machine was on.
• Insert the SD card, then turn the machine off and on.
An error occurred while an SD card was used.
• SD card not inserted correctly
• SD card defective
• Controller board defective
NOTE : If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
SM 4-71
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2007
Address book data on the hard disk was detected as abnormal when it was accessed from either the operation panel or the network. The address book data cannot be read from the HDD or
SD card where it is stored, or the data read from the media is defective.
More Details
•
•
Software defective. Turn the machine off/on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then replace the controller firmware.
HDD defective.
• Do SP5846 050 (UCS Settings – Initialize all Directory Info.) to reset all address book data.
• Reset the user information with SP5832 006 (HDD Formatting– User
Information).
• Replace the HDDs.
• Boot the machine from the SD card.
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned on, or power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
• Do SP5832-007 (Format HDD – Mail TX
Data) to initialize the HDD.
• Replace the HDD
A data error was detected for the
HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option was used.
NOTE : The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit
B660 running from an SD card.
• Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
• Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit again. For more, see section “1.
Installation”.
• HDD defective
⇒
876
876-
1
876-
2
876-
3
D
… continued
An error occurred while the machine deleted data from the
HDD.
NOTE : The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit
B660 running from an SD card.
• Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
Log Data Error SC876 More Information on page 4-75
The log data has been corrupted at power on, while the machine was operating, or when the machine was powered off during a print or copy cycle. The machine should never be switched off while it is printing or copying.
Log data file was corrupted at power on or while the machine was operating.
• Format the HDD with SP5832-004.
The log was set for encryption without the encryption module installed:
• At power on
• While the machine was operating
• When the log encryption setting was changed.
At power on the log encryption key was disabled, causing an NVRAM malfunction.
• Install or replace and set the encryption module.
• Enable the log encryption setting.
• Format the disk with SP5832-004.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-72
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 02/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
⇒
876-
4
876-
5
876-
99
D At power on the machine attempted log data encryption with the log encryption setting disabled
(NVRAM malfunction).
-or-
At power on log encryption was attempted with the log encryption setting disabled (NVRAM malfunction).
Error occurred at power on.
Only the NVRAM was replaced with an NVRAM from another machine.
-or-
Only the HDD was replaced with an HDD unit from another machine.
Cause unknown. The error occurred at power on or while the machine was operating.
• Format the disk with
SP5832-004.
• Replace NVRAM with original NVRAM.
• Replace HDD with original HDD.
• If the error persists, format the HDD with
SP5832-004.
• Format the HDD with
SP5832-004.
A request to get access to the MLB was not answered within the specified time.
SC900: Miscellaneous
SC No. Symptom
The total counter contains something that is not a number.
• MLB defective, replace the MLB
Possible Cause
B140
• NVRAM incorrect type
• NVRAM defective
• NVRAM data scrambled
• Unexpected error from external source
The mechanical counter is not connected.
• Mechanical total counter defective
• Mechanical total counter connector not connected
B140/B246
The external controller alerted the machine about an error.
External Controller Error 6 B140/B246
• Please refer to the instructions for the external controller.
While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion module, was operating normally, the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from the
FLUTE serial driver was detected, or BREAK signal from the other station was detected.
• Power outage at the EFI controller
• EFI controller was rebooted
• Connection to EFI controller loose
An internal application error was detected and operation cannot continue.
B140
• Software defective; turn the machine off/on, or change the controller firmware
• Insufficient memory
B140
When the application started, the necessary font was not on the SD card.
• Font not on the SC card
SM 4-73
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
• The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue.
• The HDDs are defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Fabric services, and other network functions cannot be used.( HDD status codes displayed on the debug console are described below.)
HDD Status Codes Displayed on Debug Console
Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
• HDD defective
• Power supply to machine cut occurred while writing data to HDD
• Software error
• Please refer to the detailed descriptions below for recovery procedures.
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during level read or check
(-6) Error returned during level read or check
(-7) “filesystem” repair failed
(-8) “filesystem” mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist
Recovery Procedure 1
If the machine returns SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), please follow the recovery procedures described for these SC codes.
Recovery Procedure 2
If the machine does not return one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), cycle the machine off and on. If this does not solve the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with SP5832 011 (HDD Formatting – Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
Before initializing the NetFile partition on the HDD please inform the client that:
1. Received faxes on the delivery server will be lost
2. All captured documents will be lost
3. DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be cleared
4. Documents stored on the document server, included scanned documents, will not be lost.
5. The first time the network accesses the machine, the management information must be reconfigured (this will require a significant amount of time).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-74
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
Before initializing the Netfile partition with SP5823 011 , do the following:
6. Enter the User Tools mode and execute “Delivery Settings” to print all received fax documents scheduled for delivery and delete them.
7. In the User Tools mode, execute Document Management> Batch Delete
Transfer Documents.
8. Execute then cycle the machine off and on.
Recovery Procedure 3
If “Procedure 2” does not solve the problem, execute SP5832 001 (HDD
Formatting – All), then cycle the machine off and on.
Executing SP5832 001 erases all document and address book data stored on the hard disks. Be sure to consult with the customer before executing this SP code.
Recovery Procedure 4
If “Recovery Procedures 1 to 3” fail to correct the problem, replace the HDD.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
The settings required for image processing using the scanner are not sent from the IPU.
• Software defective
The settings required for image processing using the printer controller are not sent from the IPU.
• Software defective
The settings that are required for image processing using the memory are not sent from the IPU.
• Software defective
The print ready signal is not generated for more than 17 seconds after the IPU received the print start signal.
• Software defective
After a data transfer begins from the controller to the engine via the PCI bus, the transfer does not end within 15 s.
• Controller (SIMAC) board defective
• BICU defective
• BICU controller disconnected
After a data transfer begins from the engine to the controller via the PCI bus, the transfer does not end within 3 s.
• Controller (SIMAC) board defective
• BICU defective
• BICU controller disconnected
The write parameter received by the write module at the beginning of the setting table is NULL.
• Controller (SIMAC) board defective
• BICU defective
• BICU controller disconnected
SM 4-75
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2007
SC No. Symptom
The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue.
B140
•
Possible Cause
Software defective, re-boot
*1
The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue. However, unlike SC990, recovery processing allows the program to continue.
B140
• Software defective, re-boot
*1
*1
: In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:
1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent logged errors.
2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the software file name, line number, and so on. 1) is the recommended method, because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
B140
An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not come under any other SC
• Software defective
• Turn the machine power OFF/ON. The machine cannot be used until this error is code). cleared.
SC994 C Operation Panel Management Records Exceeded B246
An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for images managed in the service layer of the firmware. This can occur if there if there are too many application screens open on the operation panel.
• No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the machine.
An application does not start after the user pushed the correct key on the operation panel.
Register processing does not operate for an application within
60 s after the machine power is turned on. Applications do not start correctly, all end abnormally.
B140
• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not installed correctly.
B140
• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not installed correctly.
⇒
SC876 More Information
If the error persists after doing the procedure described in the table above, do this procedure.
1. Switch the machine OFF, remove the HDD, and then switch the machine ON.
2. Do SP5801-019, then switch the machine OFF.
3. Install the HDD again and switch the machine ON.
4. Do
5. Cycle the machine OFF/ON.
6. Do SP9730-002 and set to "1" (ON).
7. Do SP9730-003 and set to "1" (ON).
8. Do SP9730-004 and set to "1" (ON).
9. Cycle the machine OFF/ON.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-76
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.3.4 JAM CODES
Here are lists of SC codes that are printed in the SMC report; they do not appear on the operation panel display.
Main Unit: Paper Jam Errors
(Paper Does Not Arrive)
1 Initial Jam (Power On)
3 Tray 1 feed sensor
4 Tray 2 feed sensor
5 Tray 3 feed sensor
6 Tray 4 feed sensor ( Japan Only )
7 LCT feed sensor
8 Transport sensor 1
9 Transport sensor 2
10 Transport sensor 3
11 Transport sensor 4 ( Japan Only)
12 Relay sensor
13 Registration sensor
15 Exit unit entrance sensor
16 Exit unit
19 Exit unit entrance sensor
20 Duplex transport sensor 1
21 Duplex transport sensor 2
22 Duplex transport sensor 3
23 Duplex inverter sensor
24 1-Bin tray ( Japan Only )
34 Bypass paper end sensor
(Paper Remains)
53 Tray 1 feed sensor
54 Tray 2 feed sensor
55 Tray 3 feed sensor
56 Tray 4 feed sensor ( Japan Only )
57 LCT feed sensor
58 Transport sensor 1
59 Transport sensor 2
60 Transport sensor 3
61 Transport sensor 4 ( Japan Only)
62 Relay sensor
63 Registration sensor
66 Exit unit
69 Exit unit entrance sensor
71 Duplex transport sensor 2
72 Duplex transport sensor 3
73 Duplex inverter sensor
74 1-Bin tray ( Japan Only )
SM 4-77
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
Finisher B469 Jam Codes
102 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
104 Staple Entrance Sensor
105 Exit Sensor after jogging
106 Stapler Unit 1
110 Jogger Fence Motor
111 Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
112 Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
113 Stapler Unit 2
115 Feed Out Belt Motor
116 Punch Hole Motor
Finisher B468/B674 Jam Codes
SC733
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC727, SC730
SC724
SC725
SC729
122 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
124 Staple Entrance Sensor
125 Exit Sensor after jogging
126 Stapler Unit 1
127 Saddle Stitch Stapler Unit
128 Saddle Stitch Stapler Unit
129 Shift Motor
130 Jogger Fence Motor
131 Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
132 Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
133 Stapler Unit 2
134 Folder Plate Motor
135 Feed Out Belt Motor
136 Punch Hole Motor
SC733, SC726
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC727, SC730
SC724, SC728, SC740,
SC741
SC739
SC725
SC729
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-78
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
Finisher B478/B706 Jam Codes
No. Location
142 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
144 Staple Entrance Sensor
145 Exit Sensor after jogging
148 Upper Transport Motor
149 Shift Motor
150 Jogger Fence Motor
151 Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
153 Stapler Unit
155 Feed Out Belt Motor
156 Punch Hole Motor
SC733, SC726
SC722
SC732, SC736
SC724, SC738, SC740, SC741
SC725
SC729
158 Z-Fold Jogger Motor ( B706 Only )
Mailbox B471 Jam Codes
No. Location
161 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 (CN201)
162 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 (CN204)
163 Vertical Transport Sensor 3 (CN209)
164 Vertical Transport Sensor 4 (CN2014)
165 Vertical Transport Sensor 5 (CN2019)
---
---
---
---
---
Cover Interposer Tray B470 Jam Codes
No. Location
166 Feed or Pull-out Sensor
168 Bottom Plate Position Sensor
---
---
SC750
SM 4-79
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
Z-Folding Unit B660 Jam Codes
176
177
178
181
182
183
184
185
No. Location Code
169 Paper Feed Sensor: Paper Late ---
170
171
Paper Feed Sensor: Paper Remains
Fold Timing Sensor: Paper Late
---
---
172
173
174
175
Fold Timing Sensor: Paper Remains
Leading Edge Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Leading Edge Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Upper Stopper Path Sensor: Paper Late
---
---
---
---
Upper Stopper Path Sensor: Paper Remains
Lower Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Lower Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Upper Exit Sensor: Paper Late
Upper Exit Sensor: Paper Remains
Paper Fold Motor Lock
Lower Stopper Motor Lock
Upper Stopper Motor Lock
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-80
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
4.3.5 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT
These codes are also used in the SMC report.
Codes that have the same number in this series are identified by an additional 4digit hexadecimal number.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
Unexpected error in CPU device:
• Controller board defective
• Boot monitor or self-diagnostic program corrupted
820 0002 TLB miss (load) exception error
820 0003 TLB miss (store) exception error
820 0004 Read address exception error
820 0005 Write address exception error
820 0006 Command bus exception error
820 0007 Data bus exception error
820 0008 System call exception error
820 0009 Break exception error
820 000A Illegal command exception error
820 000C Overflow exception error
820 000D UTLB miss exception error
820 0010 Allocation error
820 0011 Allocation error
820 0012 Allocation error
820 0013 Allocation error
820 0014 Allocation error
820 0015 Allocation error
820 00FF Non-initialization allocation error • CPU defective
• Local bus defective
820
820
0601 Read address exception error
0602 Write address exception error
• Controller board defective
• CPU device error
• Controller board defective
820 0605 System call exception error
820 0606 Break point exception error
820 0607 Illegal command exception error
820 060A Allocation 0 mask exception error
820 060B Allocation 1 mask exception error
820 060C Allocation 2 mask exception error
• CPU device error
• ASIC device error
• Controller board defective
820 060D Allocation 3 mask exception error
820 060E Allocation 4 mask exception error
820 0610 CPU timer 2 allocation set error
820 0612 ASIC allocation error
820 06FF CPU master clock error
• CPU device error
• Controller board defective
• ASIC device error
• Controller board defective
• Peripheral device defective
• CPU device error
• Error in CPU initialization data (ASIC error)
• Controller board defective
SM 4-81
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No.
820
820
Symptom
0702 Command cache error
0709 Data cache error
820 070A Data cache clear error
Possible Cause
• CPU cache defective
• Controller board defective
• Memory error (insufficient speed)
• CPU device error
• Boot mode setting for CPU error
• Controller defective
• Insufficient memory
• CPU device defective (controller board defective)
820 0801 TLB virtual address error
820 0804 TLB global error
820 0807 UTLB miss error
820 0808 TLB read miss error
820 0809 TLB write miss error
820 080A TLB mode file error
820 4003 Double-precision calculation error
• CPU error (controller board defective)
820 4005 Exception mask error
• HDD defective
• HDD connector disconnected, defective
• ASIC device error (controller board defective)
823 6101 MAC address SUM error
823 command • HDD defective
6104 PHY chip ID illegal
• NIB (PHY) board defective
• Controller board defective
823 6105 PHY loopback error
824 1401 NVRAM verify error
826 15FF RTC non-detection error
826
828
828
828
829
0201 Resident memory verify error
0101 Boost trap code (CODE) error
0104 ROM FS error
0105 Forgery prevention error
0301 Option memory 0 verify error
829 0302 Option memory 0 configuration information error
• NVRAM defective
• Optional NVRAM defective
• Incompatible NVRAM installed
• NVRAM battery defective
• Memory on controller board defective
• RAM DIMM defective
• Software storage error (re-install software)
• Controller board defective
• ROM device error
• Forgery prevention chip defective
• Forgery prevention chip error
• Replace the controller, ROM, or RAM
DIMM
• Controller board internal memory error
• RAM DIMM defective
835 110C DMA verify error
835 1120 Loopback connector non-
836 detection
1601 Font ROM 0 error
837 1602 Font ROM 1 error
• Loopback connector error (controller board defective)
• Loopback connector error
• Controller board defective
• Loopback connector not set
• Loopback connector error
• Controller board defective
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-82
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B140/B246/D052 SERIES SERVICE MODE
SC No.
853 D
854 D
855 D
856 D
870 B
920 D
925 D
992 C
993 D
Symptom
IEEE802 11b card startup error
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card access error
Not used.
Possible Cause
IEEE802 11b card error
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card connection board error
Not used.
Address book data error
The address book in the hard disk is accessed. → An error is detected in the address book data; address book data is not read; or data is not written into the address book.
NOTE: To recover from the error, do any of the following countermeasures:
Format the address book by using
SP5-832-008 (all data in the address book–including the user codes and counters–is initialized)
Initialize the user data by using SP5-
832-006 and -007 (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on).
Replace the hard disk (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on).
Printer error
The printer program cannot be continued.
• Data corruption
• Defective hard disk
• Defective software
•
•
Defective hardware
Data corruption
• Defective software
Net file error
The management file for net files is corrupted; net files are not normally read.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
•
•
•
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Other system SCs
The controller received an unknown
SC code from the engine.
Network error
The ASIC program of GW controller cannot be continued.
•
•
•
Contact your product specialist.
Defective ASIC
Defective GW controller
SM 4-83
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OTHER PROBLEMS (B064/B140/B246/D052 SERIES)
4.4 OTHER PROBLEMS (B064/B140/B246/D052 SERIES)
4.4.1 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Fuse
115 V
Rating
210~230V
Symptom at Power On
FU103 6.3A/125V 6.3A/250V SC510 is displayed.
FU104 6.3A/125V 6.3A/250V Nothing displayed on LCD.
FU106 6.3A/125V 6.3A/250V ADF does not operate.
FU107 6.3A/125V 6.3A/250V SC121 is displayed.
FU110 6.3A/125V 6.3A/250V SC510 is displayed.
4.4.2 COMMON PROBLEMS
Problem
Dirty Copies
Check
Fusing Unit
Jam – Fusing Unit
Jam – Fusing Unit
Fusing Unit
Fusing Unit
Jam – Original ADF
Lines (black or white) Around the Drum
Misfeed – Fusing Unit Fusing Unit
Offset Fusing Unit
Poor separation Transfer Belt Unit
SC300 ~ SC306 Around the Drum
Skew – Original ADF
Toner on transfer belt Transfer Belt Unit
Wrinkling Fusing Unit
Inspect, Clean, Replace
Pressure roller
Hot roller
Hot roller strippers
Pick-up, paper feed, separation rollers
Cleaning blade, cleaning brush
Hot roller
Hot roller
Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade
Charge corona wire, charge corona grid, charge corona wire cleaner.
Pick-up, paper feed, separation rollers
Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade
Pressure roller
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-84
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OTHER PROBLEMS (B064/B140/B246/D052 SERIES)
4.4.3 FREQUENT PAPER JAMS
If there are frequent paper jams, check SP7504 in section “5. Service Tables”. If these locations have frequent jams, do the procedures described below.
Symptom 1: Jams when paper is fed from a by-pass tray that is not used frequently
If the customer does not use the by-pass tray frequently, the rollers can become worn.
1. Visually check the by-pass tray pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. If these rollers are paler than the rollers in paper trays that are more frequently used, replace the rollers in the by-pass tray.
NOTE: For more details, see 3. Replacement and Adjustment, “3.11.12 By-
Pass Tray Rollers.”
Symptom 2: Jams with noise from the paper feed unit
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B246T905.WMF
1. Remove the paper feed unit. For details, see 3. Replace and Adjustment,
“3.11.8 Paper Feed Unit.”
2. Loosen screw [A].
3. Push the motor [B] toward the tray side, then tighten the screw [A].
4. Loosen screws [C] and [D], let the spring move the unit to the correct position, then tighten the screws.
SM 4-85
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
OTHER PROBLEMS (B064/B140/B246/D052 SERIES)
Symptom 3: Other
1. If none of the two symptoms 1 or 2 applies, do this procedure.
2. Use SP7504 to check the jam counts and find which SPs have high counts.
3. From the table and illustration below, find which gears must be replaced.
Example: For tray 1, if SP7504-012 is high, replace gear A, or if SP7504-008 is high, replace gear B.
Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
SP7504 12 SP7504 8
Gear [A] Gear [B]
Gear [A]
SP7504 9 SP7504 10 SP7504 11
Gear [B]
Gear [A] Gear [B]
Gear [A] Gear [B]
4. Clean the shafts and replace the necessary gears.
5. Replace a gear if its cutout and arrow are not in the same position.
[B]
[A]
B246T906.WMF
6. When you replace Gear [A] or Gear [B], be sure to put the metal face on the outer side, and the arrow must be in view.
7. If a replacement gear is not available, do this as a temporary procedure:
1) Remove the paper feed unit.
2) Remove the gear.
3) Clean the gear shaft and inside the gear.
4) Attach the gear.
5) Install the paper feed unit.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
4-86
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE TABLES
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and adjust values.
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
NOTE: This function is not used on B064 series machines.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF. After he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on.
It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to “1”.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP 5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.
SM 5-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
To Enter and Exit the Service Mode
1. Press “Clear Modes .”
2. On the operation panel keypad, press .
3. Hold down “Clear/Stop ” for more than 3 seconds.
The Copy SP or PM Counter items are displayed. If the printer or scanner/printer option is installed, the Printer SP and Scanner SP items are also available.
To enter normal Copy SP mode, press “Copy SP”.
4. When you are finished, press “Exit” to exit the SP mode, then press again to return to the Copier Window.
To Enter and Exit the Super SP Mode
5. Press “Clear Modes .”
6. On the operation panel keypad, press .
7. Hold down “Clear/Stop ” for more than 3 seconds.
The Copy SP or PM Counter items are displayed. If the printer or scanner/printer option is installed, the Printer SP and Scanner SP items are also available.
8. Press "Copy SP" and the [#] on the operation panel together.
9. When you are finished, press “Exit” to exit the Super SP mode, then press
"Exit" again to return to the Copier Window.
To Switch to the Copy Window for Test Printing
1. In the SP mode display, press “Copy Window” to switch to the copy operation screen when you need to select paper for a test print.
2. Use the copy window (copier mode) to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3. Press “Start ” to execute the test print.
4. Press “SP Mode” (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Using the SP Mode
SP command numbers can be entered directly (if you know the entire number) or the command can be selected from the menus.
Direct Entry
SP5831 (Initial Setting Clear) is an executable SP that initializes the User Tools settings, and can be executed immediately by entering the numbers.
1. Press .
2. Press “Enter ”.
3. Press “Execute” on the touch panel.
If you know all seven digits of the SP code, enter the seven numbers and press
“Execute”.
However, if you do not know all the numbers, enter only the first four numbers of the seven-digit SP and press “Enter ”. The display goes immediately to the first
SP of that group. Then you can use the buttons to browse to the desired selection.
Button Selection Entry
1. Refer to the SP Mode Tables at the end of this section to find the SP that you want to adjust.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set, and press . The small entry box on the right is activated and displays the default or the current setting below.
5. To enter a setting
• Press to enter a minus sign. Then use the keypad to enter the appropriate number. The number you enter will write over the previous setting.
• Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the key press is ignored.)
• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press “Copy Window” to open the copy window and select the settings for the test print. Press “Start ” twice, then press “SP Mode” (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. When you are finished, press “Exit” twice to return to the copy window.
SM 5-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SP Mode Button Summary
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
SP Mode (Service)
(1)
Open All
(2)
Close All
(3)
Copy Window
(4)
SP Direct
(5)
14APR 2002 03:25
X-XXX-XXX Exit
SP1XXX
SP2XXX
SP3XXX
SP4XXX
Group
Page
Line
COPY: SP1-001-001
(6) (7) (8) (9)
SP5XXX
Line
21
SP6XXX
Page
Initial 0 (10)
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
Group Prev Page Next Page
B246S901.WMF
(1): Open All .
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
(2): Close All .
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
(3): Copy Window .
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP mode screen, press “SP Mode” (highlighted) in the copy window.
(4): SP Direct .
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number, then press
. (SP Direct must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Direct if it is not highlighted.)
(5): Exit .
Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
(6): SPnxxx .
Press any group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For example, to open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, press SP1XXX. If an SP has sublevels, it is marked with a right pointing triangle.
(7): Group .
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
(8): Page .
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
(9): Line .
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
(10): Prev Page or Next Page .
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SP Mode Print (SMC Print)
You can print an SMC Report to check the machine’s condition and history. The
SMC Report gives a list of the SP commands and their settings.
5990 SP Print Mode (SMC Print)
In the SP mode, push ‘Copy Window’ to move to the copy screen, select the paper size, then push Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to make sure that all the information is printed. Push ‘SP Window’ to go back to the SP mode, select the necessary SP Print Mode, and push Execute.
001
002
003
All (Data List)
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program Data
006
007
021
023
Non-Default (Prints only SPs that are set to values other than defaults.)
NIB Summary (Configuration, Systemlog, Nvramlog)
Copier User Program (Copy Management Report)
Scanner User Program (Scanner Management Report)
SM 5-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
RESETS
5.2 RESETS
5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801
Before shipping, the SP mode data settings are printed in an SMC Report and attached to the exposure glass of the machine for your reference. Store this report in a safe place (next to the toner collection bottle, for example).
It is a list of all the SP initial settings. Refer to this list if you need to initialize one or more
SPs. The initial SP settings are also written in the SP mode tables at the end of this section.
As a rule, you should always print an SMC Report before initializing or adjusting the SP settings. The SMC Report provides a concise list of all the SP commands and their current settings. The report can be used for reference if the service manual is not available.
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their default settings except the following:
SP7003-001 (B064)
SP8381 (B140)
Electrical total counter value
SP5907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
1. Execute SP5990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP mode 5801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to initialize all modules. (See the next few pages for series-specific items tables)
4. Press Execute, then follow the prompts on the display to complete the procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
• Execute SP2115 – Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
• Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments
( 3.14).
• Do the touch screen calibration ( 3.15).
• Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been changed from their factory settings.
• Execute SP3001-002 – ID Sensor Initial Setting
6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
RESETS
B064 Series
1 All modules
2 Engine
Service)
/SRM
4 IMH
Service)
6 Copier application
7 Fax application
8 Printer application
9 Scanner application
10 Network application
Service)
14 DCS
15 UCS
(Network
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
Comments
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
Initializes the image file system.
Initializes all copier application settings.
Not used.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery & Receive Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Directory Control Service) settings.
SM 5-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
RESETS
B140 Series
No.
1
2
3
What It Initializes
All Clear
Engine Clear
SCS
Comments
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control
Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
4 IMH Memory Clear Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
5 MCS Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
7 Fax application Not used.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
Service/
Network application
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
14 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
15 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
16 MIRS Setting
17 CCS
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
RESETS
B246/D052 Series
5801 Memory Clear ( B246/D052 )
Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear
002 Engine Clear
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
003 SCS
004 IMH Memory Clear
005 MCS
006 Copier application
007 Fax application
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control
Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and
ROM update information.
Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Initializes all copier application settings.
008 Printer application
009 Scanner application
010 Web Service/Network application
011 NCS
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
012 R-FAX
014 Clear DCS Setting
015 Clear UCS Setting
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
016 MIRS Setting
017 CCS
018 SRM Clear
019 LCS Clear
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS ( Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
SM 5-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
RESETS
5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET
Software Reset
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. To reboot the software, perform one of these two steps:
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Push and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons. After “Now loading, Please wait” is displayed for a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is ready for operation.
Resetting the System
The system settings in the UP (User Program) mode can be reset to their defaults with this procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the “#” key and touch the “System Setting” key.
4. A confirmation message will be displayed, then press “Yes”.
Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only
The copy/document server settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Push the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the “#” key and touch the “Copy/Document Server Features” key.
4. A message will be displayed, then press “Yes”.
Resetting Scanner Features Only
The scanner settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Push the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the “#” key and touch “Scanner Features” key.
4. A message will be displayed, then press “Yes”.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
TEST PATTERN PRINTING
5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-003
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments ( 3.14) but most are used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU, so they are also useful for diagnosing if an image defect is the result of a faulty IPU.
NOTE: Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely.
Otherwise, an SC code may occur.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2902-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press . (See the table on the next page.)
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes to select the test pattern for printing.
4. Press “Copy Window” to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper size, etc.).
5. Press “Start ” twice (ignore the “Place Original” messages) to start the test print.
6. After checking the test pattern, press “SP Mode” (highlighted) to return to the
SP mode display.
7. Exit the SP mode.
SM 5-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
TEST PATTERN PRINTING
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Test Pattern Table
The following patterns can be selected in SP2902-003.
0 None
1 Alternating Dot Pattern (1-dot)
2 Alternating Dot Pattern (2-dot)
3 Alternating Dot Pattern (4-dot)
4 Alternating Dot Pattern (1024-dot)
5 Grid Pattern (1-dot): 0ch
6 Grid Pattern (1-dot): 1ch
7 Grid Pattern (1-dot): 2ch
8 Grid Pattern (1-dot): 3ch
9 Grid Pattern (1-dot pair)
10 Checkered Flag Pattern
11 Horizontal Line (2-dot)
13 Horizontal Line (1-dot)
19 Full Dot Pattern
20 Black Band (Vertical)
21 Black Band (Horizontal)
22 Stair
24 Grid Pattern (1-dot): 0ch (with external data)
25 Trimming Area (with external data)
26 Argyle Pattern (with external data)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
TEST PATTERN PRINTING
5.3.2 IPU FRONT/BACK TEST PATTERNS: SP2902-001,002
• Front side pattern (SP2902-001). Generated by the IPU in place of data scanned from the front side of an original (CCD → SBU). Generated in the scanner image correction circuit.
• Back side pattern . (SP2902-002). Generated by the IPU in place of data scanned from the back side of an original (CIS → SBU). Generated in the scanner image correction circuit.
The IPU test patterns are primarily used for design purposes. However, they can be used as follows:
• To confirm that the IPU is processing images correctly.
• To fine tune the image processing parameters
• To help trace the causes of poor images. For example, if the IPU test patterns are normal when the machine is producing poor quality images, then the problem must be after the IPU.
1. Enter the SP mode, select SP2902.
2. Select 001 to print a test pattern for the front side, or select 002 to print a test pattern for the back side.
3. Scroll, then select, the number of the test pattern that you want to print (see the table on the next page).
4. Press .
5. Press “Copy Window” to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper size, etc.)
6. Press “Start ” to start the test print.
7. Press “SP” Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
NOTE: Patterns 6, 8, 9, and 11 are the best choices for testing and confirming the operation of the IPU.
SM 5-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
TEST PATTERN PRINTING
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Test Pattern Table
The following patterns can be selected for both SP2902-001 and 002.
0 None
3 Horizontal Line (1-dot)
4 Horizontal Line (2-dot)
6 Grid Pattern (1-dot)
8 Grayscale Horizontal (16-level)
9 Grayscale Vertical )16-level)
10 Grayscale Vertical-Horizontal (16-level)
13 Density Patch (256-level)
14 Density Patch (64-level)
18 Auto Create Vertical 1-dot Line (Main Scan)
19 Auto Create Horizontal 1-dot Line (Sub Scan)
20 Auto Create Vertical 2-dot Line (Main Scan)
21 Auto Create Horizontal 2-dot Line (Sub Scan)
22 Auto Create 1-dot Independent Dots
23 Auto Create Grid 1-dot Line
24 Auto Create Vertical Stripes
25 Auto Create Horizontal Stripes
26 Auto Create Grayscale Horizontal (20 mm)
27 Auto Create Grayscale Horizontal (40 mm)
28 Auto Create Grayscale Vertical (20 mm)
29 Auto Create Grayscale Vertical (40 mm)
30 Auto Create Argyle
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
TEST PATTERN PRINTING
5.3.3 IPU PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-004
This test pattern is generated in the application input processing circuit in the IPU.
The operation path is as follows:
Application input → Memory → Printer
This test pattern is primarily used for design purposes, but it can also be used to trace the source of problems beyond the IPU (in the application input or BICU) which are causing poor print quality.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2902-004.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press . (See the table below.)
No. Pattern
0 Off
1 Vertical Grayscale 20
2 Horizontal Grayscale 40
3 Horizontal Grayscale 20
4 Horizontal Grayscale 25
5 Caterpillar
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press “Yes” to select the test pattern for printing.
4. Press “Copy Window” to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper size, etc.)
5. Press “Start ” twice (ignore the “Place Original” messages) to start the test print.
6. Press “SP Mode” (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
7. Switch the machine off and on.
SM 5-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE UPDATE
5.4 SOFTWARE UPDATE
The cards that are necessary for the software update, and the update procedures, are different for each machine:
B140 Series/B246/D052 Series SD Card
B064 Series IC Memory Card
For more, refer to the applicable section below.
( 5.4.1)
( 5.4.2)
5.4.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE: B140/B246/D052
SERIES
SD cards are used with the B140/B246 Series to update the software and to back up important data. Here is a list of the firmware modules that can be updated or restored from an SD card:
• GW controller software
• BCU software
• LCDC (operation panel) software
• Network Sys (network) software
• Web Sys (Web Image Monitor)
• Document Server software
• NFA (Net File) software
• Printer application software
• Scanner application software
• DESS (encryption module) software
Important:
Here are some important points to remember when you use IC cards or SD cards.
• Never connect or remove an IC card or SD card with the machine power turned on.
• Never turn the power off while the machine is downloading data from an IC card or SD card.
• The IC cards and SD card are precision items. Use them carefully.
• Never store IC cards or SD cards in a location where they are exposed to high temperature, high humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Never bend an IC card or SD card, scratch it, or expose it to strong vibration.
• Before uploading data to an SD card, always confirm that its write-protect switch is off.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Doing the Software Update Procedure
An SD card with the software downloaded to it is necessary for this procedure.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
3. Hold the SD card [B] (the surface with printing must be away from the front of the machine), and install the SD card in Slot C3 [C].
4. Turn the main power switch on.
[B]
[A]
[C]
B246S902.WMF
5. Stop until the version update screen is displayed. If the SD card contains more than one software application, the screen will be almost the same as the one below. The screen below shows that the SC card contains two applications:
“Engine” and “Printer”.
PCcard -> ROM Page01
Engine(1)
P rinter(2)
ROM: XXXXXXX
ROM: X.XX
ROM: XXXXXXX
ROM: X.XX
NEW: XXXXXXX
NEW: X.XX
NEW: XXXXXXX
NEW: X.XX
Exit(0)
B246S903.WMF
SM 5-17
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE UPDATE
6. To select the item for upgrade, press the selection on the touch panel, or push the corresponding key on the 10-key pad (1 to 5) of the operation panel. The number in parentheses tells you which key to push. When you make a selection, the [Verify(./*)] and [Update(#)] buttons come on the screen.
PCcard -> ROM Page01
Engine(1)
P rinter(2)
ROM: XXXXXXX
ROM: X.XX
ROM: XXXXXXX
ROM: X.XX
NEW: XXXXXXX
NEW: X.XX
NEW: XXXXXXX
NEW: X.XX
V erify(./*) Exit(0) U pdate(#)
B246S904.WMF
• If you push [Exit] (or the [0] key), you go back to the usual operation screen.
• Push the [Start] key on the operation panel to select and download all the options shown on the screen.
• Push the [Clear] key on the operation panel if you want to cancel your selections and make new ones.
• “ROM”: This is the number and other version information of the ROM firmware installed in the machine at this time.
• “NEW”: This is the number and other version information of the firmware on the SD card.
7. With the selected items shown in reverse color, push the [Update] button or the
[#] key on the operation panel to start the update.
After you push [Update]:
PCcard -> ROM
Loading
P rinter
****_
B246S905.WMF
The middle bar shows the name of the module that the machine updates at this time. (The example above shows that the machine updates the “Printer” module at this time.)
The bottom bar is a progress bar. The ‘_’ marks in the progress bar are replaced by ‘*’ marks. This progress bar cannot be displayed during the firmware update for the operation panel. But, the LED of the [Start] key on the operation panel changes from red to green to show that the update of the operation panel firmware continues.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
When the update is completed, you will see this screen.
PCcard -> ROM
U pdate D one
P rinter
B246S906.WMF
After the firmware update, you will see “Update Done” in the first bar. The name of the module in the bottom bar is the name of the last module that was updated
(only the name of the last module is shown, if several modules were been updated).
8. Turn the power off and on. Then, select the items that you updated, and then push the [Verify] button. This is to check that the modules were updated correctly.
If you see “Verify Error” in the first bar on the screen, then you must do the procedure again for the module shown in the bottom bar.
PCcard -> ROM
V erify Error
P rinter
B246S907.WMF
NOTE: The “Verify” procedure is not necessary but it is strongly recommended.
9. After the firmware is correctly updated, turn the main power switch off.
10. Push the SD card in a small distance to release it, then pull it out of the slot.
11. Turn the main power switch on, and check that the machine operates correctly.
SM 5-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Errors During Firmware Update
PCcard -> ROM
N o V alid D ata E24
If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be shown in the first line. The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example).
Error Message Table
B246S908.WMF
NO. MEANING SOLUTION
20
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
40
42
43
44
50
Cannot map logical address
21 Cannot access memory
22
23
24
Cannot decompress compressed data
Error occurred when ROM update program started
SD card access error
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a different SD card.
HDD connection not correct, or replace hard disk.
The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or data is damaged.
Controller program defective. If the second attempt fails, replace the controller board.
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a different SD card.
HDD connection not correct or replace hard disks. No HDD available for stamp data download
Data incorrect for continuous download
Data incorrect after download interrupted
Incorrect SD card version
Module mismatch - Correct module is not on the SD card
Module mismatch – Module on
SD card is not for this machine
Install the SD card with the remaining data necessary for the download, then re-start the procedure.
Do the recovery procedure for the module, then repeat the installation procedure.
The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or data is damaged.
The data on the SD is not correct. Get the correct data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD card is for a different machine. Get the correct data then install again.
Cannot write module – Cause other than E34, E35
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD card is for a different machine. Get the correct data then install again.
Engine module download failed Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel module download failed
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download failed
Controller module download failed
Electronic confirmation check failed
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the hard disk.
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and tray again, or replace the controller board.
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD card is for a different machine. Get the correct data then install again.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-20
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel
Use this procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Put the SD card into service slot C3.
3. Turn the copier main switch on.
4. Stop until the card utility screen is displayed.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, the initial screen opens in English.
6. Touch [Opepanel.DOM].
7. Touch [UpDate(#)] to start the update.
While the data downloads, the operation panel goes off.
The LED on the [Start] key flashes red at 1/2 second intervals for approximately 6 minutes.
When the update is completed, the [Start] key starts to flash at 1-second intervals.
8. Turn the copier main power switch off, remove the SD card, then turn the copier on again.
Downloading Stamp Data
After you replace or format the HDD, download the stamp data from the controller firmware to the hard disk.
1. Go into the SP mode.
2. Select SP5853 then press “Execute”.
3. Obey the instructions on the screen to complete the procedure.
SD Card Boot (Forced Boot)
Use this procedure to boot up the machine if the boot area of the controller board becomes corrupt In most cases, this procedure needs to be performed only once.
After that, the machine should be able to boot without the Boot SD Card If the
Machine still will not boot normally, even after performing this procedure, investigate other potential failures (failed controller board, etc.).
1. Turn the main power off.
2. Insert the boot SD card into the C1 slot.
3. Set controller board DIP SW4 #5OFF , #6ON and #7 OFF .
4. Turn the main power ON
NOTE: After the machine boots up, it will install the firmware stored on the boot SD Card.
5. Turn the main power OFF
SM 5-21
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE UPDATE
6. Remove the boot SD Card from the C1 slot.
7. Return the DIP SW4 #6 to the OFF position.
8. Install all of the latest machine firmware posted on the TSC Web Site at http://www.tscweb.net
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-22
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Do this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
NOTE: Always upload this data to an SD card before you replace the NVRAM.
1. Before you turn the machine off, do SP5990 001 (SMC Print). This gives you a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Turn the copier main power switch off.
3. Put the SD card into service slot C3, then turn the copier on.
4. Do SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) then push the “Execute” key
When uploading is completed, a file is coped to the NVRAM folder on the SD card. The file is saved to this path and filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example for Serial Number “B0700017”:
NVRAM\B0700017.NV
5. To prevent an error during the download, write the serial number of the machine on the SD card.
NOTE: This is necessary because NVRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded to the same SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM
Do this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between the controller and BCU is defective, the NVRAM data download will not complete correctly.
• If the second attempt download does not complete correctly, do the download procedure again.
• If this does not complete correctly, input the NVRAM data manually from the
SMC print that you made before you uploaded the NVRAM data.
1. Turn the copier main power switch off.
2. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data into service slot C3.
3. Turn the copier main power switch on.
4. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and push the “Execute” key.
NOTE:
• This procedure also downloads the C/O, P/O Count data to the NVRAM:
• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the download will not complete correctly.
SM 5-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE UPDATE
5.4.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE: B064 SERIES
IC (PCMCIA/CIA) cards are used to update the software and to back up important data. Here is a list of the items that can be updated or restored from an IC card:
• BCU software
• GW controller software
• LCDC (operation panel) software
• Language software
• Scanner (DIMM) software
• PHY: NCS (NIB) software
• PHY: NFA (NetFile) software
• Stamp data
• NVRAM software
First, install the BCU software, then the GW controller software, then the others can be upgraded in any order.
Important:
Here are some important points to keep in mind when handling and using IC cards.
• Never insert or remove a IC card with the machine power switched on.
• Never switch the power off while the machine is downloading data from an IC card.
• The IC card is a precision item so handle it carefully. Never store the card in a location subject to high temperature, high humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Never bend the card, scratch it, or subject it to strong shock or vibration.
If an error occurs during downloading, an error code appears. For full details on these error codes and how to recover the machine, see ‘Troubleshooting –
Program Download’ (Section 4.1).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
GW Controller/BCU Update
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Disconnect the ADF plug, remove the rear upper cover ( x 2), then remove the IC card slot cover ( x 1).
3. With it’s a side facing up, insert the IC card into the slot.
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Wait for the update screen to open.
PC Card -> NEW
System (1)
Copy (2)
Engine (3)
Page 01
ROM: B0655102
ROM: 0.4.6
ROM: B0655102
ROM: 0. 4. 6
ROM: B0655120
ROM: 2.19
Exit (0)
NEW: B0655102
NEW: 0.4.6
NEW: B0655102
NEW: 0. 4. 6
NEW: B0655120
NEW: 2.19
B246S909.WMF
NOTE: 1) In the ROM number displays, the first line is the software number and the second line is the version number.
2) The left column displays the current software and version numbers of the software in the machine, and the column on the right displays the same information for the data on the IC card.
6. Press the appropriate item on the touch-panel.
• For the GW controller, press System (1) and Copy (2) on the touch-panel, or you can press or on the operation panel.
• For the BCU, press Engine (3) on the touch-panel, or you can press on the operation panel.
• To update all, press two buttons simultaneously.
PC Card -> NEW
System (1)
Copy (2)
Engine (3)
Verify (./*)
Page 01
ROM: B0655102
ROM: 0.4.6
ROM: B0655102
ROM: 0. 4. 6
ROM: B0655120
ROM: 2.19
Exit (0)
NEW: B0655102
NEW: 0.4.6
NEW: B0655102
NEW: 0. 4. 6
NEW: B0655120
NEW: 2.19
Update (#)
B246S910.WMF
7. To start the installation, press Update (#) on the touch panel, or press on the operation panel.
8. The installation screen opens. As the installation progresses, the dashes on the display are replaced by asterisks (****----)
9. When “Power Off/On” is displayed, switch the machine off and remove the IC card.
SM 5-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Forced Update
If the download does not complete normally and you cannot restart the installation procedure, execute a forced installation.
1. Switch off the machine.
2. Remove the controller cover and set DIP SW1 to ON.
3. Make sure that the IC card is inserted correctly and switch the machine on.
4. Repeat from Step 5 of the previous section.
NOTE: If the IC card of a different machine is used by mistake to start the installation, the operation panel will return a message: “Download
Error” or “No Matching Data”. Then the machine will log SC999.
Stamp Data Update
After the hard disk has been initialized, the preset stamp data must be downloaded to the hard disk.
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Disconnect the ADF plug, remove the rear upper cover ( x 2), then remove the IC card slot cover ( x 1).
3. With the A side facing up, insert the printer IC card into the slot.
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Wait for the update screen to open.
In the lower right corner of the Download Watermark screen, press OK on the touch panel.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Operation Panel Software Update
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Disconnect the ADF plug, remove the rear upper cover ( x 2), then remove the IC card slot cover ( x 1).
3. With it’s A side facing up, put the operation panel IC card into the slot.
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Wait for the update screen to open.
Press “OpePanel.EXP” then press Update (#).
The installation download starts in about 9 seconds.
The operation panel goes off and the Start LED flashes red during downloading.
When the download is completed, the Start LED flashes green.
6. Switch the machine off, remove the IC card, then switch the machine on.
NOTE: 1) During the download, the operation panel switches off and only the Start key flashes red.
2) You must wait until the Start key stops flashing red and starts flashing green.
3) If a power failure occurs during downloading, E32 (Reboot After Card
Insert) is logged. Remove the IC card, switch off the machine. Insert the card again and switch on the machine to restart downloading.
SM 5-27
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Scanner Update
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Disconnect the ADF plug, remove the rear upper cover ( x 2), then remove the IC card slot cover ( x 1).
3. With it’s a side facing up, insert the scanner IC card into the slot.
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Wait for the update screen to open.
Press “Opt DIMM Scn (1)” then press Update (#).
When “Power Off/On” is displayed, the download is completed.
6. Switch the machine off, remove the IC card, then switch the machine on.
NIB Update
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Disconnect the ADF plug, remove the rear upper cover ( x 2), then remove the IC card slot cover ( x 1).
3. With it’s a side facing up, insert the NIB data IC card into the slot.
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Wait for the update screen to open.
Press “Network Support (1)” then press Update (#).
When “Power Off/On” is displayed, the download is completed.
6. Switch the machine off, remove the IC card, then switch the machine on.
NetFile Firmware Update
Netfile firmware controls jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software.
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Disconnect the ADF plug, remove the rear upper cover ( x 2), then remove the IC card slot cover ( x 1).
3. With it’s a side facing up, insert the NetFile IC card into the slot.
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Wait for the update screen to open.
Press “Network DocBox (1)” then press Update (#).
When “Power Off/On” is displayed, the installation is completed.
6. Switch the machine off, remove the IC card, then switch the machine on.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-28
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
NVRAM Update
This procedure describes updating the NVRAM firmware ( 3.12.7).
NOTE: Before updating NVRAM, the contents of NVRAM should be uploaded to a
PC memory card and then downloaded after updating the NVRAM firmware ( 3.12.7).
1. Switch the main power switch off.
2. Disconnect the ADF plug, remove the rear upper cover ( x 2), then remove the IC card slot cover ( x 1).
3. With it’s a side facing up, insert the NVRAM IC card into the slot.
4. Open the front door.
NOTE: The success of the download cannot be guaranteed if the front door is closed during the download execution.
5. Switch the machine on.
6. After the download is completed, a message on the operation panel will prompt you to switch the machine off and on.
7. Switch the machine off, remove the IC card, then switch the machine on.
The NVRAM download execution updates everything except the following SP functions:
SP7003 *** Total Count
SP7006 *** C/O, P/O
SP7007 *** Other Device Counters
Firmware Update Notes
• GW Controller Ver. 3.51 (or later), Scanner 2.08 Ver. 2.08 (or later) support
SMTP authentication.
• When installing Ver. 4.01 or later, make sure that you install the GW Controller firmware and other firmware as a set if the Copy Connector Kit or MLB option are not installed.
• If the Copy Connector Kit or MLB is installed, make sure that you have the correct firmware for installation. You will need the set of firmware that supports the Copy Connector Kit and MLB options.
• When updating BCU firmware Ver. 4.x or later, use GW controller firmware Ver.
3x or later.
• When updating GW controller firmware Ver. 3x or later, use BCU firmware Ver.
4.x or later.
SM 5-29
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5.5.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY
Notation
(B064)
(B140)
What it means
An SP for the B064/B065 only. *1
An SP for the B140 Series only.
*1
(B140/B246/D052) An SP for both the B140 Series and the B246/D052 Series.
(B246/D052)
[range/step]
An SP for the B246/D052 Series only.
Example: [–9~+9/0.1 mm]
Italics
*
DFU
Japan only
SEF
The default setting can be adjusted in 0.1mm steps in the range ± 9.
Note : The default setting for each SP mode is shown on the screen in the “Initial” box immediately below the entry box. Some of the default settings for the B064, B140, and B246 Series are different, so be sure to check the “Initial” box on the SP mode screen.
Comments added for reference.
An asterisk marks the SP’s that are reset to their factory default settings after an NVRAM reset.
Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value.
The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
Short Edge Feed
LEF
NIA
Long Edge Feed
No Information Available
* 1 : SP titles without these notations apply to machines of every series (B064,
B140, B246/D052).
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-30
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Rev. 07/2007
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5.5.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLE
SP1xxx Feed
1001 * Leading Edge Registration
Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern
(SP2902-003, No.18).
[–9~+9/0.1mm]
Specification: 3 ± 2mm
1002 * Side-to-Side
Adjusts printing side-to-side registration for each feed station, using test pattern
(SP2902-003, No.18).
These SP’s should be adjusted after replacing the laser synchronization detector or the laser optical unit.
001 Tray-1
002 Tray-2
003 Tray-3
004 Tray-4 (Japan Only)
006 LCT
1003 Registration Buckle Adjustment
Adjusts the registration motor timing. This timing determines the amount of paper buckle at registration. (A higher setting causes more buckling.)
[–9~+9/1 mm]
⇒
1104* Fusing Temperature Control (B064)
Selects the fusing temperature control mode.
[0~1/ 0 ]
0: On/Off control
1: Phase control
If power supply to the machine is unstable, select Phase Control. The machine must be switched off and on after this setting is changed for the new setting to take effect.
Phase control could interfere with radio or TV reception.
1105* Fusing Temperature Adjustment
Adjusts the fusing temperature of the hot roller for plain paper, OHP or thick paper.
001 Normal Time (Center
Thermistor)
Fusing temperature during the ready condition (and during printing for B064)
B064: [150~230/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
002 Normal Time (End
Thermistors) (B140)
Fusing temperature during the ready condition
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
SM 5-31
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
OHP (Center Thermistor)
OHP (End Thermistor)
(B140)
Thick Paper (Center
Thermistor)
Thick Paper (End
Thermistors) (B140)
Normal Paper (Center
Thermistor) (B140)
Normal Paper (End
Thermistor) (B140)
Small Size – Normal Paper
(Center)
Small Size – Thick Paper
(Center)
Fusing temperature during printing:
B064: [150~230/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B064: [180~205/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B140: [150~230/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature at center of hot roller when printing on normal paper:
B246: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature at center of hot roller when printing on thick paper:
B246: [180~205/1 degree C]
1106 Fusing Temperature Display
Temperature Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistor at the center of the hot roller.
002 End Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistors at the ends of the hot roller.
1107 Start Fusing Temperature Adjustment ( B246 )
This SP allows you to set when to start the fusing temperature adjustment for the center and end heating lamps.
001
002
Center Lamp Temperature
End Lamp Temperature
[180~205/ 205 /1 deg C]
003
004
005
Center Lamp Actual Time
End Lamp Actual Time
Center Lamp Temp (Small Size Paper)
[0~120/ 60 /1 sec.]
[190~205/ 205 /1 deg C]
006
007
008
End Lamp Actual Time (Small Size Paper) [0~120/ 60 /1 sec.]
Center Lamp Temp (Thick Paper) [190~205/ 205 /1 deg C]
End Lamp Actual Time (Thick Paper) [0~120/ 60 /1 sec.]
1008* Duplex Fence Adjustment
Adjusts the distance between front and rear fences. A smaller value shortens the distance. If the fences are too far apart, skewing may occur in the duplex tray. If the fences are too close, the paper may be creased in the duplex unit.
[–5~+5/0.1 mm]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-32
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
1103 * Fusing (B064)
This setting controls the length of time that the hot roller turns freely with no paper in the fusing unit. This increases the temperature of the hot roller.
Adjusts the fusing idling time:
[0~900/1 s]
Increase this value when fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is not completed because of low room temperature.
1104* Fusing Temperature Control (B064)
Selects the fusing temperature control mode.
[0~1/1]
0: On/Off control
1: Phase control
If power supply to the machine is unstable, select Phase Control. The machine must be switched off and on after this setting is changed for the new setting to take effect.
Phase control could interfere with radio or TV reception.
1105* Fusing Temperature Adjustment
Adjusts the fusing temperature of the hot roller for plain paper, OHP or thick paper.
001 Normal Time (Center
Thermistor)
Fusing temperature during the ready condition (and during printing for B064)
B064: [150~230/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
002 Normal Time (End
Thermistors) (B140)
Fusing temperature during the ready condition
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
003 OHP (Center Thermistor)
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
OHP (End Thermistor)
(B140)
Thick Paper (Center
Thermistor)
Thick Paper (End
Thermistors)
Thermistor)
Normal Paper (End
Thermistor)
Small Size – Thick Paper
(Center)
(B140)
(B140)
(B140)
Normal Paper (Center
Small Size – Normal Paper
(Center)
Fusing temperature during printing:
B064: [150~230/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B064: [180~205/1 degree C]
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B140: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B140/B246: [150~230/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature during printing:
B140/B246: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature at center of hot roller when printing on normal paper:
B246: [180~205/1 degree C]
Fusing temperature at center of hot roller when printing on thick paper:
B246: [180~205/1 degree C]
SM 5-33
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES Rev. 01/2007
1106 Fusing Temperature Display
Temperature Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistor at the center of the hot roller.
002 End Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistors at the ends of the hot roller.
1107 Start Fusing Temperature Adjustment ( B246 )
This SP allows you to set when to start the fusing temperature adjustment for the center and end heating lamps.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
Center Lamp Temperature
End Lamp Temperature
Center Lamp Actual Time
End Lamp Actual Time
[180~205/
[0~120/ 60
205 /1 deg C]
/1 sec.]
Center Lamp Temp (Small Size Paper) [190~205/ 205 /1 deg C]
End Lamp Actual Time (Small Size Paper) [0~120/ 60 /1 sec.]
Center Lamp Temp (Thick Paper)
End Lamp Actual Time (Thick Paper)
[190~205/
[0~120/ 60
205 /1 deg C]
/1 sec.]
1112 Auto Process Control
Sets the temperature of the hot roller for auto process control to start.
[70 ο ~150 ο /1 ο C] DFU
1159 Fusing Jam: SC Setting
This SP determines what the machine does if paper jams occur in the fusing unit for three consecutive sheets of paper.
0: (default): A jam alert is shown on the screen. The customer can remove the jam and the machine works normally after that.
1: SC559 occurs. The technician must remove the jam.
⇒
1300 GBC Punch
Enables GBC Punch
1901 * CPM Down for Special Paper
Selects the speed (copies per minute) for copying on thick paper or tab sheets. A slower speed makes fusing better. This setting has no effect on fusing temperature.
002 Tab Sheet
0: 25 cpm
1: 35 cpm
2: 40 cpm
3: 45 cpm
[0~4/1 step]
0: 25 cpm
1: 35 cpm
2: 40 cpm
3: 45 cpm
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-34
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
1902* Fusing Web Motor Control
001 Fusing Web Used Area Display/Setting
002
003
004
Displays the percentage of the web consumption in 1% steps (0% ~ 100%). This setting must be reset to zero after the web is replaced.
[0~120/1 %]
Fusing Web Motor Operation Interval
Adjusts the interval of copy operation time (seconds) after which the web motor is driven.
[5~50/1 s]
Fusing Web Motor Operation Time
Adjusts the length of time that the web motor is driven.
[1~40/0.1 s]
Web Near End Value
005
Adjusts the timing of the web near end alert by changing the amount of web that has been used before the alert is triggered.
[0~100/1 %]
Web Roll Coefficient
Determines the coefficient of the web take-up time from cleaning toner from the roller while taking into consideration the take-up time for web buckle. DFU
[10~20/1]
1903 * Web Job End
001 Yes/No
This determines whether the web motor is driven at the end of a job.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
002
Enable when too much paper dust is causing copies to blacken .
Job End Condition (Continuous PPC Time)
At the end of a job, the web motor is driven if the job lasted longer than the value of this SP mode. Only valid if SP1903-001 is set to ‘On’.
003
[1~99/1s]
Job End Frequency
If the web motor is driven at the end of a job, this SP determines how many times the web motor operation is executed.
[1~5/1]
1904 By-pass Tray Paper Size Correction
Calibrates the minimum paper width position of the sensor (100 mm). Move the side fences to the 100 mm position then press Execute.
Calibrates the maximum paper width position of the sensor (A3). Move the side fences to the A3 position then press Execute.
SM 5-35
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
1905 * Thick Paper – By-pass Tray
Adjusts the by-pass feed clutch operation for thick paper.
[0~1/1]
1: On: 30 ms
0: Off:
This setting switches the by-pass feed clutch on for 30 ms when the registration motor turns on. It only happens when thick paper is selected, to help this paper pass through the registration rollers.
1906 Temperature/Humidity Sensor DFU
1907 Pre-Fusing Idling On/Off (B140)
Pre-fusing idling: The hot roller turns freely to increase its temperature before thick paper or OHP goes through the fusing unit.
[0~1/1]
0: Pre-fusing idling is not done.
1: The fusing motor turns the hot roller with no paper in the fusing unit. This makes sure that the hot roller gets to the correct temperature. It is only done for thick paper or OHP. In this mode, the paper stops at the registration roller.
This roller starts when the hot roller gets to the correct temperature.
1910 Not Used
1911 Not Used
1912 Not Used
1920 Not Used
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-36
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
SP2xxx Drum
2001 * Charge Corona Bias Adjustment
001 Applied Voltage for Image Processing
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process control is off.
[–600~–1300/ 10 V]
After replacing the charge corona wire or the drum, reset to the factory default setting.
002
003
004
ID Sensor Pattern: Adjustment of Applied Voltage
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when the ID sensor pattern is created.
[–600~–1300/10 V]
Setting for Total Bias Current
Adjusts the total current applied to the charge corona wire. DFU
[–900~–1500/10 μ A]
Setting for Total Bias Current of Grid
005
006
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process control is on.
[–600~–1300/10 μ A]
This voltage changes every time auto process control starts up (every time the machine is switched on).
Total Bias Grid Current: OHP Total
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when OHP mode is selected.
[–600~–1300/10 V]
Use this if there is a copy quality problem when making OHP’s.
Total Bias Current: Photo Mode Total
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when Photo mode is selected. DFU
[–1400~ –2800/10 μ A]
2101* Printing Erase Margin
These settings adjust the erase margin for the leading, trailing, left, and right edges.
001 Leading ± 2 mm
002 Trailing ± 2 mm
[0.0~9.0/0.1 mm], Specification: 2 ± 1.5 mm
SM 5-37
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2104* Small Pitch Banding Reduction DFU
001 Reduction Mode On/Off Setting:1200 dpi
Switches on/off the setting that corrects uneven images generated during 1200 dpi printing.
[0~1/1]
1: On
0: Off
Unevenness may appear in dot patterns or narrowly spaced horizontal lines, i.e. some areas may appear lighter or darker than others.
002
003
004
Reduction Mode On: 1200 dpi Printing
Adjusts the amount of correction for uneven images generated during 1200 dpi printing.
[–20~+10/1]
Reduction Mode On/Off: 1200 dpi Copying
Switches on/off the setting that corrects uneven images generated during 1200 dpi copying.
[0~1/1]
1: On
0: Off
Reduction Mode On: 1200 dpi Copying
Adjusts the amount of correction of uneven image generated during 1200 dpi copying.
[–20~+10/1]
2110 Test Mode dpi
Adjusts the pixel density. Required for design check, beam pitch adjustment for the test pattern, etc. DFU .
[0~10/1]
2111 FCI Shade Detection
Allows shading detection if FCI (Fine Character Adjustment) smoothing is on. With this SP switched on, photos and painted areas are detected, and FCI is not applied in these areas. FCI is used for outputs in printer mode.
001
002
003
Matrix Size (>600 dpi)
Threshold Value (>600 dpi)
Matrix Size (<400 dpi)
[0~128/1]
[0~128/1]
[0~128/1]
004 Threshold Value (<400 dpi) [0~128/1]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-38
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2114* Binary Edge Processing Parameter
Allows setting a parameter for binary edge processing for the printer application with FCI switched off. The value for this SP is enabled only when the printer is initialized. In all other cases, the data registered in the software are enabled. This
SP allows adjustment of image quality if the desired effect cannot be achieved with the default settings for edge processing. However, some settings could cause defective images on white paper.
001
002
Leading Edge Pixel Level (1200 dpi)
Trailing Edge Pixel Level (1200 dpi)
[0~15/1]
[0~15/1]
003
004
005
006
Continuous Pixel Level (1200 dpi)
Independent Dot Pixel Level (1200 dpi)
Leading Edge Pixel Level (600 dpi)
Trailing Edge Pixel Level (600 dpi)
[0~15/1]
[0~15/1]
[0~15/1]
[0~15/1]
007
008
Continuous Pixel Level (600 dpi)
Independent Dot Pixel Level (600 dpi)
2115 Main Scan Beam Pitch Adjustment
A label attached to the LD unit service part lists the correct settings. Refer to these settings when adjusting the beam pitch for LD0 to LD3.
001 Pitch Adjustment Between LD0 and LD1 [0~999/1]
002
003
Pitch Adjustment Between LD0 and LD2 [0~999/1]
Pitch Adjustment Between LD0 and LD3 [0~999/1]
2201* Development Bias Adjustment
001 Dev. Bias (Image)
002
Adjusts the development bias for copying when process control is off
[-900 to –100 / 10 V]
Adjust as a temporary measure to compensate for an aging drum until the old drum can be replaced.
ID Sensor Pattern
Adjusts the development bias used to create the ID sensor pattern. DFU
[[-900 to –100/10 V]
This SP and SP2201-004 must be changed together by the same amount.
003 OHP
Adjusts the development bias for copying with OHP sheets.
[-900 to –100 / 10 V]
004 ID Sensor Pattern Dev. Potential
005
Adjusts the development potential to create the ID sensor pattern. DFU
[-380 to -140/10 V]
This SP and SP2201-002 must be changed together by the same amount.
Vb Scale Voltage Setting
Sets the Vb target development bias voltage (Vb). DFU
[-900 to -100/10 V]
SM 5-39
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2207 * Forced Toner Supply
Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner supply unit. Press Execute to force toner supply.
Use to determine if toner supply is operating correctly. If forcing toner supply with this SP does not darken the image, then toner supply is not operating correctly.
2208* Toner Supply Mode
Selects the toner supply mode: Sensor Control or Image Pixel Count.
[0~1/1]
0: Sensor Control
1: Pixel Count
Select Image Pixel Count only if the TD sensor has failed and cannot be replaced immediately, so that the customer can use the machine. Return the setting to
Sensor Control after replacing the sensor.
2209* Toner Supply Rate
Adjusts the toner supply rate.
[50~995/5 mg per sec]
Increasing this value reduces the time the toner supply clutch remains on. Use a lower value if the user tends to make many copies that have large areas of black.
2210* ID Sensor Pattern Interval
Adjusts the time interval between making ID sensor patterns onto the drum for
Vsp/Vsg detection.
[-~200/1]
Reduce the interval for copies that contain a high proportion of black.
2220* Vref Manual Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref) manually.
[1.00~4.00/0.11 V]
Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that already contains toner. For example, when using a development unit from another machine for test purposes, do the following:
1) Check the value of SP2220 in both the machine containing the test unit and the machine that you are going to move it to.
2) Install the test development unit, then input the VREF for this unit into
SP2220.
3) After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2220 back to the original value.
2223* Vt Display
Displays the current TD sensor output voltage.
[0~5.0 V]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-40
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2301 * Transfer Curr. Adj.
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying.
Note : If this SP is too high, toner on the paper can go back to the drum.
001 Front
002 Back
003 By-pass Image Development: Front Side
004 Postcard (Japan Only)
[10~200/1
[10~200/1
μ
μ
A]
A]
007
008
009
010
011
Thick Paper: Front Side
OHP: Front Side
[10~200/1 μ A]
[10~200/1 μ A]
Tracing Paper: Front Side [10~200/1 μ A]
Image Leading Edge DFU [10~200/1
Image Trailing Edge DFU [10~200/1
2310* LCT Trans. Curr. Adj. DFU
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying and paper feed from the LCT.
001
002
003
Main Unit Image Development: Front
Main Unit Image Development: Back
Image Leading Edge: Back
[10~200/1 μ A]
004
005
006
Image Trailing Edge: Back
Image Leading Edge: Thick Paper
Image Trailing Edge: Thick Paper
[10~200/1 μ A]
2311* Tray 1 Trans. Curr. Adj.
DFU
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying and paper feed from
Tray 1.
001
002
Image Leading Edge: Front
Image Trailing Edge: Front
[10~200/1 μ A]
003
004
Image Leading Edge: Back
Image Trailing Edge: Back
005
006
Image Leading Edge: Thick Paper
Image Trailing Edge: Thick Paper
[10~200/1 μ A]
2312* Tray 2 Trans. Curr. Adj.
DFU
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying and paper feed from
Tray 2.
001
002
Image Leading Edge: Front
Image Trailing Edge: Front
[10~200/1 μ A]
003
004
005
Image Leading Edge: Back
Image Trailing Edge: Back
Image Leading Edge: Thick Paper [10~200/1 μ A]
006 Image Trailing Edge: Thick Paper
SM 5-41
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2313 Tray 3 Trans. Curr. Adj.
DFU
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying and paper feed from
Tray 3.
001
002
003
Image Leading Edge - Front
Image Trailing Edge –Front
Image Leading Edge – Back
[10~200/1 μ A]
004
005
006
Image Trailing Edge – Back
Image Leading Edge – Thick Paper
Image Trailing Edge – Thick Paper
[10~200/1 μ A]
2314 Tray 4 Trans. Curr. Adj. (Japan Only)
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying and paper feed from
Tray 4.
001
002
Image Leading Edge: Front
Image Trailing Edge: Front
[10~200/1 μ A]
003
004
Image Leading Edge: Back
Image Trailing Edge: Back
005
006
Image Leading Edge: Thick Paper
Image Trailing Edge: Thick Paper
[10~200/1 μ A]
001
002
003
004
005
006
2315 Bypass Trans. Curr. Adj.
DFU
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying and paper feed from the bypass tray.
Image Leading Edge: Front
Image Trailing Edge: Front
Image Leading Edge: Back
Image Trailing Edge: Back
Image Leading Edge: Thick Paper
Image Trailing Edge: Thick Paper
[10~200/1
[10~200/1
μ
μ
A]
A]
007
008
Image Leading Edge: OHP
Image Leading Edge: OHP
[10~200/1 μ A]
2506 * Cont. Op. Time Cleaning Setting
Determines whether multiple copy jobs are stopped at regular intervals for: 0)
Stopping and reversing the drum motor to clean the cleaning blade edge, and 1) creating an ID sensor pattern to correct toner density control.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
The interval is set with SP2506-002. Use if the drum gets dirty or images get too pale or too dark during a long job.
Selects the interval at which multi-copy jobs are stopped.
[1~100/1 min.]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-42
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2507* ID Sen. Patt. During Job
002
Determines whether an ID sensor pattern is created during copy jobs.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
No. of Copies
Selects the interval (number of copies) between ID sensor patterns when 1 is selected for SP2507-001
[0~10,000/1]
2602 PTL Setting (1st /2nd Copy Side) (B140)
Turns the PTL off and on. The PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp) decreases the charge on the drum to make better separation of the paper from the drum, and prevents stripper pawl marks on the leading edges of copies.
001
Note :
• The PTL operates only when copying with plain paper or translucent paper. It does not operate when copying with OHP, index sheets, or thick paper.
• If blurring occurs in images at the leading edges of copies, switch SP2602-001 off (set to “0”).
ON/OFF Setting
(1st Copy Side)
Turns the PTL lamp on/off during transfer to the front side of the paper at normal speed. This setting is always off when thick paper or OHPs are fed.
002
003
004
OFF Timing (1st
Copy Side)
ON/OFF Setting
(2nd Copy Side)
OFF Timing (2nd
Copy Side)
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
The timing can be adjusted with SP2602-002.
Adjusts the length of the space from the leading edge where
PTL quenching is applied to the front side at normal speed.
For example, if you select +3, then quenching will be done 3 mm from the leading edge on the front side.
[-5~10/0.1]
Turns the PTL lamp on/off during transfer to the front side of the paper at normal speed.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
Adjusts the length of the space from the leading edge where
PTL quenching is applied to the back side at normal speed.
For example, if you select +3, then quenching will be done 3 mm from the leading edge on the back side.
[-5~10/0.1]
SM 5-43
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2801* TD Sensor Initial Setting
Press the Execute button to do the TD sensor initial setting. This SP mode controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor to make the TD sensor output about 3.0 V.
When SP2967 is on, the TD sensor output is set to about 2.5 V.
Note : Execute this SP only after replacing the TD sensor or developer.
2803 Charge Cleaner Start Time
Press Start to clean the charge corona wire manually.
When copy density across the paper is uneven, clean the wire with this mode.
2804 Charge Cleaner
002
Determines whether the charge corona wire is cleaned at regular intervals.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
The time interval between cleaning is set with SP2804-002.
Number of Sheets
Sets the interval (number of sheets printed) between charge corona wire cleanings.
[100~10,000/100]
2813 Exposure Gamma Table DFU
Is the gamma table is used when the printing test pattern is done with SP2902 003.
[0~1/1]
0: Gamma table used in the printing test pattern.
1: Forces test pattern output with SP2902 003 (Printing Test Pattern). The write exposure gamma table is not applied. Current image mode selection or other settings are ignored.
2902 Test Pattern
001
002
003
004
IPU Test Pattern: Front Side
Produces a scan test pattern in place of data scanned from the front side
[0~30/1]
(CCD → SBU) of an original. ( 5.3.2)
IPU Test Pattern: Back Side
Produces a scan test pattern in place of data scanned from the back side
[0~30/1
(CIS → SBU) of an original. ( 5.3.2)
Printing Test Pattern
Produces the printer test patterns. ( 5.3.1)
[0~27/1]
IPU Printing Test Pattern
Produces test patterns in place of scan image data. ( 5.3.3)
[0~5/1]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-44
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2906* TD Sensor Control Voltage and Check
001 TD Sensor Control Voltage Setting
Adjustment mode for production. DFU
[4.0~12.0/0.1]
Displays the TD sensor data stored when SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Settings) is executed.
2909* Main Scan Magnification
001 Copy
Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for copying.
[–2.0~+2.0/0.1%]
002 Printer
Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for printing from a computer.
[–2.0~+2.0/0.1%]
2910* Sub Scan Magnification
Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for copying.
[–1.0~+1.0/0.1%]
2912* Drum Reverse Rotation
001 Rotation
Sets the length of time the drum is reversed to clean the drum cleaning blade.
[1~3/1]
To calculate the actual time of reverse rotation, multiply the selected value by the
15 ms.
Determines the frequency of drum reverse rotation for blade cleaning.
[0~6/1 min.]
2913* Temperature & Humidity Display
001 Machine Temperature Shows the internal temperature of the machine.
002 Machine Humidity Shows the internal humidity of the machine.
2920* LD Off Check
Checks if the LD turns off or on when the front door is opened. DFU
[0~1/1]
0: On
1: Off
SM 5-45
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2930* Transfer Idle Cleaning
When resolution changes from 400 to 600 dpi, the LD writes a pattern on the drum.
Toner is applied, and this must be cleaned off the belt. This SP mode determines whether bias is applied to the transfer belt cleaning bias roller at this time. DFU
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
Switching this function on adds 3 s to the job time.
2931* Transfer Current On/Off Timing (LCT)
001 La1 Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for front side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
002 La1f Adjusts the area where the transfer is applied for the leading edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
003 Lc1r Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
004
005
Lc1
La2
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
006 La2f DFU Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
007 Lc2r Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
008 Lc2 Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
009 La3
010 La3f
011 Lc3r
012 Lc3
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying thick paper from the LCT.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying thick paper from the LCT.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with thick paper from the LCT
[–30~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with thick paper from the LCT.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-46
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2932* Transfer Current On/Off Timing (Tray 1)
001 La1 Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for front side copying.
002 La1f
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
003 Lc1r
004
005
Lc1
La2
006 La2f DFU Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge during rear side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
007 Lc2r Adjusts the transfer current for the trailing edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
008 Lc2
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
009 La3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying thick paper from Tray 1.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
010 La3f
011 Lc3r
012 Lc3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the leading edge length when with copying thick paper from the bypass tray.
[–30~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for the trailing edge length when copying with thick paper from Tray 1.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with thick paper from Tray 1.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
SM 5-47
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2933* Transfer Current On/Off Timing (Tray 2)
001 La1 Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for front side copying.
002 La1f
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
003 Lc1r
004
005
Lc1
La2
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
006 La2f DFU Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during rear side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
007 Lc2r Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
008 Lc2
009 La3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying thick paper from Tray 2.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
010 La3f
011 Lc3r
012 Lc3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the leading edge length when copying thick paper from Tray 2.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for the trailing edge length when copying with thick paper from Tray 2.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with thick paper from Tray 2.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-48
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2934* Transfer Current On/Off Timing (Tray 3)
001 La1 Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for front side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
002 La1f
003 Lc1r
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
004 Lc1
005 La2
006 La2f DFU Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during rear side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
007 Lc2r Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
008 Lc2
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
009 La3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying thick paper from Tray 3.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
010 La3f
011 Lc3r
012 Lc3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the leading edge length when copying thick paper from Tray 3.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for the trailing edge length when copying with thick paper from Tray 3.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with thick paper from Tray 3.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
SM 5-49
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2935* Transfer Current On/Off Timing (Tray 4) (Japan Only)
001 La1 Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for front side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
002 La1f
003 Lc1r
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
004 Lc1
005 La2
006 La2f DFU Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during rear side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
007 Lc2r Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
008 Lc2
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
009 La3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying thick paper from Tray 4.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
010 La3f
011 Lc3r
012 Lc3
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the leading edge length when copying thick paper from Tray 4.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for the trailing edge length when copying with thick paper from Tray 4.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with thick paper from Tray 4.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-50
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2936 Transfer Current On/Off Timing (By-pass)
001 La1 Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for front side copying.
002 La1f
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
003 Lc1r
004 Lc1
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during front side copying.
[0~+20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
009 La3
010 La3f
011 Lc3r
012 Lc3
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying on thick paper.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the leading edge length when copying on thick paper.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for the trailing edge length when copying with thick paper.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the leading edge when copying with thick paper.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
013 La4
014 La4f
015 Lc4r
016 Lc4
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with
OHP.
[–30~+30/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the leading edge when copying with OHP.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for the trailing edge when copying with OHP.
[0~20/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with
OHP.
[0~20/1 mm]
SM 5-51
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2940* Reface Mode
Controls if a blade bend prevention pattern is made when the ID sensor pattern is made. This setting controls the pattern count. DFU
[0~100/1]
Increase the setting if the rotation of the drum is not smooth, that is, when drum rotation is making noise.
2950 Vh Pattern Creation Setting (B140) DFU
002 Offset Light Amount
[0~15/1]
[-45 ~-100/1]
2961 Developer Adjust Mode DFU
2962 Automatic Adjustment of Drum Conditions
Touch [Execute] to execute the process control cycle manually.
Note: This SP executes only if SP3901 is enabled.
2963 Installation Mode
Use the keyboard display to enter the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the top edge of the developer pack.)
Press “Execute” to initialize the developer and force toner supply to the toner hopper at machine installation.
2964* Transfer Cleaning Blade Forming
001 Pattern Interval Setting
Selects the interval for application of a strip of toner across drum and transfer belt to prevent the drum cleaning blade and belt cleaning blade from sticking and bending against the drum or belt.
[0~200/1 copy] DFU
If set to zero, then no pattern is created.
002
003
Pattern Light Amount Setting
Adjusts the intensity of light that is used to create the blade protection pattern.
[0~4/1] DFU
Transfer Current On/Off Setting
Determines whether transfer current is switched on or off while the blade protection pattern is created.
DFU
Sets Off, toner is applied to the entire cleaning area and drum cleaning blade.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-52
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2965* Toner Pump System Adjustment DFU (B064)
The transportability of toner improves if there is more than the prescribed amount of toner in the toner unit. In order to achieve this the prescribed amount of toner must be in the unit. The amount of toner pumped is determined by the amount of toner consumed, so by adjusting the amount of consumption, the machine can determine the amount of tone to pump to keep the toner supply unit topped off:
001
Toner Consumed (g) = Pixel Count x Target Toner Amount
Toner Consumption for First Rotation [1~100/1 g] DFU
002
003
004
005
006
Toner Consumption After First Rotation
Pump Clutch On Time
Pump Motor On Time
Toner Consumed: Rev. Returning to First
Amount of Toner Consumed Display
[1~100/1 g]
[1~5/1 s]
[1~20/1 s]
[1~50/1 g]
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
2966* Drum Conditions: Periodic Adjustment ( B064/B246 Series )
001 On/Off
Controls if auto process control is done and corona wire cleaning is done at a set interval.
[0~1/1]
0: On
1: Off
When this setting is on, auto process control and wire cleaning are done automatically (1) when the main switch is switched off for 24 hours, and (2) after each copy job.
Sets the time interval between automatic adjustments after SP2966 001 is turned on.
[1~24/1 hour]
2966* Drum Conditions: Periodic Adjustment ( B140/B246 Series )
Sets the time interval between automatic adjustments.
[1~24/1 hour]
2967* Developer Density Adjustment Mode
Determines whether the amount of toner is checked during auto process control with only the TD sensor. With this feature on, the machine uses the TD sensor only.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
During auto process control execution after the main switch is turned on, the toner amount in the development unit is normally checked and adjusted using the ID sensor. However, in some environments, such as where there could be traces ammonia in the air, copies could appear dirty or too dark because the ID sensor reading is not reliable.
SM 5-53
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
2968 Toner Exit Mode
Press Execute to force used toner into the toner collection bottle. The moving components of the cleaning and toner collection areas will rotate for about 60 sec. with the transfer belt released.
2969* Toner Bottle Revolution Count
Setting Sets the standard number of copies by using the number of toner bottle rotations. DFU
[50~500/1]
003 Copy Count Display 1
Press “Execute” to reset the toner bottle rotation count.
DFU
Used to check the number of toner bottle rotations.
2970 * Transfer Belt Resistance: Disp. Current Value ( B140)
Displays the resistance of the bare transfer belt at the interval between the leading edge of a sheet and the trailing edge of the sheet ahead of it in the paper path.
The displayed value is (M Ω ). DFU
2971* Trans. Interval Output
001 Voltage
002 Current
Displays the measurement condition of the value in
SP2970.
2972* Toner Bottle Cool. Fan Drive Control
Switches fan control On/
[0~1/1]
Off .
0: Off. The toner bottle fan switches off when the machine is powered off and when the machine enters the night mode.
1: On: Toner bottle fan remains on.
Switch on in an extremely hot environment to prevent the toner from overheating and clumping.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-54
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
SP3xxx Processing
3001* ID Sensor Initial Setting
001
002
ID Sensor PWM Setting
Recovers the machine when an SC is logged because the ID Sensor Initial Setting is not done after doing an NVRAM Clear or replacing the NVRAM. Reset this SP to the factory setting in this case.
[0~255/1]
ID Sensor Initialization
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. The ID sensor output for the bare drum
(VSG) is adjusted to 4.0 ± 0.2V.
Press “Execute”.
This SP mode should be performed after:
(1) Replacing or cleaning the ID sensor, (2) Replacing the NVRAM, (3) Clearing
NVRAM, (4) Replacing the BICU board.
3103* ID Sensor Output Display
001 Vsg
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the bare drum surface.
002 Vsp
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the ID sensor pattern image
003 Vsdp
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output immediately after Vsp is output when the charge potential drops. This reading is used to test and determine characteristics for design.
Note : If the ID sensor output is abnormal, an SC is logged and the displays change:
1) SC350-01 logged: Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp = 0.00/0.00/0.00
2) SC350-02 logged: Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp = 5.00/5.00/5.00
3) SC350-03 logged: Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp = 0.01/0.01/0.01
3901* Auto Process Control On/Off Setting
Determines whether the machine checks and corrects the drum potential (Vd) and
LD power when the fusing temperature is lower than 100 ° C at power-on.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
This setting attempts to change the Vd setting consistent with the OPC, the charge corona unit, and environment to improve the reliability of the system.
SM 5-55
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
3902* Drum Condition Display
001 Auto Process Control On/Off
Displays whether auto process control is switched on or off (0:Off, 1: On )
When auto processing control is set on, displays only when the potential sensor is calibrated correctly. Auto process control is not executed when this SP is switched off.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
002 Vd
Displays drum dark potential, the standard potential, electrical potential of the black areas after exposure.
003 Vh
Displays standard halftone drum potential, used for laser power adjustment.
004 Vg
Displays the charge grid voltage resulting from the latest Vd adjustment.
006
Displays the LD power correction value as a result of the latest Vh adjustment.
ID Sensor Pattern Potential
Displays Vid, the latest drum surface voltage measured on the ID sensor pattern.
007 Vql
Displays the drum potential after quenching.
008 Vl
Shows the standard electrical potential of white areas on the drum after exposure.
3903* Drum Rotation Time Extension On/Off ( B064Series )
Turn this setting on to decrease out-of-focus copy images when the machine is used immediately after power-on.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
If On is selected, after auto process control, the drum continues to rotate until the fusing unit gets to its operation temperature.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-56
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
3903* Drum Rotation Time Extension Mode (B140/B246 Series)
001 (0:OFF/1:ON)
Turns on the drum rotation mode. This increases the time that the drum turns freely after the machine is turned on. After this function is turned on with this SP, it will be enabled only when SP3904 001 is set to “2”. If SP3904 001 is set to “0” or “1”, the extra drum rotation mode will not be enabled.
[0~1/1]
0: Extra drum rotation mode is off.
1: After auto process control, the drum continues to turn until the fusing unit gets to its operation temperature. Use this setting to decrease out-of-focus copy images when the machine is used immediately after power-on.
002 Drum Rotation Time
Sets the amount of time the drum turns in the drum rotation mode before the first copy after the machine is turned on. SP3903-001 must be on or this setting has no effect.
[120~600/1]
3904 Warm Up Short Mode (B140/B246 Series)
Controls when corona wire cleaning is done to adjust the length of time that is necessary for startup.
[0~2/1]
0: Charge corona wire not cleaned when the machine is turned on.
Warmup Time: 30 sec. (Short Process Control is done)
1: Charge corona wire cleaned only when the machine is turned on.
Warmup Time: 30 sec. + 40 sec. (for cleaning) = 70 sec. (Short Process Control is done)
2: Normal startup procedure at power on:
Warmup Time: 240 sec. (Full Process Control is done; same as B064)
• P otential sensor calibrated
• Drum starts to turn when fusing unit gets to the warmup temperature (not done during Short Process Control)
• Potential sensor readings are used to adjust development bias, grid voltage, laser diode.
• ID sensor calibrated (not done during Short Process Control)
• TD sensor calibrated (not done during Short Process Control)
SM 5-57
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
SP4xxx Scanner
4008* Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
Fine adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for scanning by changing the speed of the scanner motor.
[–0.9~+0.9/0.1 %]
Setting a lower value reduces the speed of the motor and lengthens the image in the sub scan direction (direction of paper feed).
Setting a higher value increases the speed of the motor speed and shortens the image in the sub scan direction.
4010* Scanner Leading Edge Registration
Adjust the registration of the leading edge for scanning in the sub scan direction.
[–0.9~+0.9/0.1 %]
This setting ensures that the point where the original strikes the registration roller matches the point where the F-GATE signal will trigger the start of scanning in the main scan direction.
Setting a larger value shifts the image away from the leading edge, and a smaller value shifts the image toward the leading edge.
4011* Scanner Side-to-Side Registration
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in the main scan direction across the page.
[–0.3~+0.3/0.1 %]
Setting a negative value shifts the image toward the left edge, and setting a positive value shifts the image toward the right edge.
4012* Scanner Erase Margin
These settings adjust the margins (erase margins) of the scanned area on the sheet. The leading, trailing, right, and left margins can be set independently.
[0~0.9/0.1 mm]
003 Right
004 Left
4013 Scanner Free Run
Switches on/off a scanner free run. The scanning area is A3.
Press “On” or “Off”.
001
002
Scanner Free Run: Lamp On
Scanner Free Run: Lamp Off
Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on.
Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp off.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-58
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4016* White Board Read Adjust
001 Read Start Position Adjusts the start position for reading the standard white board.
[–9~+9/1]
Adjusts the width of the area read on the standard white board.
[–9~+9/1]
4018* Scanner Optical Axis Adjust
Display
Displays the result after adjusting SP4018 001
[–2~+2/0.1]
003* Read Position Set
004
Lets you adjust the scanning position for free runs. It changes the scanning stop position if the exposure glass causes black lines because it is dirty. The default is set with SP4018 001. If you adjust this SP, the leading edge registration changes and the setting of SP6006 003 for the ADF also changes.
[–4~+4/0.1]
Read Position Set Start
If 003 is adjusted, push Execute to force the change to take effect on the main machine.
4019 * Scanner HP View Position Display
Use to display the status of each error after SC120, SC121, SC122, or SC123 is logged. (These are scanner HP sensor errors.)
[0~1/1]
0: Normal
1: Abnormal
Bit 0: Sensor OFF at start of high-speed return operation.
Bit 1: Remains ON after return.
Bit 2: Remains ON during return.
Bit 3: Does not switch OFF during forward motion
Bit 4: Switches ON at return
Bit 5: Scanner HP detection is out of position.
SM 5-59
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4020 ADF Scan Glass Dust Check
001
This feature checks the ADF exposure glass for dust that can cause black lines in copies. If dust is detected, a message is displayed, but the process does not stop.
Check On/Off Change (0:OFF/1:ON)
Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF when the original size is detected before a job starts. This function can detect dust on the white plate above the scanning glass, as well as dust on the glass. Sensitivity of the level of detection is adjusted with SP4020-002.
[0~1/1]
0: Off. No dust warning.
1: On. Dust warning. This warning does not stop the job.
Note : Before switching this setting on, clean the ADF scanning glass and the white plate above the scanning glass.
Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP is available only after SP4020-001 is switched on.
[0~8/1]
• If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise the setting to increase the level of sensitivity.
• If warnings are issued when you see no black streaks in copies, lower the setting.
• Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass by the originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not detected and the warning remains on.
Sets the level for vertical line correction (the black vertical lines caused by dust on the ADF exposure glass).
[0~7/1]
0: No vertical line correction.
1-7: Enables and sets the level for vertical line correction. If you select a higher number, this can decrease the unwanted lines caused by dust. But, it can also erase thin vertical lines of the original.
4301 APS Sensor Output Display
Displays the APS sensor output signals when an original is placed on the exposure glass. If a non-standard size is placed on the glass, asterisks (*) are displayed.
4303* APS A5 Size Detection
Selects whether or not the copier determines that the original is A5/HLT size when the APS sensor does not detect the size.
[0~1/1]
0: Not detected
1: A5 SEF (5 1/2 " x 8 1/2 ")
If “1” is selected, paper sizes that cannot be detected by the APS sensors are detected as A5 SEF. If “0” is selected, “Cannot detect original size” will be shown.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-60
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
The following SP codes are for the B246/D052 Series.
4550 Scanner:Text/***
4584 Fax: Original 1
4585 Fax: Original 2
001 MTF Filter Level:
Main Scan: 0-15
003 MTF Filter Strength:
Main Scan: 0-7
006 Smoothing Filter:0-7 Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother.
[0~7/1]
007 Brightness:1-255 Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
[1~255/1]
008 Contrast:1-255
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) coefficient designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
[0~15/1]
Sets the strength of the coefficient selected for 001.
[0~7/1]
Note: Set 001 before adjusting the strength with 002.
Dot
Removal:0-7
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
[1~255/1]
This SP sets the level for removing dots when a color original is scanned with a scanner software application. The higher the setting, the greater the effect applied for removing background dots.
[0~7/ 0 /1]
4600* Read SBU ASIC ID
Displays the SBU ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the SBU adjusts automatically at power on.
[0~FFFFh/1]
4601* SBU PLL Adjustment
Adjusts the PLL bandwidth.
[0~FFFFh/1]
DFU
SM 5-61
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4605 Scanner Adjustment
Displays a flag to indicate whether density control adjustment was executed with the standard white board for the CCD.
[0~1/1]
0: Not executed.
1: Executed
002 Start
Starts the density adjustment for the CCD using the standard white board. Place
5 sheets of A3 plain paper on the exposure glass, then press Execute. A message is displayed to indicate the success or failure of the adjustment. DFU
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-62
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4610 * White Level Adj: Next
4613 * White Level Adj.: Previous Normal
4616 * White Level Adj.: Factory
4624 * Read Data
4632* Gain Adjustment
4641* White Adjust Loop
4646* SBU Adjustment Error Flag
4647* SBU Hard Error Flag
4662* Gain Adjustment Normally
4681* Gain Adjustment at Factory
4691 * Read Shading Data
4694 * Black
4700* Read CIS ASIC ID
Reads and displays the ID of the CIS board at power.
4701* Frequency Adjust
4702* Periodic Adjustment Setting
4705 CIS Adjustment
DFU
DFU
Displays whether density adjustment was executed for the CIS, using the white roller.
[0~1/1]
0: Not executed
1: Executed
002 Start
Starts the standard white density adjustment for the CIS. Place 5 sheets of A3 on the exposure glass, then press Execute. A message is displayed to indicate the success or failure of the adjustment. DFU
4713* CIS White Level Adjustment
4716* CIS White Level Adjustment
4732* CIS Gain Adjustment
4735* CIS Read White Level
4741* CIS White Adjust Loop
4742* CIS White Roller Adjust Loop
4745* CIS Adjustment Overflow Flag
4747* CIS Adjustment Time Out Flag
4762* CIS Gain Adjustment Normal
4765* CIS Adjustment Overflow Flag
4781* CIS Gain Adjustment at Factory
DFU
SM 5-63
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4901 Front Side Scan Correction
001* Front Shading Correction: AEREF Setting
Changes the AEREF (Automatic Exposure Reference) value that is used in shading correction for the image scanned from the front side (SBU). DFU
[0~63/1]
002 Front Shading Correction: Shading Data Output
Outputs the AEREF value that is used in shading correction for the image scanned from the front side (SBU). DFU
[0~1/1]
0: Normal
1: Output
After you set 001, go back to the Copy Window and push Start. (The machine automatically goes out of SP mode.)
003* Front Digital AE: AEREF Setting
Changes the AEREF (Automatic Exposure Reference) value that is used in digital A/E processing for the image data scanned from the front side. DFU
[–63/63]
004* Front Digital AE: Low Limit
010*
011*
012*
013*
014*
019*
Sets the low limit at 120 for the value used in digital A/E processing for the image data scanned from the front side. DFU
[0~1/1]
0: No low limit
1: Low limit set
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Text
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Photo
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Text/Photo
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Pale
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Generation
Front Scan Image Adj. Mode: Setting
Changes the density of front side
(SBU) scanned image data and the MTF.
[0~3/1]
0: Normal
1: Low Level
2: Medium Level
3: High Level
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-64
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4902 Back Side Scan Correction
Back Shading Correction:
AEREF Setting
Back Shading Correction:
Shading Output Data
Back Digital AE: AEREF
Setting
004* Back Digital AE: Low Limit
Back Scan Image Adj.
Mode: Text
Back Scan Image Adj.
Mode: Photo
Back Scan Image Adj.
Mode: Text/Photo
Back Scan Image Adj.
Mode: Pale
Back Scan Image Adj.
Mode: Generation
Back Scan Image Adj. Scan
Select Mode DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
Changes the density of rear side (SBU) scanned image data and the MTF.
[0~3/1]
0: Normal
1: Low Level
2: Medium Level
3: High Level
Selects mode for scan selection.
0: Mode for the default scanner
1: Mode for the upgraded scanner.
SM 5-65
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4903* Image Quality Adj.
Text Mode
001
002
003
004
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Text mode.
Text Mode (25.0~55%)
Text Mode (55.5~75.0%
Text Mode (75.5%~160%)
Text Mode (160.5~400.0%)
Photo Mode Dithering
[0~10/1]
0: Softest
5: Normal
10: Sharpest
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Photo mode with dithering
Photo Mode Dithering (25.0~55%) [0~6/1]
Photo Mode Dithering (55.5~75.0%
Photo Mode Dithering (75.5%~160%)
Photo Mode Dithering (160.5~400.0%)
Photo Mode Error Diffusion
0: Softest
3: Print Original Mode
6: Sharpest
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Photo mode with error diffusion.
Photo Mode Error Diffusion (25.0~55%) [0~6/1]
Photo Mode Error Diffusion (55.5~75.0%
Photo Mode Error Diffusion (75.5%~160%)
Photo Mode Error Diffusion (160.5~400.0%)
Text/Photo Mode
0: Softest
1: Normal (Default)
6: Sharpest
014
015
016
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Text/Photo mode.
Text/Photo Mode (25.0~55%) [0~10/1]
Text/Photo Mode (55.5~75.0%
Text/Photo Mode (75.5%~160%)
Text/Photo Mode (160.5~400.0%)
0: Softest
1: Photo Priority
5: Normal (Default)
9: Text Priority
10: Sharpest
Pale Mode
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Pale mode.
Pale Mode (25.0~55%) [0~10/1]
Pale Mode (55.5~75.0%
Pale Mode (75.5%~160%)
Pale Mode (160.5~400.0%)
0: Softest
1: Soft
5: Normal (Default)
9; Sharp
10: Sharpest
Generation Mode
Adjusts the sharpness and texture of images processed in Generation mode.
Generation Mode (25.0~55%)
Generation Mode (55.5~75.0%
Generation Mode (75.5%~160%)
Generation Mode (160.5~400.0%)
[0~10/1]
0: Softest
1: Soft
5: Normal (Default)
9: Sharp
10: Sharpest
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-66
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
063
064
070
071
072
073
074
Independent Dot Erase
Sets the level for independent dot erasure. The higher the setting, the stronger the effect.
[0~14/1]
Independent Dot Erase: Pale Mode
Independent Dot: Generation Mode
[0~14/1]
[0~14/1]
Background Erase
Sets the level for background erase. The higher the setting, the stronger the effect.
[0~255/1] Background Erase: Text Mode
Background Erase: Photo Mode
Background Erase: Text/Photo Mode
Background Erase: Pale Mode
Background Erase: Generation Mode
Line Width Correction
Selects the level of line width correction for the copy mode and direction of scanning. Where a range of settings is possible, [0~8] for example, the higher the setting, the thicker the lines.
Line Width Correction: Text Mode Select
Line Width Correction: Text Mode (Main Scan)
Line Width Correction: Text Mode (Sub Scan)
[0~8/1]
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Photo Mode Select
Line Width Correction: Photo Mode (Main Scan)
Line Width Correction: Photo Mode (Sub Scan)
Line Width Correction: Text/Photo Mode Select
[0~8/1]
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
[0~8/1]
Line Width Correction: Text/Photo Mode (Main Scan) [0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Text/Photo Mode (Sub Scan) [0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Pale Mode Select
Line Width Correction: Pale Mode (Main Scan)
Line Width Correction: Pale Mode (Sub Scan)
Line Width Correction: Generation Mode Select
[0~8/1]
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
[0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
[0~8/1]
Line Width Correction: Generation Mode (Main Scan) [0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
Line Width Correction: Generation Mode (Sub Scan) [0~1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
SM 5-67
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4904* Line Width Correct
002 Processing Select: Photo
020 Text Mode
Selects the image processing mode for Photo
Mode.
[0~3/1]
0: 106 line dither processing
1: 141 line dither processing
2: 212 line dither processing
3: Error diffusion processing
Turns line correction on/off for each mode.
[0~1/1]
0: No processing
1: Makes thin lines more thick.
4909 Image Processing Through DFU
001 IPU Front Side Image Module Selects the image processing module for scanning related to the SBU. The SBU (Sensor
Board Unit) converts the scanned image to digital before sending it to the IPU.
[0~127/1]
002 IPU Back Side Image Module Selects the image processing module for scanning related to the CIS (Contact Image
Sensors).
[0~63/1]
003 IPU Plotter Image Module Selects the image processing module for scanning related to the SBU.
[0~255/1]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-68
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
SP5xxx Mode
5024* mm/inch Display Selection
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
[0~1/1]
0: mm
1: inch
5037 Status Lamp Detection
Enables or disables the function of the status lamp installed above the operation panel.
[0~1/1]
0: Off: Disabled
1: On: Enabled
This status lamp requires special ordering and installation for this machine.
Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-
001.
Note: You can change the setting only one time.
[0 to 1/ 1]
0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y,M,C) and black (K).
1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Color Total, Black Total, Color
Copies, Black Copies, Color Prints, Black Prints.
001 Reverse Paper
Display
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
002 Punched Paper
Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed on the operation panel.
[0~1/0/1]
1: Displayed
Determines whether the tray loaded with punched paper is displayed on the operation panel.
[0~1/1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
SM 5-69
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5051 Toner Refill Detection Display Japan Only
5055 Display IP Address ( B246 )
Switches the banner display of MFP device display on and off.
[OFF] ON
5057 Assign Eye-Catch Icons
Determines whether the eye-catch icons are displayed in the color mode for copying and scanning.
[0~1/0/1]
0: Display off
1: Display on
5104 A3/DLT Double Count
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except from the bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.
5106* Auto Density Level
Selects the image density levels that are used in ADS mode by assigning a value to the center notch.
[1~7/1 step/notch]
5112* Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes. If “1” is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard paper size using the UP mode.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-70
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5113* Optional Counter Type
001
002
Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
0: None
1: Key card (RK3, 4) Japan only
2: Key card down (countdown type)
3: Pre-paid card
4: Coin Lock
5: MF key card
11: Exp Key Card (Add)
12: Exp Key Card (Deduct)
External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK (Software Development Kit) application. This lets you select a number for the external device for user access control.
[0~3/1]
0: No external devices.
1: External device 1 – key card
2: External device 2 – key card (countdown type)
3: External device 3 – pre-paid card
5118* Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine.
[0~1/1]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine
Japan Only
5120* Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Do not change. Japan Only
[0~2/1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset
5121* Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at paper exit. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Feed count
1: No feed count
5126 F Original Size Selection
Sets the original size that the machine detects for F sizes.
[0~2/1]
0: 8hf x 13
1: 8hf x 13qr
2: 8 x 13
Note : hf = 1/2, qr = 1/4
SM 5-71
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5127 APS OFF Mode
This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine.
[0~1/1]
0: On
1: Off
5129 F Paper Size Selection
Sets the paper size that the machine detects when the 8 x 13 dial setting on a paper cassette is used (LT/DLT version).
[0~2/1]
0: 8 x 13
1: 8hf x 13
2: 8qr x 13
Note : hf = 1/2, qr = 1/4
5131* Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size type (for originals and copy paper). (Only needs to be adjusted if the optional printer controller is installed)
[0~2/1]
0: JP (Japan Only)
1: NA (North America)
2: EU (Europe)
After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on.
5141* Tray for Tab Sheets (B064 only)
Sets the height of the tabs for each paper source for tab sheets. The height of a tab is measured from the edge of the paper to the edge of the tab.
011 Tab Height: By-pass [0~152/0.1 mm]
012
013
014
015
016
Tab Height: Tray 1
Tab Height: Tray 2
Tab Height: Tray 3
Tab Height: Tray 4
Tab Height: Tray 5
The height of the tab is the value set for this SP multiplied by 0.1. The default tab height then is:
130 x 0.1 = 13 mm
To change this setting, measure the height of the tab in millimeters, multiply by 10, then input the result.
For example, if the measured height of the tab is 10 millimeters, enter “100”.
5150 Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-72
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5154 Exit Tray Set
001 Limitless
Allows ‘limitless’ paper output.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On. Once the initial paper exit is full, another will be selected automatically.
Switch this SP on only in the job queuing mode, i.e. when printing jobs in the order of selection with the print priority function. Print priority is set in the User
Tools mode (System Settings> General Features> Print Priority> Job Order.)
002 Override
Allows overriding of the setting for SP5154-001.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
This SP can be set only when on is selected for SP5154-001. Changing this setting has no effect on the machine when SP5154-001 is off.
5158 Cover Feeder Size Change ( B140)
Controls the paper size for the cover interposer tray. Select a paper size and push
[Execute].
Note : hf = 1/2, qr = 1/4
001 For all versions
002
006
007
008
For Europe and China
For Europe and China
For Europe and China
For Europe and China
[0~1/1]
0: A3
1: 12 x 18
[0~2/1]
0: 8hf x 13
1: 8 x 13
2: 8qr x 13
[0~1/1]
0: 8hf x 14
1: 8hf x 13
[0~1/1]
0: 11 x 8hf
1: 10hf x 7qr
[0~1/1]
0: 8hf x 11
1: 8 x 10
[0~1/1]
0: 8K
1: 11 x 17
[0~1/1]
0: 16K (267 x 195)
1: 8hf x 11
[0~1/1]
0: 16K (195 x 267)
1: 11 x 8hf
SM 5-73
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5162 App. Switch Method (B140/B246/D052)
Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software switch.
[0~1/1]
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
5167 Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off ( B246/D052 )
5169 CE Login (B140/B246/D052)
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this
SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0~1/1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
5187 PM Counter Print Out in UP ( B246/D052 )
This setting determines whether parts without standard counts print in addition to the normal counter list
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: No
1: Yes
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-74
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5227 Page Numbering ( B246/D052 )
200 Change Page No. Display
This SP code determines whether the page number adjustment display is on or off.
[0~1/0/1]
0: Display off
1: Display on
201 Allow Page No. Entry
This SP specifies the number of digits to display for the entry of the starting page number.
[2~9/9/1]
202 Zero Surplus Setting
This setting determines whether page numbers are prefixed with excess zeros when the number is smaller than the number of assigned digits. For example, with this setting on and 3 digits have been specified, the number "3" appears as "003".
With this setting off, the number "3" will appear as a "3" without the zeros.
[0~1/0/1]
0: No excess zeros
1: Excess zeros displayed
5212* Page Numbering
003 Duplex Printout Left/Right Position Horizontally positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
004 Duplex Printout High/Low Position Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
Time
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440~1440/1 min.]
JA: +540 (Tokyo)
NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +6- (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
5305 Auto Off Function Release Setting
This SP prevents the user from easily disabling the auto off timer. This is done to conform with international Energy Star standards that specifically state that the user shall not be able to easily switch off the auto off feature.
0: On (Auto Off cannot be released
1: Off (Auto Off can be released)
SM 5-75
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES Rev. 01/2007
5307* Summer Time
Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to
Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall. This SP lets you set these items:
- Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
- Day and time to go back automatically in October.
- Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
The settings for 002 and 003 are done with 8-digit numbers:
Digits Meaning
1st, 2nd Month. 4: April, 10: October (for months 1 to 9, the first digit of 0 cannot be input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes a seven-digit setting)
001
002
003
3rd
4th
5th, 6th
Day of the week. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday
The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit. If “0” is selected for “Sunday”, for example, and the selected Sunday is the start of the 2nd week, then input a “2” for this digit.
The time when the change occurs (24-hour as hex code).
Example: 00:00 (Midnight) = 00, 01:00 (1 a.m.) = 01, and so on.
The number of hours to change the time. 1 hour: 1 7th
8th
Setting
If the time change is not a whole number (1.5 hours for example), digit 8 should be 3 (30 minutes).
Enables/disables the settings for 002 and 003.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rule Set (Start) The start of summer time.
Rule Set (End) The end of summer time.
⇒
5401 Access Control DFU
This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
006 User Recognition – Copier
016 Use Recognition – Document Server
026 User Recognition – Fax
036 User Recognition – Scanner
This SP codes are provided for future customization of the access control feature. This is to be done at the factory, not in the field.
DFU
046 User Recognition – Printer
076 User Recogntion – Expanded Function 1
086 User Recogntion – Expanded Function 2
096 User Recogntion – Expanded Function 2
103 Default Document ACL
Used to assign the default access privileges of users to their own documents on the Document Server. 0 :Read only (default) 1:edit 2:edit/delete 3:full control
NOTE : Available only when using Windows / LDAP / Integration Server
Authentication. Applies to new users only, it will not affect existing users.
200 SDK1 Unique ID
201 SDK1 Certification Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID
211 SDK2 Certification Method
220 SDK3 Unique ID
"SDK" is the "Software
Development Kit". This data can be converted from SAS (VAS) when installed or uninstalled.
DFU
221 SDK3 Certification Method
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-76
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5404 User Code Count Clear ( B140/B246 )
Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5501 PM
001 PM Alarm Interval
002
Sets the PM interval.
The value stored in this SP is used when the value of SP55012 is “1”.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
Original Count Alarm DFU
Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
If this is “1”, the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
5504 Jam Alarm ( B246 ) Japan Only
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included). RSS use only
[0~3 / 3 / 1 step]
0:Zero (Off)
1:Low (2.5K jams)
2:Medium (3K jams)
3:High (6K jams)
5505 Error Alarm ( B246 )
Sets the error alarm level. Japan only DFU
[0~255 / 50 / 100 copies per step]
SM 5-77
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
001 Paper Supply Alarm
(0:Off 1:On)
002 Staple Supply Alarm
(0:Off 1:On)
003 Toner Supply Alarm
(0:Off 1:On)
Switches the control call on/off for the paper supply.
DFU
0: Off , 1: On
0: No alarm.
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number transfer sheets for each paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5,
DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
Switches the control call on/off for the stapler installed in the finisher. DFU
0: Off , 1: On
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
Switches the control call on/off for the toner end. DFU
0: Of f, 1: On
If you select “1” the alarm will sound when the copier detects toner end.
The “Paper Supply Call Level: nn” SPs specify the paper control call interval for the referenced paper sizes. DFU
[00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
160* Interval: DLT
164* Interval: LG
166* Interval: LT
172* Interval: HLT
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-78
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5508 CC Japan Only
003 Continuous Door Open
004 Low Call Mode
011 Jam Detection: Time
Length
012 Jam Detection
Continuous Count
013 Door Open: Time
Length
021 Jam Operation: Time
Length
022 Jam Operation:
Continuous Count
023 Door Operation: Time
Length
Enables/disables initiating a call.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of calls.
[0~1/1]
0: Normal mode
1: Reduced mode
Sets the length of time to determine the length of an unattended paper jam.
[03~30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is enabled (set to 1).
Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to initiate a call.
[02~10/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is enabled (set to 1).
Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine when to initiate a call.
[03~30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is enabled (set to 1).
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when continuous paper jams occur.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when the front door remains open.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
SM 5-79
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5513 Parts Alarm Level Count Japan Only
1 Normal
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of copies.
[1~9999 / 350 / 1]
2 DF
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of scanned originals.
[1~9999 / 350 / 1]
5514 Parts Alarm Level Japan Only
001 Normal
002 DF
[0~1 / 1 / 1]
[0~1 / 0 / 1]
With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
002 Near End Call
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0: Off
1: On
[0~1/ 1 /1]
008 Alarm
010 Auto Order Supplies
011 Supply Management Report
[0~1/ 0 /1]
[0~1/ 1 /1]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-80
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5801 Memory Clear (B064/B140 Series)
Clears all data from NVRAM. Before executing this SP, print an SMC Report.
( 5.2.1)
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
014
015
016
017
All Clear
Engine Clear
SCS
IMH Memory Clear
MCS
Copier application
Fax application
Printer application
Scanner application
Web Service/ Network application
NCS
Clear DCS Setting
Clear UCS Setting
MIRS Setting
CCS
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS
(System Control Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Initializes all copier application settings.
Not used.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login
ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the
SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control
Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information
Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information
Report Service) settings. (B140)
Initializes the CCS ( Certification and
Charge-control Service) settings. (B140)
SM 5-81
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5801 Memory Clear ( B246 )
Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear
002 Engine Clear
Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
003 SCS
004 IMH Memory Clear
005 MCS
006 Copier application
007 Fax application
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control
Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Initializes all copier application settings.
008 Printer application
009 Scanner application
010 Web Service/Network application
011 NCS
012 R-FAX
014 Clear DCS Setting
015 Clear UCS Setting
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
016 MIRS Setting
017 CCS
018 SRM Clear
019 LCS Clear
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS ( Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-82
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5802* Printer Free Run
Makes a base engine free run
[0~1/1]
0: Disable: Release free run mode
1: Enable: Enable free run mode
Return this setting to off (0) after testing is completed.
5803 Input Check
Displays signals received from sensors and switches. ( 5.6.1)
5804 Output Check
Turns on the electrical components individually for testing. ( 5.6.2 )
5807 Option Connection Check
Displays a 1 or 0 to indicate the status of the device.
(002: Bank – Japan)
[0~1/1]
1: Connected
0: Not connected
5811
001
003
Machine No. Setting
This SP presents the screen used to enter the 11-digit number of the machine.
The allowed entries are "A" to "Z" and "0" to "9". The setting is done at the factory, and should not be changed in the field. DFU
Code Set
This SP code is used to enter the machine serial number at the factory before shipping (11 digits numbers 0-9 and letters A-Z). DFU
ID Code Display
Not used
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting
001 Service Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a service call condition occurs.)
002 Facsimile
003 Supply
004 Operation
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the
Counter Report (UP mode). Not Used
Displayed on the initial SP screen.
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be displayed on the initial screen.
SM 5-83
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5816
001
002
003
007
008
009
010
011
021
022
Remote Service
I/F Setting
Turns the remote diagnostics off and on.
[0~2/1]
0: Remote diagnostics off.
1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on.
2: Network remote diagnostics.
CE Call
Lets the customer engineer start or end the remote machine check with CSS or
NRS; to do this, push the center report key
Function Flag
Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS network.
[0~1/1]
0: Disables remote diagnosis over the network.
1: Enables remote diagnosis over the network.
SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL during an RCG send for the NRS over a network interface.
[0~1/1]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
RCG Connect Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) connects during a call via the NRS network.
[1~90/1 sec.]
RCG Write to Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to the RCG during a call over the NRS network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
RCG Read Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written from the RCG during a call over the NRS network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
Port 80 Enable
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port 80 on the NRS network.
[0~1/1]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
RCG – C Registered
This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag.
1: Installation completed
2: Installation not completed
RCG – C Registered Detail
This SP displays the Cumin installation status.
0: Basil not registered
1: Basil registered
2: Device registered
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-84
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
023
061
062
063
064
065
066
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method.
0 : Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert. Expire Timing DFU
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center.
HTTP Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between
Cumin-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set up Cumin-N.
Note :
• The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters beyond the
127 th character are ignored.
• This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
HTTP Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Cumin-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up Cumin-
N.
Note : This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
HTTP Proxy Certification User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
Note :
• The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the
31st character is ignored.
• This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
HTTP Proxy Certification Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
Note :
• The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored.
• This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
SM 5-85
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
067
068
069
083
084
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0
1
2
3
The certification used by Cumin is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update.
4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL.
11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the certification update request.
13 The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW URL.
14 The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
15 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event.
16 The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event.
17 The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the
GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but an certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded.
18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.
2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
CERT: Up ID
The ID of the request for certification.
Firmware Up Status
Displays the status of the firmware update.
Non-HDD Firm Up
This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD installed.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-86
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
200
Firm Up User Check
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL.
Firmware Size
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during the firmware update execution.
CERT: Macro Version
Displays the macro version of the NRS certification
CERT: PAC Version
Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification.
CERT: ID2 Code
Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores
(_). Asteriskes () indicate that no NRS certification exists.
CERT: Subject
Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following
17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks () indicate that no
DESS exists.
CERT: Serial Number
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks () indicate that no
DESS exists.
CERT: Issuer
Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no DESS exists.
CERT: Valid Start
Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is enabled.
CERT: Valid End
Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is enabled.
Manual Polling
No information is available at this time.
Select from the list the name of the country where Cumin-M is installed in the machine. After selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes for Cumin-M:
• SP5816-153
• SP5816-154
• SP5816-161
0: Japan 6: Italy
1: USA
2: Canada
3: UK
7: Netherlands
8: Belgium
9: Luxembourg
4: Germany 10: Spain
SM 5-87
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
151 Line Type Authentication Judgment
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where Cumin-M is connected as either dial-up or push type, so Cumin-M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside line.
• The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be displayed with SP5816 152.
• If the execution succeeded, SP5816 153 will display the result for confirmation and SP5816 154 will display the telephone number for the connection to the outside line.
152 Line Type Judgment Result
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a list of what the numbers mean.
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress – ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the access point for Cumin-M. The numbered displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of SP5816 151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed:
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS
2: Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS
154 Outside Line/Outgoing Number
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for
Cumin-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
• If the execution of SP5816 151 has succeeded and Cumin-M has connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
• If Cumin-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of the connection to the external line is displayed.
• If Cumin-M has connected to an external line, a comma is displayed with the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
• The number setting for the external line can be entered manually (including commas).
155 Remove Service: PPP Recognition Timeout
Sets the length of the timeout for the Cumin-M connection to its access point.
The timeout is the time from when the modem sends the ATD to when it receives the result code.
[1~65536/ 60 /1]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-88
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
156 Dial Up User Name
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when setting a user name:
• Name length: Up to 32 characters
• Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks (").
157 Dial Up Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when setting a user name:
• Name length: Up to 32 characters
• Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks (").
159 Remote Service: Carrier Send Level
This SP sets the level of the carrier signal for Cumin-M data transmissions.
[0~15/ 3 /1]
160 Remote Service: AT command
This SP allows you to add an AT command to the initialization of the Cumin-M modem. This SP sets the AT command for both initialization and wait time of and outgoing call. It also includes the NULL instruction.
Default: 0, up to 8 characters allowed.
161 Local Phone Number
Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where Cumin-M is connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers)
162 Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming
When the Call Center calls out to a Cumin-M modem, it sends a repeating ID tone (*#1#). This SP sets the line remains open to send these ID tones after the number of the Cumin-M modem is dialed up and connected.
[0~24/1/1]
The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2" the line will remain open for 4 sec.
This is the number of the dial-up access point for Cumin-M. If no setting is done for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates the line to Cumin-M only, or sets the line for sharing between Cumin-M and a fax unit.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Line shared by Cumin-M/Fax
1: Line dedicated to Cumin-M only
Note :
• If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
• SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction.
SM 5-89
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
173 Modem Serial Number
This SP displays the serial number registered for the Cumin-M.
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed.
However, Cumin-M generates charges based on transmission time for the customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to cancel the time restriction.
201
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a Cumin-
M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP can be used only if SP5816 164 is set to "0".
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Disable. Setting the fax unit off-hook does not interrupt a fax transaction in progress. If the off-hook button is pushed during a Cumin-M transmission, the button must be pushed again to set the fax unit on-hook after the Cumin-M transmission has completed.
1: Enable. When Cumin-M shares a line with a fax unit, setting the fax unit offhook will interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress and open the line for a fax transaction.
Regist: Status
202
203
204
Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device.
0 Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set.
1 The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request.
2 The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request.
3 The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be set.
4 The NRS module has not started.
Letter Number
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device.
Confirm Execute
Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL.
Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816
203.
0 Succeeded
1 Inquiry number error
2 Registration in progress
3 Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4 Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-90
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
205
206
207
Confirm Place
Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL.
Register Execute
Executes Cumin Registration.
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0 Succeeded
2 Registration in progress
3 Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4 Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
208 Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed.
Illegal Modem
Parameter
-11001 Chat parameter error
-11002 Chat execution error
Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting
Error Caused by
Response from GW URL
-12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring device status. registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2.
-2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the correct international prefix for the telephone number.
-2387
-2389
-2390
-2391
Not supported at the Service Center
Database out of service
Program out of service
Two registrations for same device
-2393 Basil managed
-2394
-2395
-2396
-2397
-2398
Device not managed
Box ID for Basil is illegal
Device ID for Basil is illegal
Incorrect ID2 format
Incorrect request number format
209 Remote Setting Clear
Releases a machine from its Cumin setup.
250 CommLog Print
Prints the communication log.
SM 5-91
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5821 Remote Service Address Japan Only
001 CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code. After you change this setting, you must turn the machine off and on.
002 RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h~FFFFFFFFh/1]
5824 NVRAM Data UploadNVRAM Data Upload
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from NVRAM on the control board to an SD card.
Note : While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents a software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.
5825 NVRAM Data Download
Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After downloading is completed, remove the SD card and turn the machine power off and on.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-92
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5828 Network Setting (B064)
012 Device Name
075
Use these SPs to perform the network settings.
DNS Server From DHCP (B064)
079
050
051
Domain Name (Ethernet)
1284 Compatibility
(Centro)
Enables and disables bi-directional communication on the parallel connection between the machine and a computer.
[0~1/1]
0:Off
1: On
Data Transfer (Centro)
084
090
091
Print Settings List
TELNET (0:OFF 1:ON)
Web (0:OFF 1:ON)
Determines the speed of data transmission on the parallel line connection between the machine and a computer.
[0~1/1]
0: Slow
1: Fast
With the “Slow” setting, there is a 120-microsecond interval from the time an STB signal is sent until the data is moved.
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode) for data transfer.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings.
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disables or enables the Web operation.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
SM 5-93
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5828 Network Setting ( B140/B246/D052 )
050 1284 Compatibility
(Centro)
Enables and disables bi-directional communication on the parallel connection between the machine and a computer.
[0~1/1]
0:Off
1: On
065 Job Spool Setting
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode) for data transfer.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Switches job spooling spooling on and off.
0: No spooling 1: Spooling enabled
066 Job Spool Clear
069 Job Spool Protocol
077 IPv4 DNS Server 2
078 IPv4 DNS Server 3
This SP determines whether the job interrupted at power off is resumed at the next power on. This SP operates only when SP5828 065 is set to 1.
1: Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: Clears spooled job.
This SP determines whether job spooling is enabled or disabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting.
0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP
3 SMB
6
7
Reserved (Not Used)
Reserved (Not Used)
Sets the IPv4 address for a DNS server. This address can be used among devices that have IPv4 devices
(Ethernet, IPv4 Over 1394, IEEE 802.11b, etc.)
079 Domain Name
(Ethernet)
084 Setting List PrintPrint
Settings List
090 TELNET Operation
SettingsTELNET
(0:OFF 1:ON)
Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings.
091 Web Operation Web
(0:OFF 1:ON)
092 Primary WINS Server
IPv4 Address
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disables or enables the Web operation.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
This SP is used to set and later refer to the WINS IPv4 primary address used by the Ethernet or the wireless
LAN (802.11b). The current address is displayed and printed in the SMC report as aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd and is entered as 8-bit data. For example, if the number
"192.168.000.001" is entered, it is recorded as
"0C0A80001h".
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-94
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
096 Rendezvous Operation This SP disables/enables Rendezvous operation.
This is a set of protocols that allows a device on an IP network to automatically recognize and connect with other devices (such as a printer) on a network. Once a new device is connected to the network, it can be used immediately by every computer on the network. No special setup procedures or configuration settings are required
1: Enable 0: Disable
145 Operation IPv6 Link
Local Address
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
147 Operation IPv6 Status
Address 1
149 Operation IPv6 Status
Address 2
151 Operation IPv6 Status
Address 3
These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
153 Operation IPv6 Status
Address 4
155 Operation IPv6 Status
Address 5
156 IPv6 Manual Setting
Address
157 Operation IPv6
Manual Setting
Address
158 IPv6 Gateway
Address
159 Operation IPv6
Gateway Address
162 IPv6 Access Control
Display
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
This SP is the operation IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Operation Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
This SP is the IPv6 operation gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b).
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
This SP enables the display for access control of the
IPv6 addresses.
SM 5-95
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5831 Initial Setting Clear
Press Execute to initialize all User Tool settings and restore them to their factory settings.
5832 HDD Formatting
001
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
HDD Formatting (All)
002
003
004
005
HDD Formatting (IMH)
HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
HDD Formatting (Job Log)
HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006
007
008
009
011
HDD Formatting (User Info.)
Mail RX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a Design)
HDD Formatting (Log)
HDD Formatting (Ridoc DiskTopBinder)
5833 e-Cabinet Enable
Enables the e-Cabinet function. Then, the user names in the cabinet are enabled for use with the POP server.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5836* Capture ( B064 )
001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
002 Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from the initial system screen.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
003 Print Backup Function (0:Off 1:On)
Turns the print backup feature on and off. Default: 0 (Off)
When this feature is on, the print backup features are shown in the initial system settings. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB:Media Link
Board) is installed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-96
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
061
071
072
073
074
075
076
081
082
083
084
085
086
091
092
093
094
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
Captured File Resend (B064)
To decrease the load on the network, only the captured document is sent (0), or the network accurately keeps the captured document and it can be sent again
(1).
Reduction for Copy Color
Reduction for Copy B&W Text
[0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
[0~6/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Copy B&W Other
Reduction for Printer Color
Reduction for Printer B&W
Reduction for Printer B&W HQ
[0~6/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
[0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
[0~6/1]
0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
[1~5/1]
1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
Format for Copy Color
Format for Copy B&W Text
Format Copy B&W Other
Format for Printer Color
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU
Format for Printer B&W
Format for Printer B&W HQ
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
(
Default for JPEG [5~95/1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
High Quality for JPEG
Low Quality for JPEG
Default Format for Backup Files
B140)
Sets the quality level of JPEG images for high quality sent to the Document Server with the MLB (Media Link Board).
[5~95/1]
Sets the quality level of JPEG images for low quality sent to the Document Server with the MLB (Media Link Board).
[5~95/1]
Sets the format of the backup files.
[0~2/1]
0: TIFF
1: JPEG
2: For printing
This feature can be selected only if
SP5836-3 is set to “1”.
5-97
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
095
097
098
Default Resolution for Backup Files Sets the resolution conversion ratio for the backup files.
[0~3/1]
0: 1x
1: ½x
2: 1/3 x
3: ¼x
Default Compression for Backup Files Sets the rate of compression for the backup files.
[0~2/1]
0: Standard
1: Low
2: High
Back Projection Removal
( B140)
Removes the ghost images that are copied from the back sides of twosided originals.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5836
001
002
Capture Setting ( B140/B246/D052 Series )
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from the initial system screen.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
003 Print Back-up Function
Determines whether the print back-up function setting can be changed.
[0~1/ 0/ 1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
071 Reduction for Copy
Color
072 Reduction for Copy B&W
Text
[0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
[0~6/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
073 Reduction for Copy B&W
Other
074 Reduction for Printer
Color
075 Reduction for Printer
B&W
[0~6/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
[0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
[0~6/1]
0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-98
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
076 Reduction for Printer
B&W HQ
081 Format for Copy Color
DFU
082 Format for Copy B&W
Text
[1~5/1]
1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
083 Format Copy B&W Other [0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
084 Format for Printer Color
DFU
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
085 Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
086 Format for Printer B&W
HQ
[0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
091 Default for JPEG [5~95/1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
092 Capture Setting: Page Quality for JPEG (High Quality)
Determines the quality level of JPEG images for high quality sent to the Document
Server via the MLB (Media Link Board).
[5~95/ 60/ 1]
093 Capture Setting: Page Quality for JPEG (Low Quality)
Determines the quality level of JPEG images for low quality sent to the Document
Server via the MLB (Media Link Board).
[5~95/ 40/ 1]
094 Default Format for Backup Files
Sets the format for backup files created when the print backup function is used.
[0~4/ 0 /1]
0: TIFF
1: JPEG
2: J2K
3: PDF Single
4: PDF Multi
095 Default Resolution for Backup Files
Sets the resolution for backup files (JPEG, TIFF) when the print backup function is used. This SP can be used only after JPEG or TIFF is selected for SP583f6 094.
[0~6/ 2 /1]
0: 1/1
1: 1/2
3: 1/4
6: 2/3 (Unavailable for some models)
SM 5-99
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5839
096 Default User Name for Backup Files
Sets the user name when the print backup function is used.
Limit: 8 alphanumeric characters.
097 Default Compression for Backup Files
This SP sets the compression rate for JPEG backup files when the print backup function is used. This SP operates only after SP5826 0094 has been set for "1"
(JPEG).
[0~2/ 0 /1]
098 Capture Setting: Gamma SW for Backup File
Removes the ghost images transferred from the back sides of double-sided originals.
1 : Enable
0: Disable
007
008
009
010
IEEE 1394
This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed.
Cycle Master
Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable (Off)
1: Enable (On)
BCR Mode
Determines how BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) operates on the 1394 standard bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM.
(NVRAM: 2-bits)
[Always Effective]
IRM 1394a Check
Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM.
[0~1/1]
0: Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a
1: After IRM is checked, if IRM does not conform then independent node switches to IRM.
Unique ID
Lists the ID (Node_Unique_ID) assigned to the device by the system administrator.
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFM: Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator.
Instead, the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used.
ON: The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used, and the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored. Also, when the serial bus is reset, extra bus transactions are opened for the enumeration.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-100
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
011
012
013
Logout
Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP-2. (1-bit)
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFM: Disable (refuse login). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of login request (standard operation)
ON: Enable (force logout). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of login request, and the initiator forces the login.
Login
Enables or disables the exclusive login feature (SBP-2 related).
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFM: Disables. The exclusive login (LOGIN ORB exclusive it) is ignored.
ON: Enables. Exclusive login is in effect.
Login MAX
Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits)
[0~63/1]
0: Reserved
63: Reserved
006
007
011
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
WEP Key Select
Determines how the initiator (SBP-2) handles subsequent login requests.
[0~1/1]
0: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is refused.
1: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is refused and the initiator logs out.
Note: Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed.
SM 5-101
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5841* Supply Name Setting
001
Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
Toner Name Setting: Black Enter the name of the toner in use.
Standard Staples 011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2
013 StapleStd3
014 StapleStd4
021 StapleBind1
022 StapleBind2
023 StapleBind3
Saddle-Stitch Staples
5842* 001 Net File Analysis Mode Setting Bit SW 0011 1111
5842 GWWS Analysis Mode Setting ( B246 ) DFU
This settings select the output mode for debugging information as each network file is processed.
5844* USB
001 Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
004
Sets the vendor ID:
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
Sets the product ID.
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
[0000~9999/1] DFU
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized as the BCD.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-102
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5845* Delivery Server ( B064 )
These are delivery server settings.
001 FTP Port No.
[0~65535/1]
003
004
005
006
008
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[0~FFFFFFFF/1]
Retry Interval
Sets the time interval before the machine tries again when it goes back to standby after an error occurs during an image transfer with the delivery scanner or SMTP server.
[60~900/1]
Number of Retries
Sets the number of times the machine tries again before it returns to standby after an error occurs during an image transfer with the delivery or SMTP server.
[0~99/1]
Capture Server IP Address
Sets the capture server IP address for the capture feature.
[0~0xFFFFFFF]
Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device.
[0~999/1]
Connects to the Scan Router server for delivery of scanned documents.
[0~1/1]
0: No connection to Scan Router delivery server
1: Connected to Scan Router server for delivery of scanned documents.
IP Address (Secondary)
Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address, and does not refer to the DNS setting.
SM 5-103
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5845
001
002
005
006
008
009
010
011
013
Delivery Server ( B140/B246/D052 )
These are delivery server settings.
FTP Port No.
[0~65535/1]
IP Address
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[0~FFFFFFFF/1]
Capture Server IP Address
Sets the IP address that is assigned to the PC that the capture server (eCabinet or ScanRouter) operates. This IP address is set remotely when the delivery server (Scan Router) IO device is registered. This SP only enables the IP address permit access to the DNS browser names.
Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device.
[0~999/1]
IP Address (Secondary)
Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address, and does not refer to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model
Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O device.
[0~4/1]
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0~255/1]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”)
Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
Delivery Server Scheme (Primary)
NIA 12.14
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-104
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
Delivery Server Port Number (Primary)
NIA 12.14
Delivery Server URL Path (Primary)
NIA 12.14
Delivery Server Scheme (Secondary)
NIA 12.14
Delivery Server Port Number (Secondary)
NIA 12.14
Delivery Server URL Path (Secondary)
NIA 12.14
Capture Server Scheme
NIA 12.14
Capture Server Port Number
NIA 12.14
Capture Server URL Path
NIA 12.14
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
001
002
003
006
Machine ID (for Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
6-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
8-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
[2000~50000/1]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book.
[0~255/1 s]
0: No retries
007 Delivery Server Retry Times
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book.
[0~255/1]
008 Delivery Server Maximum Entries
SM 5-105
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
010
040
041
Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the users of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[20000~50000/1]
LDAP Search Timeout
Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1~255/1]
Addr Book Migration (SD -> HDD)
This SP moves the address book data from an SD card to the HDD. You must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install HDD.
3. Insert the SD card with the address book data in SD card Slot ???.
4. Turn the machine on.
SP5846
6. Turn the machine off.
7. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot ???.
8. Turn the machine on.
Notes:
• Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD with the data from the SD card.
• We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD card with
SP5846 051 before you execute this SP.
• After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book data is deleted from the source SD card. If the operation fails, the data is not erased from the SD card.
Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage.
Executing this SP by the service technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system administrator or key operator.
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes successfully, any user can access the address book.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-106
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
SM
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
060
Initialize All Settings & Address Book
The SP clears all the setting information managed in UCS and address book information (local, delivery, LDAP) and restores these settings to their default values. Use this SP to initial the account information (user codes and passwords) for system managers and users as well.
Note :
• Be sure to cycle the machine off and on after you execute this SP code.
• Once this SP has been executed, a message on the screens of applications that use the address book will prompt users that the address book is being updated. This prevents the machine from issuing SC870.
• The machine initializes to determine if the address book is stored on the HDD or on an SD card. In order for the machine to determine whether to recognize an address book on the HDD or the SD card, the machine must be cycled off and on once more to determine whether the machine should recognize the address book on the HDD or the SD card.
Initialize Local Address Book
Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine managed with UCS.
Initialize Delivery Addr Book
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize LDAP Addr Book
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize All Addr Book
Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not deleted.
Backup All Addr Book
Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
Restore All Addr Book
Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Clear Backup Info.
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is writeprotected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book.
Bit Meaning
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
1 Japan Only
2
3
4 --- Not Used ---
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
5-107
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
062
063
064
065
090
091
094
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password.
[0~32/1]
Note:
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.
• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book.
Complexity Option 2
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the length of the password.
[0~32/1]
Note:
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.
• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book.
Complexity Option 3
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the length of the password.
[0~32/1]
Note:
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.
• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book.
Complexity Option 4
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the length of the password.
[0~32/1]
Note:
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.
• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book.
Plain Data Forbidden
Lets you to prevent the address from transmission as plain data. This is a security function that prevents unauthorized access to address book data.
[0~1/1]
0: No check. Address book data not protected.
1: Check. Enables operation of UCS without data from HDD or SC card and without creating address book information with plain data.
FTP Auth. Port Settings
Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the individual authorization mode.
[0~65535/1]
Encryption Start
Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP server.
[0~255/1] No default
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-108
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5847*
002
003
005
006
021
Net File Resolution Reduction ( B064 )
5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
“NetFile” refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
Rate for Copy B&W Text
Rate for Copy B&W Other
[0~4 /1]
0: 1x
Rate for Printer B&W
Rate for Printer B&W HQ
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95/1]
5847 Repository Resolution Reduction ( B140/B246/D052 Series )
5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
“Repository” refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the DeskTopBinder software.
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
005 Rate for Printer B&W
006 Rate for Printer B&W HQ
021
[0~6/1]
[0~6/1]
[0~6/1]
[0~6/1]
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x 1
1
: “6: 2/3x” applies to
003, 005, 006 only.
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95/1]
SM 5-109
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5848
001
Web Service
5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
Access Control. : NetFile (Lower 4 Bits)
Bit switch settings.
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to Desk Top Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan
Router have no effect on capture.
002 Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4
Bits)
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop
Binder.
003 Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4
Bits)
004 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4
Bits)
005 Acc. Ctrl.: Delivery Input (Lower 4 Bits)
Switches access control on and off.
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
007 Acc. Ctrl Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4
Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits)
011 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower
4 Bits)
013 Acc. Ctrl: Fax (Lower 4 Bits)
021 Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)
022 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower
4 Bits)
041 Acc. Ctrl: Security Setting (Lower 4
Bits)
100 Repository: Download Image Max.
Size
201 Access Ctrl: Regular Trans
210
211
212
No information is available at this time.
0 : Not allowed
1: Allowed
Setting: Log Type: Job 1
No information is available at this time.
Setting: Log Type: Job 2
No information is available at this time.
Setting: Log Type: Access
No information is available at this time.
213
214
215
216
217
Setting: Primary Srv
No information is available at this time.
Setting: Secondary Srv
No information is available at this time.
Setting: Start Time
No information is available at this time.
Setting: Interval Time
No information is available at this time.
Setting: Timing
No information is available at this time.
[1~1024/1 K]
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-110
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5849* Installation Date
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
001 Display The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to “Installation
Date” or “Inst. Date”.
Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter.
[0~1/1]
0: No Print
1: Print
5850* Address Book Function (B064)
001 Switch Module Selects the module for managing user information.
[0~1/1]
0: SCS
1: UCS
002 Select Title Selects the default heading of the address book.
[2~4/1]
2: Heading 1
3: Heading 2
4: Heading 3
5851 Bluetooth Mode
Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
5852 SMTP (B064)
001
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. The protocol for communication between Internet main MTAs (Message Transfer Agents).
Server
Name
Sets the server name.
002 Port Number Sets the port number
5853 Stamp Data Download
Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user will not have access to the fixed stamps (“Confidential”, “Secret”, etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the
HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
SM 5-111
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5856 Remote ROM Update
When set to “1” allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable
[0~1/1]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5857 Save Debug Log ( B140)
001 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
002
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD Card)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2~3 /1]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
Save to HDD 005
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk. (
Save to SD Card
5.8.1)
009
010
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card. ( 5.8.1)
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the
SD Card. ( 5.8.2)
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the
SD Card. ( 5.8.2)
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data 011
012
013
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010 or 011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-112
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
014
015
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory) onto an SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. ( 5.7.4)
017
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. ( 5.7.4)
Make SD Debug
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. ( 5.7.4)
5858 *
001
002
003
004
Debug Save When ( B140/B246/D052)
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of
SC error codes.
Engine SC Error (0:OFF
1:ON)
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors.
Controller SC Error (0:OFF
1:ON)
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors.
Any SC Error
Jam (0:OFF 1:ON)
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
[0~65535/1]
Stores jam errors.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
5859* Debug Log Save Function ( B140/B246/D052)
001
002
Key 1
Key 2
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board. ( 5.8.1)
003 Key 3 [-9999999~9999999/1]
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
Key 4
Key 5
Key 6
Key 7
Key 8
Key 9
Key 10
SM 5-113
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5860* SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 (B140/B246/D052)
020 Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1~168/1]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time.
021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
025
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0~1/1]
0: No. “From” item not switched.
1: Yes. “From” item switched.
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Occasionally, all SMTP certifications may fail with SP5860 006 set to "2" to enable encryption during SMTP certification for the SMTP server. This can occur if the SMTP server does not meet RFC standards. In such cases you can use this
SP to set the SMTP certification method directly. However, this SP can be used only after SP5860 003 has been set to "1" (On).
Bit0: LOGIN
Bit1: PLAIN
Bit2: CRAM_MD5
Bit3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit4 to Bit 7: Not Used
001
002
003
004
006
007
Settings )
SMB Default User Name
This SP sets the default user name used for SMB sending.
SMB Default Password
This SP sets the default password used for SMB sending.
FTP Default User Name
This SP sets the default user name used for FTP sending.
FTP Default Password
This SP sets the default password for FTP sending.
NCP Default User Name
This SP sets the default user name used for NCP sending.
NCP Default Password
This SP sets the default password for NCP sending.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-114
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5864 Mail Text Clear ( B246/D052)
This SP clears mail text information. When this SP is called at the request to write the SP mode data, the mail text information stored on the DCS server is reset to its default value. This is used as a trigger to clear mail text information when the system is initialized with the User Tools.
5865 Clear Mail Account Information (B246/D052)
Clears the mail account parameters.
5866 Enable E-Mail Notification
This SP enables the e-mail notification function. (B246/D052)
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5870 Common Key Info Writing ( B140/B246 )
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS specifications.
001 Writing Note: These SPs are for future use and currently are not used.
003 Initialize
5871 HDD Function Disable ( B140)
Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the
HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the setting.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Note : This SP is intended for use during installation of the Data Overwrite
Security Unit B735 (a new option). For more, see section “1. Installation”.
5873 SD Card Apli. (B140/B246/D052)
Allows you to “integrate” (copy) applications from SD cards onto other SD cards.
( 5.5)
SM 5-115
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5875 SC Auto Reboot (B140/B246/D052)
This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error occurs.
Note : The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.
0: On, 1: Off
*DOM: (Japan Only) default: 0 (Reboots automatically) The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
*EXP (Outside Japan) default: 1 (Does not reboot automatically.
Changing this setting to "0" sets the machine to reboot automatically after an SC occurs.
002 Reboot This setting determines how the machine reboots after an SC code is issued.
[0~1/ * /1]
0: Allows manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
*DOM (Japan Only) default: 1 Automatic reboot
*EXP (Outside Japan) default: 0 Manual reboot
This SP enables the DOS application (Data Overwrite Security). Do this SP after installing Data Overwrite Security Unit C B735.
5885
020
Document Svr Access Control DFU
This SP is a bit switch setting.
Bit Meaning
0 Forbid all document server access
(1)
1 Forbid user mode access (1)
2 Forbid print function (1)
3 Forbid fax TX (1)
4 Forbid scan sending (1)
5 Forbid downloading (1)
7 Reserved
5886 Permit ROM Update DFU
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
[0-1/ 0 /1]
0: On
1: Off
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-116
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5907* Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the “Original Type” key and “#” key at the same time. When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913
002
Switchover Permission Time
Print Application Timer
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating because a key has not been pressed.
[3~30/1 s]
102 Print Application Set
This SP prescribes the time interval to expire before the machine shifts to another application when another application currently holds access control for the standby mode while there is no key input.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
5914* Application Counter Display (B064)
Selects the total counts that will be displayed in the UP mode.
[0~1/1]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
5915* Mechanical Counter Detection
Displays whether the mechanical counter is installed in the machine.
[0~2/1]
0: Not detected.
1: Detected
2: Unknown
5918* A3/DLT Counter Display
Determines whether pressing the counter key displays count confirmation: system initial settings system manager settings counter
[0~1/1]
0: No display
1: Display
This SP affects the display only, and has no effect on SP5104 (A3/DLT Double
Count).
SM 5-117
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5921 Key Card Setting Japan Only (B064)
Enables operation with a key card device.
[0~1/1]
0: No key card operation
1: Key card operation
5952 Fact Adjust Mode DFU
5959* Paper Size (B064)
005
Tray 1 (Tandem Tray) can accept two paper sizes: A4 LEF and LT LEF. Enter the correct number to select the size of the paper loaded in Tray 1:
A4 LEF: 5
LT LEF: 38
If the A3/DLT Tray Kit B475 is installed, enter the correct number to select the size of the paper loaded in the kit:
Size No.
A3 SEF 132
Size
11" x 17"
No.
160
B4 SEF
A4 LEF
141
5
8
8
1/2
1/2
" x 14" SEF
" x 11" LEF
167
38
Tray 4 (LCT)
Tray 4 (LCT) accepts three paper sizes. Enter the correct number of the size of the paper loaded in the LCT:
A4 LEF: 5
B5 LEF: 14
LT LEF: 38
If the LG/B4 Feeder Kit B474 is installed, enter the correct number to select the size of the paper loaded in the kit:
A4 SEF: 133
B4 SEF: 141
LG SEF: 164
The Cover Interposer Tray B470 is provided with two arrays of paper size sensors to detect the paper size. However, some of the paper sizes may not be indicated correctly on the display panel. For more details, refer to the Cover
Interposer Tray manual section “Paper Size Detection”.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-118
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5959* Paper Size (B140/B246/D052 Series)
005
The following paper sizes can be set. If the A3 DLT kit is not installed, you can only use settings 0 and 1.
0: A4
2:A3
3:B4
4:A4R (A4 SEF)
5:11 x 17
6: 8
1/2
x 14 R (LG SEF)
7: 8
1/2
x 11 R (LT SEF)
8: B5
9: B5 R (B5 SEF)
10: Custom Size
Tray 4 (LCT)
Tray 4 (LCT) accepts three paper sizes. Enter the correct number of the size of the paper loaded in the LCT:
0: A4
1:8
1/2
x 11
2:B5
3:A4 R (A4 SEF)
4: 8
1/2
x 14 R (LG SEF)
5: B4 R (B4 SEF)
6: 8
1/2
x 14 R (LG SEF)
7: Custom Size
Sheet
The Cover Interposer Tray B470 is provided with two arrays of paper size sensors to detect the paper size. However, some of the paper sizes may not be indicated correctly on the display panel. For more details, refer to the Cover Interposer Tray manual section “Paper Size Detection”.
5967 Copy Server: Set Function
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.[0~1/1]
0: ON
1: OFF
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, “Light” or “Full
(Professional)”, is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)
5985 Device Setting ( B140/B246/D052 )
The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
001 On Board NIC 0: Disable 1: Enable
002 On Board USB
SM 5-119
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5990 SP Print Mode (SMC Print)
001
In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the desired print, and press Execute.
All (Data List)
002
003
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program Data
006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
023 Scanner User Program
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-120
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
SP6xxx Peripherals
6006* ADF Registration Adjustment
001
002
ADF Horizontal Registration (Front)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front in ADF mode.
[–3~+3/0.1 mm]
ADF Horizontal Registration (Back)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the back in ADF mode.
[–3~+3/0.1 mm]
003
004
ADF Vertical Registration (Front)
Adjusts the vertical registration for the front in ADF mode.
[–30 ~+30/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+30 = +5.1 mm
ADF Vertical Registration (Back)
005
Adjusts the vertical registration for the back in ADF mode.
[–30 ~+30/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+30 = +5.1 mm
ADF Buckle Adjustment 1
Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction sensor/entrance roller. A higher setting causes more buckling.
[–12.0~+12/0.25 mm]
-12 = -3.0 mm
+12 = +3.0 mm
006
007
008
ADF Buckle Adjustment 2
Adjusts the roller timing at the interval sensor/scanning roller. A higher setting causes more buckling.
[–8.0~+8/0.25 mm]
-8 = -2 mm
+8 = +2 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Front)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the front.
[–20~+20/0.5 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Back)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the back.
[–20~+20/0.5 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
SM 5-121
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6007 ADF Input Check
Displays signals received from sensors and switches in the ADF. ( 5.6.3)
6008 ADF Output Check
Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing. ( 5.6.4)
001
002
Feed Motor: Forward
Feed Motor: Reverse
003
004
005
006
007
Transport Motor: Forward
Exit Motor: Forward
Pick-up Motor: Reverse
Bottom Plate Motor: Forward
Bottom Plate Motor: Reverse
6009 DF Free Run Performs an ADF free run in duplex original mode.
6016 Original Size Determination Priority
Allows selection of alternate settings for automatic original size detection. ( 6.4.8)
6017* Sheet Through Magnification
This changes the magnification by adjusting the speed of scanning.
[–50~+50/1 %]
6020* ADF Contact Mode In/Out
If the original is small (B6, A5, HLT), the delay sensor detects the leading edge of the sheet and delays the original at the entrance roller for the prescribed number of pulses to buckle the leading edge and correct skew.
[0~1/1]
0: Delay skew correction only for small originals
1: Delay skew correction for all originals, regardless of size. (May reduce the scanning speed of the ADF)
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-122
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6101 Punch Position Adjustment
Adjusts the punch hole positions in the direction of paper feed.
NA: North America
DOM: Japan
EU: Europe
SCAN: Scandinavia
001 2-Hole:DOM
002 3-Hole:NA
003 4-Hole:EU
004 4-Hole:SCAN
005 2-Hole:NA
[-75~+75/0.5 mm]
+ Value: Shifts punch unit in the direction of feed.
- Value: Shift punch unit against direction of feed.
Paper Feed
B132S921.WMF
6102 Punch Position Adjustment
Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
[-20~+20/0.4 mm]
+ Value: Shifts punch unit toward back of the finisher.
- Value: Shift punch unit toward front of the finisher.
001 2-Hole:DOM
002 3-Hole:NA
003 4-Hole:EU
004 4-Hole:SCAN
005 2-Hole:NA
Paper Feed
B132S922.WMF
6105* Staple Position Adjustment ( B064/B140 )
Adjusts the stapling position in the main scan direction.
[–3.5~+3.5/0.5 mm]
A larger value shifts the stapling position outward.
SM 5-123
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6105 Jogger Fence Fine Adjust ( B246/D052 )
This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the finisher stapling tray. The adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
[-1.5 to +1.5/ 0 /0.5 mm]
+ Value: Increases distance between jogger fences and the sides of the stack.
- Value: Decreases the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack.
007 DLT SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
6106 Adjust Output Jog Position (B246/D052 )
Use this SP code to adjust the positions of the jogger fences when the pages are aligned (jogged) horizontally in the stapling tray for stapling in the booklet finisher.
The jogger fences close in on the sides of the stack on the paper tray. These side fences move in and out perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
[-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
• The higher the setting, the narrower the jogger span and the smaller the gaps between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is tighter.
• The lower the setting, the wider the jogger span and the wider the gaps between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is not as tight.
The settings are done for each paper size.
SEF denotes "Short Edge Feed".
LEF denotes "Long Edge Feed".
012 Other
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-124
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6107 Cover Feeder Size Change ( B246 /D052 )
This SP sets the priority paper size setting for the cover interposer tray (B704).
001 Priority (All) 0: A3
1: 12"x18"
002 EU/CH
003 NA
004 NA
005 NA
006 EU/CH
007 EU/CH
008 EU/CH
0: 8½" x 13"
1: 8½" x 13"
2: 8¼" x 13"
0: 8½" x 14"
1: 8½" x 13"
0: LT LEF
1: 10½" x 7¼"
0: LT SEF
1: 8" x 10"
0: Taiwan 8-Kai
1: DLT
0: Taiwan 16-Kai
1: LT SEF
0: Taiwan 16-Kai
1: LT LEF
6109 Staple Position Adjustment
Use this SP to shift the position of the stapling done by the corner stapler of the finisher. This SP shifts the staple position forward and back across the direction of paper feed.
• Use the “ • ” key to toggle between + and –.
• A larger value shifts the stapling position to shift forward.
• A smaller value shifts the stapling position backward.
The settings are done for each paper size.
[-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
SM 5-125
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6113* Punch Hole Adjustment ( B064/B140 )
001 2-Holes
Adjusts the punch hole position in the sub-scan direction for the punch unit with two punch holes.
[–7.5~+7.5/0.5 mm]
A larger value shifts the punch holes towards the edge of the paper.
002 3-Holes
Adjusts the punch hole position in the sub-scan direction for the punch unit with three punch holes.
[–7.5~+7.5/0.5 mm]
A larger value shifts the punch holes towards the edge of the paper.
6113 Folder Position Adjustment ( B246/D052 )
This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet
Finisher.
[-3~+3/ 0 /0.2 mm]
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
Feed O ut
B132S924.WMF
6114 Folding Number
This SP sets the number of times the folding rollers are driven forward and reverse to sharpen the crease of a folded booklet before it exits the folding unit of the Booklet
Finisher. When set at the default (0):
• The folding blade pushes the center of the stack into the nip of the folding roller.
• The folding rollers rotate ccw to crease the booklet, reverse cw, then rotate ccw again to crease the booklet fold twice before feeding to the folding unit exit rollers.
[1~6/ 0 /1]
0:2, 1:5, 2:10, 3:15, 4:20, 5:25, 6:30 passes
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-126
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6116* Staple Limit Counter for Thick Paper
Multiply the normal limit by this number to determine the staple limit number for thick paper.
[1~3/1 sheet]
6117 Finisher Input Check
001 INPUT1
002 INPUT2
003 INPUT3
004 INPUT4
005 INPUT5
006 INPUT6
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. ( 5.6.5)
6118 Finisher Output Check Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes. ( 5.6.6)
6118 Jogger Off/On
This SP switches the jogging operation of the output jogger attached to the side of the finisher off and on.
[0~1/1] 0: Off, 1: On
Note : After installation of the Output Jogger Unit B703, this SP must be set to "1" for the jogging motor to operate the jogging fences.
6119* Punch Function Enabled (Thick Paper)
Allows punching heavier paper, including tab sheets.
[0~1/1]
0: Punching thick paper prohibited
1: Punching thick paper allowed
6120* Finisher Free Run (B478/B706) ( B064/B140 )
Selects the free run mode during testing.
001
002
Free Run 1
Free Run 2
Stapling Mode
All Mode
Stapling only
All finisher operation is tested
003
004
Free Run 3 Packing Mode Before you move the finisher to a new location, do this SP. When you switch on the machine after you moved it, the finisher automatically goes to the ready condition.
Free Run 4 Shift Mode Tests the shift mode
SM 5-127
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6120* Staple Jogger Adjustment ( B246/D052 )
Horizontal folding skew can occur when the distance between the jogger fences and paper edges is not within 0 to 0.5 mm. This SP allows the jogger fences to be moved away from or closer to the edges of the stack to achieve this target distance.
001 A3
002 B4
[-1.5~+1.5/0.5 mm]
A higher value moves the fence away from the paper, while a lower value brings the fences closer in.
007 DLT
008 LG
009
010
LTT ( LT SEF)
LTY (LT LEF)
011 Other
6121 Finisher Input Check:
Finisher 1
6122 Finisher Input Check:
Finisher 2
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. ( 5.6.7)
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. ( 5.6.9)
6124 Finisher Output Check:
Finisher 1
Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes. ( 5.6.8
6125 Finisher Output Check:
Finisher 2
Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes. ( 5.6.10
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-128
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6126 Fold Position Setting
This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet
Finisher.
[-3~+3/ 0 /0.2 mm]
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
Feed O ut
B132S924.WMF
6128 Fine Adj Z-Fold 1
Use this SP code to adjust the position of the first fold [A]. This adjustment decreases or increases the distance ( crease of the 2nd fold [C].
A ) between the leading edge [B] and the
[-2 to +4/ 0 / 0.2 mm]
001 1st Fold: A3 SEF
002 1st Fold: B4 SEF
003 1st Fold: A4 SEF
004 1st Fold: DLT SEF
005 1st Fold: LG SEF
006 1st Fold: LT SEF
007 1st Fold: Other
008 2nd Fold: A3 SEF
009 2nd Fold: B4 SEF
010 2nd Fold: A4 SEF
011 2nd Fold: DLT SEF
012 2nd Fold: LG SEF
013 2nd Fold: LT SEF
014 2nd Fold: Other
016 2nd Fold: A3 SEF
L1
B234S904.WMF
A
SM 5-129
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6122 Z-Fold Position Adjust (B140)
These settings adjust the positions of the first and second folds of paper fed through the Z-folding unit. The first 8 settings (001-008) adjust the position of the first fold for the paper sizes listed. The second 8 settings (009-016) adjust the position of the second fold. The illustration shows the position of the sheet while it goes through the lower exit rollers after it has been folded.
1st Fold
001 A3
002 B4
004 DLT
005 LG
[-4~+4/0.2 mm]
Adjusts the position of the first fold [A] to decrease or increase the distance ( A ) between the leading edge [B] and the crease of the 2nd fold [C].
007
008
12 x 18
1st Fold: Other
2nd Fold
009 A3
010 B4
012 DLT
013 LG
[-4~+4/0.2 mm]
Adjusts the position of the 2nd fold [C] to decrease or increase the length (L1) of the sheet between the trailing edge [D] and the 2nd fold.
015 12 x 18
016 Other
[D]
L1
[A]
[B] A
[C]
B246S911.WMF
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-130
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6900* ADF Bottom Plate Setting
Sets the timing for raising and lowering the bottom plate of the ADF.
[0~1/1]
0: Original set
1: Copy start
6902* Fold Position Adjustment
Adjusts the fold position of the copies for saddle-stitching according to paper size for multiple sheets. The amount of folding skew for single and multiple sheets is different. This SP adjusts for multiple sheets. SP6903 adjusts for single sheets.
Note (B140) :
• Always set SP6902 first and then set SP6903.
• If the order is reversed, the value of SP6902 is added to SP6903.
• This causes the folding position to shift for single-sheets and causes the booklet to skew.
001 A3
002 B4
005 DLT
006 LG
008 Others
(B140)
6903* Fold Position Adjustment (1 Sheet) (B140)
Adjusts the fold position for single sheet booklet copies to minimize vertical folding skew. The amount of folding skew for single and multiple sheets is different. This
SP adjusts for single sheets. SP6902 adjusts for multiple sheets.
Note : Always set SP6902 first and then set SP6903. If the order is reversed, the value of SP6902 is added to SP6903. This causes the folding position to shift for single-sheets and causes the booklet to skew.
001 A3
002 B4
[-7.5~+7.5/0.5 mm]
A higher value brings the fold closer to the trailing edge; a lower value moves it away from the trailing edge.
005 DLT
006 LG
008 Others
6904 Punch Function Enabled (Z-Fold) (B140)
Switches on the hole punch for use when the machine operates with the Z-fold unit.
[0~1/1]
0: No punching with Z-fold unit operation
1: Punching allowed with Z-fold unit operation
SM 5-131
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
SP7xxx Data Logs
7001* Main Motor Operation Time Displays the total drum rotation time.
7002* Original Counter (B064)
001 Total Displays the total number of fed originals.
002 Copy Displays the total number of fed originals in copy mode.
003 Fax
005
006
Scanner
Others
Displays the total number of fed originals in document server mode.
Displays the total number of fed originals in scanner mode.
Displays the total number of fed originals in other modes.
7003* Print Counter (B064)
Displays the total number of prints in all modes.
001
002
004
005
Total Count
Copy
Printer
Others
Displays the total number of prints in all modes.
Displays the total number of prints in copy mode.
Displays the total number of prints in printer mode.
Displays the total number of prints in other modes.
7006* C/O, P/O Counter (B064)
001 C/O Displays the number of sets of copies per original when making 10 or more sets of copies.
When making 15 sets of copies of an original, this counter value will increase by “6”.
002 P/O Displays the number of sets of prints per original data when making 10 or more sets.
When making 15 sets of prints of an original data, this counter value will increase by “6”.
7007* Other Device Counters (B064)
Displays the count total for the selected item.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-132
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
7101* Print Count – Paper Size (B064)
Displays the total number of prints by paper size.
Displays the number of copies by paper size.
Display range: 0~9999999
255 Other
7105* P Type Counter (B064)
001 Normal
002 Recycled
003 Special
Displays the total number of prints by paper type. A singlesided print counts as 1 and a two-sided print counts as 2.
Display range: 0~9999999
006 Letterhead
007 Label
008 Thick
009 OHP
010 Used
011 Index (Tab Sheets)
012 Tracing
255 Others
7201* Total Scan Counter (B064)
Displays the total number of scanned originals.
7204 * Print Counter – Paper Trays (B064)
Displays the total number of sheets fed from each paper tray.
001 By-pass
SM
006 LCT
5-133
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
7205 * ADF (B064)
Displays the total number of originals fed by the ADF.
7206 * Staple Counter (B064)
001 Normal
002 Booklet
Displays the total number of staples used.
7209 * Punch (B064)
Displays the total number of times the punch has been used.
7301* Number of Copies by Reproduction Ratio (B064)
001
002
Reduce 25% <-> 49%
Reduce 50% <-> 99%
Displays the total number of prints for each reproduction ratio range.
Display range: 0~9999999
004
005
Enlarge 101% <-> 200%
Enlarge 201% <-> 400%
SP7848 clears these counters.
006
007
Free Mag. %
Free Size Mag. %
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-134
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
7304* Copy: Number of Copies by Mode (B064)
Displays the total number of copies by original type. SP7837 or SP7848 clears this counter.
001 Text
002 Text/Photo
003 Photo
005 Pale
006 Punching
007 Repeat
008 Sort
009 Staple
010 Series
011 Erase
012 Duplex
013 ADF
017
018
Combine 1 Side
Combine 2 Side
021 Batch
022 SADF
024 Stamp
7305 Copy: Display Jobs by Continuous (B064)
Displays the total number of multiple print jobs by the size of the sets. SP7838 or
SP7848 clears this counter.
001
002
003
1 to 1
1 to 2 <-> 5
1 to 6 <-> 10
004
005
006
007
008
1 to 11 <-> 20
1 to 21 <-> 50
1 to 51 <-> 100
1 to 101 <-> 300
1 to 310 <-> Over
SM 5-135
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
7306 Copy: Display Jobs by Mode (B064)
Displays the total number of copy jobs by operation mode (stapling, punching, etc.). SP7839 or SP7848 clears this counter.
7320 Doc. Svr. – Scan Count
Displays the total number of pages stored in the document server. SP7840 or
SP7848 clears this counter.
7321 Doc. Svr. – Original Size Display
Displays by paper size the total number of originals stored in the document server.
SP7841 or SP7848 clears this counter.
7323 Doc. Svr. – Print Size Display
Displays by paper size the total number of prints stored in the document server.
SP7842 or SP7848 clears this counter.
7324 Doc. Svr. – Print Job Counter
Displays the total number of jobs executed from the document server. SP7843 or
SP7848 clears this counter.
7325 Doc. Svr. – Job Count (Page No)
Displays the number of pages in jobs executed from the document server. SP7844 or SP7848 clears this counter.
7326 Doc. Svr. – Job Count (File No.)
Displays the number of files in jobs executed from the document server. SP7845 or
SP7848 clears this counter.
7327 Doc. Svr. – Job Count (Set No.)
Displays the number of sets of multiple page print jobs executed from the document server. SP7846 or SP7848 clears this counter.
7328 Doc. Svr. – Job Count (Print Mode)
Displays the total number of prints in print mode executed from the document server. SP7847 or SP7848 clears this counter.
7401 * Total SC Counter
Displays the total number of SCs logged.
7403 * SC
Displays information about the 10 most recent service calls (Code, Total, Date, and
Details).
7502 * Total Paper Jam Counter
Displays the total number of copy jams.
7503 * Total Original Jam Counter
Displays the total number of original jams.
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-136
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
7504 Paper Jam Location
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Paper Late
(Remains ON)
1
3
4
5
Paper Lag
(Remains OFF)
53
54
55
On Screen What It Means
At power on
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
1st Paper Feed SN
2nd Paper Feed SN
3rd Paper Feed SN
6
7
8
9
56
57
58
59
Tray 4
External Tray
Registration 1
Registration 2
4th Paper Feed SN (Japan Only)
LCT Paper Feed SN
1st Vertical Transport SN
2nd Vertical Transport SN
10 60 Registration 3 3rd Vertical Transport SN
11 61 Registration 4th Vertical Transport SN (Japan
Only)
12 62 Middle Sensor Relay SN
20
21
22
23
24
34
14 Fusing
15 Duplex Exit
16
19
66
69
Duplex Exit
Ent Duplex
71
72
73
74
Ent Duplex 1
Ent Duplex 2
Ent Duplex 3
Exit Duplex
1-Bin Tray
Bypass: Non-Feed
Exit Unit Entrance SN
Paper Exit SN
Duplex Entrance SN
Duplex Transport SN 1
Duplex Transport SN 2
Duplex Transport SN 3
Duplex Inverter SN
1-Bin Tray SN Japan Only
By-pass Paper End SN
SM 5-137
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
105
106
109
110
111
113
115
116
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
7504
101
102
103
104
112
Finisher (B469: No Saddle Stitch)
Finisher 101. Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor at the precise time or remains at the entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 102. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 103. Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 104. Staple Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the staple entrance sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the staple entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 105. Exit Sensor after jogging
When the paper from the jogger unit fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 106. Stapler Unit 1
When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while stapling.
Finisher 109. Shift Motor
When the signal status of the lower tray encoder sensor does not change at the precise time during motor rotation. Returns SC733
Finisher 110. Jogger Fence Motor
When the status of the jogger fence HP sensor does not change at the precise time during jogger fence motor rotation. Returns SC722.
Finisher 111. Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not change at the precise time during shift roller motor rotation, or the status of the guide plate position sensor does not change at the precise time during guide plate motor rotation. Returns
SC732, SC736
Finisher 112. Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
When the status of the stapler HP sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler movement motor rotation, or the status of the stapler rotation sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler rotation motor.
Returns SC730, SC727
Finisher 113. Stapler Unit 2
Not logged. Returns SC724.
Finisher 115. Feed Out Belt Motor
When the status of the feed out belt HP sensor does not change at the precise time during feed out belt motor rotation. Returns SC725.
Finisher 116. Punch Hole Motor
When the status of the punch HP sensor does not change at the precise time during punch hole motor rotation. Returns SC729
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-138
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
113
115
116
103
104
105
106
109
7504
101
102
110
111
112
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
Finisher 1: SR4000 (Corner Stapling Only – No Booklet Stapling) (B246/D052)
Finisher 101. Finisher Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor at the precise time or remains at the entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 102. Proof Tray Exit
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 103. Finisher Exit
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 104. Staple Tray
The paper failed to arrive at or leave the stapling tray,.
Finisher 105. Jogging Tray
When the paper from the jogger unit fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 106. Corner Stapler
One or both staplers failed to send any signals while stapling.
Finisher 109. Tray Motor Jam
A jam has occurred and locked one or more of these motors that operate the staple tray and pre-stack tray: lower transport motor, positioning roller motor, jogger fence motor, stack junction gate motor
Finisher 110. Jogger Fences
When the status of the jogger fence HP sensor does not change at the precise time during jogger fence motor rotation. Returns SC722.
Finisher 111. Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not change at the precise time during shift roller motor rotation, or the status of the guide plate position sensor does not change at the precise time during guide plate motor rotation. Returns
SC732, SC736
Finisher 112. Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
When the status of the stapler HP sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler movement motor rotation, or the status of the stapler rotation sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler rotation motor.
Returns SC730, SC727
Finisher 113. Stapler Unit
Not logged. Returns SC724.
Finisher 115. Feed Out Belt Motor
When the status of the feed out belt HP sensor does not change at the precise time during feed out belt motor rotation. Returns SC725.
Finisher 116. Punch Hole Motor
When the status of the punch HP sensor does not change at the precise time during punch hole motor rotation. Returns SC729
SM 5-139
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
125
126
127
128
129
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
121
122
123
124
130
131
132
133
134
Finisher 121. Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor at the precise time or remains at the entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 122. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 123. Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 124. Staple Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the staple entrance sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the staple entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 125. Exit Sensor after jogging
When the paper from jogger unit fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 126. Stapler Unit 1
When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while stapling.
Finisher 127. Saddle Stitch Stapler Unit
Finisher : When the saddle stitch stapler fails to send any signals while stapling.
Saddle Stitch,
Finisher 128. Saddle Stitch Stapler Unit
When the status of the exit sensor does not change at the precise time during saddle stitching.
Finisher 129. Shift Motor
When the status of the upper tray limit sensor does not change at the precise time while lifting the upper exit tray, the status of the upper tray full sensor does not change at the precise time while lowering the upper exit tray, or the status of the lower tray encoder sensor does not change at the precise time while moving the lower tray. Returns SC733, SC726
Finisher 130. Jogger Fence Motor
When the status of the jogger fence HP sensor does not change at the precise time during jogger fence motor rotation. Returns SC722
Finisher 131. Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not change at the precise time during shift roller motor rotation, or the status of the guide plate position sensor does not change at the precise time during guide plate motor rotation.
Returns SC732, SC736
Finisher 132. Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
When the status of the stapler HP sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler movement motor rotation, or the status of the stapler rotation sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler rotation motor.
Returns SC730, SC727
Finisher 133. Stapler Unit 2
Not logged. Returns SC724, SC740, SC741
Finisher 134. Folder Plate Motor
When the status of the folder plate HP sensor does not change at the precise time during folder plate motor rotation. Returns SC739
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
5-140
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
125
126
127
128
129
135
136
7504
121
122
123
124
130
131
132
133
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
Finisher 135. Feed Out Belt Motor
When the status of the feed out belt HP sensor does not change at the precise time during feed out belt motor rotation. Returns SC725
Finisher 136. Punch Hole Motor
When the status of the punch HP sensor does not change at the precise time during punch hole motor rotation. Returns SC729
SR4000 (Corner Stapling, Booklet Stapling) ( B246/D052 )
Finisher 121. Finisher Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor at the precise time or remains at the entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 122. Proof Tray Exit
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 123. Finisher Exit
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 124. Staple Tray
When the paper fails to activate the staple entrance sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the staple entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 125. Jogging Tray
When the paper from jogger unit fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 126. Corner Stapler
When the stapler unit fails to send any signals while stapling.
Finisher 127. Booklet Stapler
Finisher : When the booklet stapler fails to send any signals during stapling.
Finisher 128. Fold Unit
When the status of the paper position does not change at the precise time during paper folding.
Finisher 129. Shift Tray
When the status of the upper tray limit sensor does not change at the precise time while lifting the upper exit tray, the status of the upper tray full sensor does not change at the precise time while lowering the upper exit tray, or the status of the lower tray encoder sensor does not change at the precise time while moving the lower tray. Returns SC733, SC726
Finisher 130. Jogger Fences
When the status of the jogger fence HP sensor does not change at the precise time during jogger fence motor rotation. Returns SC722
Finisher 131. Shift Roller or Guide Plate Motor
When the status of the shift roller HP sensor does not change at the precise time during shift roller motor rotation, or the status of the guide plate position sensor does not change at the precise time during guide plate motor rotation.
Returns SC732, SC736
Finisher 132. Stapler Movement or Stapler Rotation Motor
When the status of the stapler HP sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler movement motor rotation, or the status of the stapler rotation sensor does not change at the precise time during stapler rotation motor.
Returns SC730, SC727
Finisher 133. Stapler Unit
SM 5-141
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
B064 Series/B140 Series
/B246 Series/D052 Series
145
148
149
150
151
134
135
136
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
Not logged. Returns SC724, SC740, SC741
Finisher 134. Folder Plate Jam
When the status of the folder plate HP sensor does not change at the precise time during folder plate motor rotation. Returns SC739
Finisher 135. Feed Out Belt Motor
When the status of the feed out belt HP sensor does not change at the precise time during feed out belt motor rotation. Returns SC725
Finisher 136. Punch Hole Motor
When the status of the punch HP sensor does not change at the precise time during punch hole motor rotation. Returns SC729
141
142
143
144
153
Finisher 141. Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the entrance sensor at the precise time or remains at the entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 142. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the proof tray exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the proof tray exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 143. Exit Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 144. Staple Entrance Sensor
When the paper fails to activate the staple entrance sensor at the precise time after activating the entrance sensor or remains at the staple entrance sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 145. Exit Sensor after jogging
When the paper from jogger unit fails to activate the exit sensor at the precise time or remains at the exit sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
Finisher 148. Upper Transport Motor
When the upper transport motor fails to send any signals while rotating.
Finisher 149. Shift Motor
When the status of the low